九年英语课件
发布时间:2023-11-13 九年英语课件 英语课件九年英语课件。
想要更深入了解相关信息的话，不妨看看《九年英语课件》，我相信这对你会有好处。在教学过程中，教案和课件都是基础的组成部分，每位教师都应该认真考虑自己的教案和课件。教案是教学创新的必要手段之一。
九年英语课件 篇1
一、学生情况分析：
九(1)班共有学生36人，特点是班里尖子生不是很多，中间生占也不多，差生面大。当然大部分学生课堂学习积极性较高，回答问题较积极，能做到自觉完成作业、自觉背诵课文。有部分学生受学习态度、风气的影响，刻苦学习之风渐渐稀薄，轻浮之风开始产生，很多学生上课不认真，课后死记硬背，当然绝大部分还是劳逸结合，掌握了科学的学习方法。从学生成绩来看，存在明显不平衡，虽然上学期有所进步，但和平行班比较，还有很大的差距。
二、教材内容分析：
本教材共4单元，按要求，从开学到三月中旬要结束新课。此外，本学期增加了口语与听力训练的比重，以便于教好的完成人机对话和听说读写的全面训练。
其内容主要反映了学生的日常学习和生活。课本设计题材范围更广，反映了学生对未来生活的想象，如移居火星、拥有机器人生活方式、学习世界上著名伟人的事迹以及著名景点的介绍等。教学内容渗透了思想品德的因素，寓思想教育于语言教学中。并且教材配备了练习册、听力练习、听力训练教学光盘及中英文教参等必不可少的教学辅助工具。
三、教学目标要求：
(一)总体目标：及格率：30%，优秀率：10%。
(二)具体要求：
1、认真钻研教材教法，把握教材并把“新课程标准”的理念贯彻到我们当然英语教学过程中每让学生通过体验、实践、参与、合作、交流和探究等方式，学习并使用英语，并激发和鼓励学生学好英语，不断进步;
2、努力提前完成教学任务，为中考复习作好充分的时间准备。
(1)搞好集体备课，认真钻研教材教法，把握重点、难点、有的放矢地进行教学。
(2)加强教育的思想性，根据对学生进行思想品德教育的精神，在本学期的英语教学中，要加强德育的渗透，寓德于教。对学生进行跨文化教育、爱国主义、集体主义教育，培养遵章守纪、勤学好问的品质。
(3)充分把握教材特点，加强教育的条理性，有浅入深、由易到难、由已知到未知循序渐进地安排上课顺序;有条理地安排教学内容，不断复习，多次循环，逐步扩展和加深;在用中学，积极地运用语言;以最大限度激发学生的英语学习兴趣，寓教于乐，并能使他们学以致用。
(4)加强英语教学的听力训练，利用好录音带、作好听力练习、定期进行听写训练。加强英语教学的阅读训练，搜集并整理课外阅读材料，让学生经常阅读，提高阅读量和阅读技能。摸清学生掌握知识的程度，查漏补缺，并对差生及时补救。
四、教学进度安排：
首先，(2月22日至3月22日)完成新课教学，迎接学校的第一次月考。
第一轮(3月23日至4月23日)复习阶段搞好基础知识的复习。这一阶段应按教材顺序归纳语言点，讲透语言点运用，对各单元的知识要点进行梳理，同时应注重基础词汇、词组、句型的过关。做到：
(一)根据复习内容，布置适量的难度适中的练习;
(二)循环考试，即每学完一部分后，进行阶段性测试，对试卷进行评分登记，以充分调动学生的学习积极性和自觉性。
第二轮(4月24日至5月30日)复习要求突出重点，牢固掌握。第二轮复习直接关系到中考的效果。知识掌握不系统、内容混淆互相干扰，解题时应会判断失误，做错题目。这要求教师在这一阶段复习过程中防止简单的重复，反对面面俱到，而是遵循精讲多练的原则，做到讲——练——评结合。
第三轮是考前指导与适应性训练(6月1日至学业毕业考试)主要目的是适应中考要求，提高应试技巧。本轮侧重培养学生审题解题能力，同时要在教师指导下进行综合练习和模拟测试，知识考查和能力考查并重，从而使复习达到良性的循环：知识——能力——知识。
2022英语九年级教案 篇2
九年级下学期这一阶段的复习工作十分关键。面对着升学的压力和任务，面对着这两个班学生的英语程度相差很大的实际情况。我们要更加深入地研究教材，根据学科特点及学生特点研究切实可行的课堂教学模式和复习模式。同时，要进行分层次教学。对于基础好的学生要加大知识的容量，拓展知识的层面，使他们更上一层楼;对于基础较差的学生要因势利导，因材施教，使他们在原有的基础上有所提高、有所收获，为将来的学习打好基础。
一、学生情况分析
从本次期末的第一次质量预测的成绩来看，九年级(7)、(8)两班学生的英语学习情况和其他几个班级很相似，学生英语水平普遍较差，成绩好的不多，部分学生已经对英语失去了信心，还有一部分学生觉得英语越来越难，渐渐力不从心了，不感兴趣了，发言也不是很活跃。针对这种情况，教学的时候需要注意在备课中增加趣味性，以此来提高学生对英语学习的兴趣，同时注意在面对绝大多数学生时，注重打好基础，从最基本的东西抓起，避免拔苗助长。
二、具体目标和措施：
针对以上实际情况，我准备从以下几个方面着手，调整教学目标和教学措施：
1、继续针对中考题型的要求，确定如何努力提高学生语言技能：
听力方面：能听懂课文大致内容;能抓住简单语段中的观点;回答比较简单的问题。说即口语表达方面：能使用恰当的语调和节奏表达课文大意;能经过准备就一般话题作短暂表达。
阅读理解方面是个重点，要求能理解阅读材料中不同的观点和态度;能通过分析句子结构理解难句和长句;加强阅读理解的训练。
写作：能简单写出连贯且结构较完整的句子，能在写作文中基本做到文体较规范、语句较通顺;能够较好的达到中招考试对大多数学生的要求。
2、中招考试，既要突出重点，又要顾及全面，坚决坚持分类教学，分层推进的教学思想，使各类学生都能学有所获，都能有所提高。针对学生英语基础普遍较差的情况，从基础抓起，抓好英语基础知识。逐步做到语音、语调自然、得体;运用词汇描述比较复杂的事物、行为和特征，说明概念，进一步掌握描述时间、地点、方位的表达方式等;尽可能学会使用规定的习惯用语或固定搭配，掌握基本句型和时态。避免平时考试中的常见性错误，提高学生应对考试的能力。
对于程度较好的同学，要逐一进行分析、谈话，摸清他们的特点、思想和看法，有的放矢，促其进一步发展。
3、与其他各科教师搞好配合。使得每一个学生都能够全面发展，不至于出现严重的偏科现象。
要面向全体学生，关注每个学生的情感，激发他们学习英语的兴趣，帮助他们建立学习的成就感和自信心，使他们在学习过程中发展综合语言运用能力，提高人文素养，增强实践能力，培养创新精神。在此基础上突出学生主体，尊重个体差异，让学生在老师的指导下构建知识，提高技能，发展心智和拓展视野。
2022英语九年级教案 篇3
本学期是整个九年制义务教育的最后一个学期，学生即将面临着中考考验。这是一次真正意义上的选拔考试。迎接好这次中考就成为本学期教学的一个重要工作。因此，在教学中应该帮助学生理解、吸收、吃透教材，对教材中的知识进行内化，即进行综合、应用、创新和中考思维的升华，把书本知识变成学生自己的知识。要有一定的时间作强化训练，通过训练，锁定差距，然后提出弥补差距的可操作性对策措施，千方百计缩小差距，改变尖子生少、中间断层、底子大的现状。对学生分批分层地辅导和督促，让他们实现最佳的成长理想，实现取得好成绩的愿望。
一、指导思想
深入贯彻教育教学理念。认真总结教学经验，努力把学生的英语基本功打扎实，同时还得加强对阅读能力和综合应用能力的培养和指导，使学生在这方面的能力有所提高，力争在今年的中考取得一个理想的成绩。
二、情况分析
1、学生情况分析
九年级226班本学期50多人，225班本学期也有50多人，上学期英语最高分113，最低分40。从上学期成绩来看尖子生少、中间断层、底子大，参差不齐，给上课带来很大的难度，平均分不及过差线。大部分学生基础差，想学的少，在里面混日子的有很的大一部分，男生居多。他们的学习情绪不稳定，也不能坚持不懈，少数几个中间生平时基本能够配合老师的教学，但自觉性和定性不足，有些默不出声，精神不振，课后很少复习功课，上课不注意听讲，问题出来了不动脑筋想，而是急于去想课本上找答案，半天说不出个所以然来，学习方法不灵活，需要老师的督促才会有所作为;但也有一些学生学习积极，他们主动完成各种练习，上课非常主动，他们属于班上的佼佼者，成为英语学习的领头羊。因此，抓中间、促两头是本期的主要任务。并且让学生努力复习整个三年级的英语，做好初中毕业考试的准备是重中之重。
2、教材分析
本学年英语教学内容为半册，共3个单元，从上学期结束已经上完12个单元，剩余3个单元计划在4周内完成教学任务。具体教学内容包括：
词汇：识记、理解、掌握书中的所有单词，熟练应用重点单词和短语，复习初中前四册中的所有单词。
语法：掌握8种时态，一般现在时，一般过去时，一般将来时，现在进行时，过去进行时，现在完成时，过去完成时和过去将来时。了解部分构词法，掌握英语的基本句子结构：五种简单句，并列句，复合句，状语从句，定语从句，虚拟语气及感叹句等。
阅读：主要训练学生根据问题找细节的能力。然后根据不同同学的水平，再分层次阅读文章。在阅读过程中针对长句子(复合句及含有多个从句的复合句)要教给学生分析句子结构的能力。
写作：书面表达是中考中失分最大的题目，所以对于大多数同学，先落实平时训练，要求学生注意多写基本的英语作文。注意句法结构。还应注意学生的对话练习。
听力练习：多组织学生进行听力训练，并多组织考试，尽量使用磁带教学。
三、教学进度安排
第一周到第四周完九年级全部教学内容;第五周复习初一第一到第六单元，第六周进行七至十二单元复习，第七至八周复习初一下册，第九到十周复习初二上册，第十一到十二周复习初三内容，第十五至十七周进行语法专项训练，第十八周进行写作和听力训练。如名词、代词、数词、冠词、形容词副词、动词、句子结构、复合句、交际用语、写作。
四、教学措施
根据学生的情况和班上的实际，本学期采用以下措施：
(1)首先要从思想上扭转学生以往的不良学习习惯和态度，培养学生自觉的学习习惯，动脑的优良习惯，课堂上精讲多练。即将面临的是中考，学生的态度变化多变极不稳定，要动员好学生做好思想工作。
(2)根据学生各人的具体情况，要求各自提出明确的学习目标，具体的分数，每次考试后都要进行分析并制定下一次的目标只准前进不许后退，督促他们刻苦学习。
(3)每堂课一定注意学习效果，突出重点难点。务必要求学生掌握必须掌握的基本的东西。注意让学生做好笔记。每天都要布置作业不然有的学生比较懒散。对英语而言记忆背诵是很重要的，应多让学生听写生词和句子，采取各种不同的方法和手段每天跟踪复习，随意抽查。
(4)教学过程应突出学生的主动性，指导学生主动地获取知识，科学地训练技能，全面提高综合应用能力。要提倡灵活多样的教学方式，鼓励运用探究性、启发式和讨论式的学习方式。要避免繁琐的语法分析和琐碎机械的练习。
(5)重视创设英语学习的环境，沟通课本内外、课堂内外、学校内外的联系，拓宽学习渠道，增加学生应用的机会。作文教学与阅读教学相结合，在写作中学阅读，阅读中学写作。
(6)利用课外时间进行培优补差、抓两头，促中间。把学生分成两类，中上学生提高括充知识点，中后学生有一定潜力的，提高和发展的空间较大，以抓好基础知识为重。缩小两极差异兼顾整体共同进步。
(7)要想学好英语就要用英语。让学生开口说英语。这对学生来说非常重要。应积极鼓励他们多说、多听，不怕说错。让好学生多带头。
总之，本学期是非常关键和重要的一学期，抓住机遇、认真实施教学计划，尽一切力量为中考做好准备，争取让学生考出更好的成绩。
2022英语九年级教案 篇4
一、指导思想
深入贯彻教学十字方针。认真总结教学经验，努力把学生的英语基本功打扎实，同时还得加强对阅读能力和综合应用能力的培养和指导，使学生这方面的能力有所提高，在强化书面英语的同时注重学生听力和口头表达能力的培养和提高，力争在今年的中考取得一个理想的成绩。
二、学生情况分析
17班的同学本学期更加活泼好动，对学习抱着可学可不学的态度，兴奋地准备迎接毕业。对于这种情况，不能放任学生继续散漫，要加强思想教育，控制不当行为。而从上学期期末考的成绩来看，实验一的学生的英语学习情况总体不容乐观，学生英语水平普遍较差，成绩好的不多，有一部分学生已经对英语失去了信心，还有一部分学生觉得英语越来越难，渐渐力不从心，不感兴趣，学习变得极为被动。针对这种情况，教学的时候需要注意在备课中增加趣味性，以此来提高学生对英语学习的兴趣，同时注意在面对绝大多数学生时，注重打好基础，从最基本的东西抓起，注重复习的有效性，避免走马观花，急于求成。
三、九年级下册英语教材分析
九年级新授12—15单元，复习：七年级每册12个单元全册24个单元(4个复习单元)，八年级上12个单元(两个复习单元)，八年级下10个单元(两个复习单元)九年级18个单元(三个复习单元)。为了加强学生的阅读能力，从八年级下册开始在每单元的后面设置了具有跨文化内容的语篇及相关练习。
四、九年级下册英语教学措施
根据近几年中考试题新特点及学生实际情况，采取"三轮复习法"作为毕业班的总复习计划，"三轮复习法"要求先全面学习，后进行重点复习和适应性考试复习。做到着眼全面，突出重点，点面结合，把全面复习和重点复习有机结合起来。这样既系统全面又有所侧面的复习，能使学生较好地掌握所学的知识考出优异成绩。
第一轮复习针对学生对已学基础知识，在复习过程中，还要采取一些必要的措施来巩固和增强复习效果。如做到：(一)根据复习内容，布置适量的难度适中的练习;(二)循环考试，即每学完一部分后，进行阶段性测试，对试卷进行评分登记，以充分调动学生的学习积极性和自觉性。时间：3月中旬—4月份。
第二轮复习要求突出重点，牢固掌握，进行专项训练。要求学生对那些在教材中多次出现和辅导教材中一再提及，反复强调部分，应视为重点，格外加以注意。同时有针对性地指导学生记忆的方法，培养记忆能力。既要教学生解题要领，帮助学生理解题目与题目之间的联系，同时又针对历年中考题型强化训练，使学生在答题时做到灵活运用，触类旁通，举一反三。时间：5月份。
第三轮是考前指导与适应性训练相结合，主要目的是适应中考要求，提高应试技巧。本轮侧重培养学生审题解题能力，同时要在教师指导下进行综合练习和模拟测试，知识考查和能力考查并重，时间：6月份。
五、后进生转化
A类学生：课堂上要求能回答较难提问，思考问题积极，教学任务能当堂完成，课后要求阅读一定量课外读物，考试时要求失分不大。
B类学生：加强双基教学，多鼓励多表扬，使他们爱好英语，并且用抓两头促中间的办法使他们时时有危机感。要求能较好地完成教学任务，能回答上课提出的稍难问题。
C类学生：教学中多关心、多爱护他们，平时与他们多进行谈话，让他们认识到英语学科的重要性，平时对他们要求严格但要求不过高。
六、九年级下册英语进度安排
新授：12—15单元 2月26日—3月12日
第一轮复习：七上 3月13—3月18(3单元/节)
七下 3月19—3月26 (2单元/节)
八上 3月27—4月5 (2单元/节)
八下 4月8—4月19 (2单元/节)
九年级4月22—4月30 (2单元/节)
第二轮复习：专项训练 5月4日—5月18日
(名词、动词、代词、形容词、五大时态、句型分类)
专题训练 5月21—5月30
第三轮复习：考前指导与模拟考试相结合6月3—中考
2022英语九年级教案 篇5
一、教材分析
我们使用的是《仁爱版英语》，仁爱版英语教材是加拿大英语专家和北京市仁爱教育研究所的中国英语专家依据《英语课程标准》，编写的七年级零起点英语教材。它起点低，三年六册学完后，均可达到《英语课程标准》之要求——五级水平，可以与任何版本的高中课程英语教材衔接使用。具有如下的特点：
1、教材内容体系的安排由浅入深，循序渐进，由简单到复杂逐步过渡;重视新旧知识的结合和语言现象的复现。
2、体例体系新，教材创造了国内最新版课标英语教材编写体例、体系，编写思路清晰，符合学生认知发展规律，方便初学者培养英语学习兴趣，从而很快进入英语学习的状态。。单元按语言功能意念项目编排，每一话题四个小节(section)按听说读写的语言技能编排。
3、语言地道，对话之中融入情感态度和文化意识，使学生能在交流中用英语介绍祖国文化，加深对中华民族文化的理解。
4、好教易学，教材充分体现新课标的指导思想，把任务型教学与交际教学法灵活地运用于英语课堂。
二、重难点突破
本期不仅要完成本册教材内容，而且要复习完成好初中三年来所学的全部内容。本期的重点是对初中三年来所学的语法和常用表达法进行归类，如：现在完成时、直接引语和间接引语、被动语态等，难点也是语法和基本句型，这些重难点都应通过在语言材料的学习中及时强化和总结，在练习和实践中开展综合探究活动，进一步拓展学生的语言知识，围绕课题(project)探究活动构成每个单元的核心，让学生综合运用在本单元所学的语言知识、语言技能，提高用英语获取信息、处理信息、分析和解决问题的能力。而以历史人物活动为线索的对话，能很好地培养学生听说能力;同时，轻松实现学科之间的渗透和交融;培养学生的爱国意识，增强民族自信心和自豪感。教材的每个活动设计都很有技巧，既培养学生搜集信息、积累知识，灵活运用所学语法知识的习惯，又提高综合运用语言的能力。使学生在学习对话中融入情感态度和文化意识;在交流中用英语介绍祖国文化，加深对中华民族的理解。在学习贴近学生生活的阅读材料时，让内容鲜活、富有深刻哲理的阅读材料促使学生阅读能力提高，进而帮助学生树立正确的人生观和价值观。总之，通过对各种任务活动的开展和对语言的及时归纳总结，有效地提高学生学习效率，激发学习兴趣，对语言功能的认识逐渐由感性上升到理性，以达到巩固、掌握和运用的目的，最终形成语言技能。
2022英语九年级教案 篇6
一、教材分析
定语从句是本单元的语法要点，是在1-8单元已经对该语法知识有所渗透的前提下安排的。本节课话题是让学生体会音乐在生活中无处不在，体会不同类型音乐的特点，学会热爱生活;能用简单的定语从句形式表述自己的观点。通过本节的学习，增强学生对复合句的理解，提高其对此句式的应用能力。
二、三维目标
1、知识目标：
掌握本单元基本词汇，学会恰当的使用引导词that ,who
2、能力目标
1)掌握功能句“What kind of music do you like ? I like music that I can dance to . I love singers who can write their ownmusic.”
2)能够自如地谈论自己所喜欢的音乐和音乐家。
3、情感目标：
通过学生谈论对音乐和音乐家的好恶，从而使学生学会欣赏音乐的美。
三、教学重点
1)本节课的教学重点是学会并掌握先行词为物或者人时，引导词“that ,who ”的使用方法。
2)“prefer …to…”的用法
3)掌握有关音乐的词汇和相关的词组，能够比较流利地描述自己喜欢的音乐，运用功能句 “What kind of music do you like ? I like music that I can dance to . I love singers who can write their own music.”
四、教学难点
定语从句运用
五、教学策略
采用任务型语言教学，实施情境教学法、小组合作探究法、情感激励法。
六、教学准备
自制多媒体课件(PowerPoint);录音机(A tape recorder)
七、教学环节
1、课堂导入
⑴ Warming up
⑵ Discuss: Do you like music? What kind ofmusic do you know?
⑶ There aremany kinds of music such as pop ,jazz, rock……. Let Sstalk about the kinds of music..(多媒体出示)
⑷Let Ss read 1a. Explain the sentences:
I prefermusic that has great lyrics=I like music that has great lyrics better.
lyrics:the plural form is often used.
Ask Ss topractice in pairs then make up a short passage using the four sentences on thescreen.
2、课堂讲授
Explain attributive clauses.
定语从句：在复合句中修饰名词或者代词的从句叫做定语从句。先行词是“人”时，用关系代词who引导，先行词是“物”时，用关系代词that来引导
I love singers who write their ownmusic
I like music that I can dance to.
a. that即可代表事物也可代表人，which代表事物;它们在从句中作主语或宾语，that在从句中作宾语时常可省略关系词，which在从句中作宾语则不能省略。而且，如果which在从句中作“不及物动词+介词”的介词的宾语，注意介词不要丢掉，而且介词总是放在关系代词which的前边，但有的则放在它原来的位置
b. which作宾语时，根据先行词与定语从句之间的语义关系，先行词与which之间的介词不能丢
c. 代表物时多用which，但在带有下列词的句子中用that而不用which，这些词包括all,anything, much等，这时的that常被省略
d. who和whom引导的从句用来修饰人，分别作从句中的主语和宾语，whom作宾语时，要注意它可以作动词的宾语也可以作介词的宾语
e. where是关系副词，用来表示地点的定语从句
3、课堂练习
Fill inthe blank with who that
1).I have a brother _______likes soccer.
2)Tom doesn’t like movies_______are too long and too scary.
3) We prefer groups ________ play loud and energetic songs.
4) He likes friends_________ often help each other
4、课堂活动
1) Askand answer in pairs:
What kindof music do you like best? Why?
I like popmusic/classical music/jazz music/country music/dance music, etc. And tell thereasons.
2) Listento four pieces of music .Then practice the conversation in pairs.
3) Showseveral pictures and introduce their favorite singers ,groups and so on..
4) Practice in pairs and talk about their favorite kinds ofsongs, singers and groups.
5) Listenand complete 1b,2a and 2b.
5、课堂小结
在定语从句中，先行词是“人”时，用关系代词who引导，先行词是“物”时，用关系代词that来引导。
I love singers who write their ownmusic
I like music that I can dance to.
who / that 在定语从句中做主语时，谓语动词的单复数应与先行词保持一致
I prefershoes that are cool.
I like apizza that is really delicious.
I lovesingers who are beautiful.
I have afriend who plays sports.
6、作业布置
Write a composition about the kinds of the friends they likeand dislike
八、板书设计
Unit9 I like music that I can dance to
1.prefer….to….=like …better than……
Iprefer singing to dancing
2.Attributiveclauses(定语从句).
I love singers who write their ownmusic
先行词 “人”
I like music that I can danceto.
先行词 “物”
九、教学反思
通过本单元的学习，不仅能使学生学会本单元的功能句，而且通过创设情境调动学生的积极性和自主性，使学生敢于用英语交流和表达，学习中遇到困难，愿意主动向他人请教，并有较强的合作精神，使学生进一步体会到英语学习的快乐与成就。
2022英语九年级教案 篇7
一 、教材分析
1、教学内容
本单元以"产品制造"为话题，共设计了四大部分的内容。以"What are the shirts made of?"为主线，围绕着谈论_东西在那制造，原材料是什么等语言功能展开一系列的任务活动，通过第一部分的学习，要求学会有关things和materials等基础词汇，并了解、学会基本句型的应用。教材内容从基本语言知识到语言综合知识的运用，层层递进，以一种循序渐进的生活化的学习程序，引导学生在做事中有目的的学习语言。
2、教学目标
①知识目标：
1.掌握本课时重点单词和短语be made of 、be made in。
2.了解一般现在时态和一般过去时被动语态的结构和用法。
3.归纳和掌握make 构成的短语。
②能力目标：学会谈论产品是由什么制成的及它们是在何处制造
③情感目标：学会赞美他人的物品，并能就此话题礼貌的进行交谈，树立品牌意识，努力学习的态度。
3、教法策略
以任务型教学策略为主，采用情景教学法(如本单元新知识推导时)、听力训练法(处理听力材料)、并辅助个人自学、小组讨论和图片等兴趣策略教学。如在新授单词时，通过一些图片，进行分析教学，以致于从视角引起他们注意从而记住单词。采取任务型教学策略的目的是主要是让学生多练多用，在做中学、学中乐、乐中掌握。
4、学习策略
采用合作式学习方式，有目的的让学生预习，在完成任务的活动中主动的学习语言，养成继续学习英语和学好英语的良好习惯。强调学生不仅要在课上积极发言、多练，并鼓励他们课后积极进行英语学习、积极参加训练。
二、重难点分析
重点词汇通过图片和对话解决。如：chopsticks, coin, blouse, silver, silk, be made of等。
难点：听力训练;用功能语言句进行口语训练。
三、教学准备：图片、录音机等
四、教学过程：
1、课前任务设置，在课前，我让学生提前预习单词。另一方面铃声响的时候，首先检查学生对第五单元单词的识记情况，让学生看着图片，用"what is it?"等句子问，用新单词回答，在此期间，让学生感知"What are they made of? Where are they made of"的重点句型结构，把单词教学融入句型，培养学生情境中理解记忆单词的能力。
2、为了更好的提高学生观察能力，以任务型教学为理念，让学生有目的的结合重要句型完成Activity 1a的部分。
3、完成1a部分后，为了更好的巩固学生对上面方框中重点单词的理解程度，让他们通过听觉进行训练，培养学生在用中学、学中用的能力。
4、通过单词记忆、听力训练中，学生们对重要句型的初步接触和熟悉，请学生讲解重要短语be made of/be made from/be made into/be made in/be made by/be made up of和重要的语法：被动语态。掌握被动语态的用法和结构。为下一步准确说话做铺垫。
5、为了更好的运用重点句型结构，我让学生在1c部分读完对话后，用1b里边的句子进行对子活动，进而提高学生的口语表达能力。
6、通过列举世界知名品牌：中国瓷器、美国的李维斯牛仔裤、意大利的普拉达眼镜、瑞士手表的图片，进行师生问答，进一步巩固所学语法。并进行情感教育：中国需要努力，你们需要努力。之后通过六个基础题型来检测他们对本节课重点知识的掌握。
5、总结本节课所学的知识，梳理知识结构，并通过家庭作业让他们更好的掌握本节课内容。
总之，整节课，我始终遵循任务型教学的理念，以学生为主体，以任务为中心，以交际为目的，以课程标准为理论依据，以高效课堂为载体，坚持让学生学会在生活中运用语言，始终遵循一个原则，就是让学生乐学，因为兴趣是最好的教师，整个过程中我也一直采用激励机制给有所表现的学生以鼓励，以增强他们学习英语的信心。
2022英语九年级教案 篇8
复习目标
熟练掌握现在完成时态的用法。
课前准备
要求学生在课前复习这两个单元，背诵课文的部分段落、对话和单词，复习现在完成时态，及动词的变化形式。(P255--257的动词不规则变化表)
知识要点
一、现在完成时态的构成
have/has+动词的过去分词
二、与现在完成时态连用的常用副词，词组
just，already，yet，ever，never，several，times，so far，in the last/past few years。
already一般用于肯定句中，而yet一般用于疑问句或否定句中。
三、现在完成时态表示过去发生的动作对现在造成的影响或结果
四、现在完成时态也可表示过去发生的动作一直持续到现在的动作或状态，可以和表示从过去某一时刻延续到现在(包括“现在”在内)的一段时间的状语连用，常以for和since引导
for和表示一段时间的词组连用。
since和表示过去某一时刻的词或词组连用。
Have/has been to 与have/has gone to的区别：
Have/has been to意为“已经去过某地，且已回来”，have/has gone to意为“去了某地，但还未回来”。
五、现在完成时态中延续性动词与短暂性动词之间的转换。
现在完成时态可以表示已经发生了的动作持续到现在(包括相应“现在”在内)的动作或状态，但动词必须是延续性动词，因此，如果句子需要现在用现在完成时态，有些短暂性动词要改成相应的延续性动词或词组，常见的有：leave—be away， die—be dead ， buy—have，
borrow—keep， open—be open， begin/start—be on，
arrive/reach/get—be in， come/go—be in， get up –be up
get ill/fall—be ill， join—be in the /be a member of
2022英语九年级教案 篇9
教学目标
Key vocabulary: ancient, club, composition, pupil, meeting, call, even
Key structures: That’s news to me! What’s it about? Listen up, everyone.
Anyone else? That’s a fantastic idea listen up
教学重点
Get to know the wonders of the world
教学难点
Language points
教具
多媒体，tape 课时 2
教学课程
Step1 Warming-up and listening
1. Look at some pictures of the wonders of the world.
2. Talk about the picture. You can use the words in the box to help you.
3. Listen and check the words you hear.
Step 2 Listening and reading
1. (Close the books) Listen to the tape carefully.
2. Ask the students to read through the conversation individually.
3. Play the tape and have them read and follow.
4. Act it out.
5. Learn Everyday English
Step 3 Do Exercises
1. Choose the best answer in Activity 4.
2. Listen again and check.
3. Answer the questions in Activity 5.
Step 4 Explain the important and difficult points
Step 5 Pronunciation and speaking
1. Listen to the sentences.
2. Listen and repeat.
3. Say the sentences aloud.
Step 6 Homework
Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex. 1, 2, 3&4
个人修改
Revise what we learnt last term.
Show the pictures and learn the new words.
Read the key sentences.
Read the dialogue in roles.
2022英语九年级教案 篇10
Unit 3 Could you please tell me where the restrooms are?
一、教学目标：
1、语言知识目标
基本词汇：restroom, stamp, bookstore, postcard, pardon, washroom, bathroom, normal, rush, suggest, staff, grape, central, mail, east, fascinating, convenient, mall, clerk, corner, polite, politely, speaker, request, direction, correct, direct, whom, address, underground
基本句型：Excuse me, do you know where I can buy some medicine?
Sure. There’s a supermarket down the street.
Could you please tell me how to get to the post office?
Sorry, I’m not sure how to get there.
I wonder where we should go next.
Could you tell us when the band starts playing this evening?
You should try that new ride over there.
2、 技能目标：
(1)能用宾语从句礼貌的寻求帮助。
(2)能用正确的方法指路。
3、情感目标： 培养学生尊重他人，对人有礼貌，热爱生活。
九年英语课件 篇2
一、 教学目标
1. 掌握宾语从句的构成和用法.
2. 正确运用宾语从句:重点掌握注意宾语从句的三类引导词,从句的语序及主从句的时态呼应关系,不能忽视宾语从句的一些特殊情况.
二、 教学重点
目标1和目标2
三、教学难点
目标2
四、教学过程
Step1、Warming-up
T ask: Do you know this teacher?(point to a teacher)
Ss:
T say: I know the teacher.
I know she is a very good teacher.
T ask: Is she a beautiful girl?(point to a girl)
Ss:
T say: I think she is beautiful.
T ask S1: How old are you?
S1: I am...
Then ask Ss: What did she say just now?
九年英语课件 篇3
一、教师简介：
二、教材版本：oxford english s henzhen edition
三、课题名称：7a chapter 3 troubles
1.认知目标：
课标词汇dial, ambulance, fire service, trouble, tourist, stare, steal, purse, missing, hurry, report, gate
拓展词汇ferry, argue, aboard, theft, handcuffs
2.能力发展目标：
1）培养学生通过课前预测（predicting），略读（skimming），找读（scanning），了解重点大意（major ideas）等阅读微技能来逐步提高阅读水平。
2）帮助学生建立初步的语篇结构意识。
3.情感目标：
当别人遇到困难时，学会即保护自己，又能帮助到别人。
（二）教材分析：
本节课是深圳版《牛津初中英语》（初一）第3单元的导入课。该教材的导入课分为漫画、单元导入（a）及单元导入（b）三部分。教师紧扣单元主题，增加了两个教学环节：①小偷video的导入环节；②遇到困难时即能保护自己又能帮助别人的group work.
（三）学生分析：
刚刚开始初中生活的'学生，对事物充满了好奇心，能积极主动的参与课堂。但大部分学生还没有完全适应初中英语的教学模式，并且学生的英语程度参差不齐，自主学习的能力较弱。
（五）教学方法：
warming up由视觉感官冲击引入本单元主题show a series of pictures a bout police, ambulance and fire service.ask students what the pictures are about and what number do we dial to call them.multi-
leading-in引出本节课主题，激发学生的学习兴趣。show the students a video of a theft. answer two questions, and lead in the topic: “dealing with trouble”. multi-
pre-reading结合本课主题，引导学生达到情感目标的培养。do a questionnaire: what will you do if you see a thief? work in groups an d d iscuss the question with classmate.multi-
培养学生搜寻细节信息的能力。look at the title, the introduction and two picturesfind the answers of the two questions.multi-
while-reading任务型教学play the tape.answer the questions with true or false after listening.tape recorder
培养学生搜寻信息的能力guide the students to read through the text.reading the text by themselves and find the answers.m ulti-
show time在理解课文的基础上，根本对话将课文内容展现出来。get the students to work in groups and practice the work. then act out the dialogue.
homework巩固课堂所学，为下节课做准备read the text by themselves and finish the paper.
二、课后反思：
通过对本节课的学习，培养学生通过课前预测（predicting），略读（skimming），找读（scanning），了解重点大意（major ideas）等阅读微技能来逐步提高阅读水平。学生理解了课文的内容，并能用英语将课文的内容通过表演的方式呈现出来。并且懂得了当别人遇到困难时，学会即保护自己，又要帮助别人。
本节课的设计简易明了，并且能够层层深入，通过运用不同的教学方式来设置活动，达到学生对课文的理解。运用了角色扮演的方式，来激发学生对故事的重现，扩展了学生的思维。增强了课堂教学的趣味性和实用性。
video部分的失误成了这节课最不应该出现的问题。
三、课例点评：
1.赵老师在课堂上教态亲切、自然、有激情。口语流利，能用全英语驾驭教学。
2.这节课采用多媒体教学，课件精细，设计构思精巧，准备充分。
3.课堂引入真实、有趣。教学环节衔接自然。在教学过程中，培养了学生听、说、读、表演的能力。
4.整节课自始至终激发学生积极参与、体验、合作与交流，充分发挥了学生的主体作用。
建议：1.课堂上问题的设置应该考虑到学生的各个层面，有难有易，有梯度。
2.课后要布置预习作业。
九年英语课件 篇4
一、学习目标：
知识目标：能正确使用Module 6 中的单词和短语;
能力目标：能掌握谈论环境的日常交际用语，并能简单介绍环保举措，劝说人们增强环保意识;
情感目标：引导学生提高环保意识。
二、重点、难点：
重点：1. 掌握句型It’s+adj.+to do sth.;
2. 掌握短语throw away, instead of, do harm to, make a difference to，stop…from …的用法;
3. 初步了解前缀和后缀。
难点：1. for example, such as 与like的区别;
2. instead of 和rather than的辨析;
3. 前缀，后缀构词法的构成。
三、知能提升：
(一)重点单词
[单词学习]
1. waste
【用法1】n. 浪费
【例句】These meetings are a waste of time. 这些会议真是浪费时间。
【用法2】v. 浪费
waste sth. on sth. 在某物/某事上浪费钱财、时间等;
waste time (in) doing sth. 浪费时间做某事。
【例句】Why do you waste money on clothes you don’t need?
You are wasting your time (in) trying to explain it to him.
【用法3】adj. 无用的;废弃的
【例句】Waste paper can be recycled.
注意：wasteful adj. 浪费的
如：It’s wasteful to throw away your old book.
【考查点】词义理解。
【易错点】词性混淆不清。
【考题链接】It’s bright enough, turn off the light, please. We shouldn’t w___________ electricity.
答案：waste.
解题思路：此题考查waste的用法，句意为“这里足够明亮了，请把灯关了。我们不应该浪费电。”故填写waste，这里waste作动词。
2. environment
【用法】n. 环境
它是由动词environ(包围)+名词后缀-ment 构成的名词。类似的词有：development， excitement
【例句】The children have a happy environment at school.
【考查点】词义理解。
【易错点】environment的拼写。
【考题链接】
We should prevent the pollution of the e_______________________.
答案：environment。
解题思路：此题考查environment的拼写，句意为“我们应该防止环境污染。”故填写environment。
3. product
【用法】n. 产品，制品
【例句】The company sells plastic products.
与product相关的动词是produce，意思是“制造，生产”。
如：Many kinds of machines are produced in this factory.
【考查点】词义理解。
【易错点】product的拼写。
【考题链接】
We have to find the right p_______________ for the market.
答案：product。
解题思路：此题考查product的拼写，句意为“我们要找出适合市场需要的产品。”故填写product。
[即学即练]
① It’s w_______________ to keep the light on in the bright room.
② Those factories are causing a lot of e____________________ pollution.
③ Our factory produces a kind of new p______________. They are very popular to people.
④ Don’t w_______________ money on junk food.
(二)重点短语
[短语学习]
1. throw away
【用法】“扔掉，抛弃(某物)”
【例句】You should throw away these chairs and buy new ones.
【考查点】短语本意。
【易错点】throw 的过去式和过去分词形式。
【考题链接】
他问我你刚才扔掉了什么。
He asked me what you _______________________ just now.
答案：threw away
解题思路：此题考查throw away的时态，句中“你刚才扔掉了什么”是一个宾语从句，要用陈述句的语序，由表示时间的just now可知要用一般过去时，故填写threw away。
2. instead of
【用法】“代替，而不是”(后接名词，代词和v-ing形式)
【例句】What about eating fish instead of meat today? 今天不吃肉改吃鱼怎么样?
You should go out instead of staying at home. 你应该出去而不是呆在家里。
注意：instead adv. “代替，反而”，单独用时放在句末。
【例句】Why not play football instead?
If you can’t go, let him go instead.
【考查点】instead of的用法。
【易错点】instead of 与rather than易混淆。
辨析：instead of 和rather than的区别：都有“而不是”的意思
instead of：“代替，而不是”，重点词是of，它是介词，所以后接名词，代词和v-ing形式，尤其需注意的是动词该用动名词形式，即v-ing;
rather than：“(是……)而不是……”，它是连词，前后成分在形式上必须保持一致，所以后面的结构应该与前面一样，就有可能出现代词主格，动词的各种形式等，不一而足，但关键是要和与它对比的结构形式一致!
【例句】I’ll go there instead of him.
I rather than he(与I一致)will go there.
Yesterday he walked here instead of driving here.
Yesterday he walked here rather than drove(与walked一致)here.
【考题链接】
有些废品是可循环再利用的，所以我们是卖掉它而不是扔掉。
Some waste is reusable, so we’d better sell it for recycling ________________________.
答案：instead of throwing it away/ rather than throw it away。
解题思路：此题考查“而不是”的翻译，由于“而不是”可译为“instead of”或“rather than”，需要注意它们后面动词的形式，instead of后只能跟动名词，故写为instead of throwing it away;而rather than后的动词要和前面的动词形式保持一致，故写为rather than throw it away。
3. do harm to
【用法】对……造成伤害
do harm to sb./ sth. = do sb./ sth. harm “给某人/某物造成伤害，伤害(某人)，损害(某物)”
do no harm to sb./ sth. 对某人/某物没有造成伤害
九年英语课件 篇5
九年级英语6-10单元复习学案
九年级陈香伟
一、教师寄语：Nothing is difficult in the world if you put your heart into it.二、学习目标 知识目标:复习掌握这五单元重要的词汇及短语 能力目标：能运用这五单元的语法解决实际题目。
德育目标：进一步科学自己的学习方法，提高学习效率。
三、重难点：进一步复习掌握定语从句，被动语态及过去完成时态。
四、学习过程
1.预习：仔细预习本部分内容，找出自己不懂的地方并记下来。
2.导入：We will learn and review Unit6 to Unit 10
3.自主探究：通过查找资料，对本部分的词汇集语法进行那个初步了解。
4.合作探究：与同学探讨不知道的知识。
5.达标练习：
（一）填空题
1．_______(learn)English is very useful in the future.2．Manytrees must _______(plant)in spring..3．You should pay a_______ to your writing.4．F____ of all, you must learn some English words.5．He likes music that has great l___.(二)翻译短语:最有用的发明___________随着跳舞的音乐__________ 到去年末为止_____________一个中国的古代传说____________ 错误地____________推迟做某事______________
（三）翻译句子
（1）我们不能推迟制定计划。
（2）直到1610年茶才被带到西方。
（3）有时我们需要花一些时间来提出一个问题或请求
（四）达标测试
1.Look,how strange!A man can _____(run)after an alien.2.Hurry up, or we ________(not catch)the bus.3.Xiao Ming is afraid of ____(stay)at home alone.4.You look _______(worry).What’s the matter?
5.There must be someone ____(visit)the homes in our neighborhood.6.You can’t wake up a person who is ______(pretend)to be asleep.7.We don’t believe him because he’s _____(honest)
8.I don’t like staying with these children.They are quite__(noise)
9.He pretended______（be）ill yesterday.10.Be_____(care)ofthe dog thatdoesn’tbark.(五)典例分析
1.Reading English ________is very important in learning English.A.too aloudB.too loudC.loudlyD.aloud
【解析].aloud 与loudly都是“大声地”的意思。但loudly 含有“不耐烦’的意思，所以本题应 该选D.2.We can do it_______, we will do it well.A.differencesB.differenceC.differentlyD.different
[解析]。本题为副词修饰动词do,所以应选副词形式。故应选C.3.____________(speak)skills are important in learning English
[解析]“口语技巧”应为speaking skills.要注意不要用成spoken skills.（六）中考链接
1.—Would you mind if I sit here?（2008年，四川攀枝花）
—______.it is for the old woman here.A.Never mind.B You’d better notC.of course notD.not at all
2.—Will you please ______ it to me on Friday?（2008年，山东）—What about Saturday? My computer doesn’t work well these days.A.sendB.D:bring
3.___what is the matter, kangkang?(2008年黄冈)
—Oh, I feel very sorry.to hear more than __people lost their lives in the earthquake(地震)in Sichuan.A.sixty thousands ofB.sixty thousandC.sixty thousand ofD.thousand of
七、总结一下自己本节课的收获和不足，请写在下面吧
九年英语课件 篇6
Starter Unit1
Good morning!
一、单元教材分析
本单元要求学生掌握英文字母A—H，能认读其印刷体和手写体字母的大小写等四种形式。书写(大写和小写，笔顺，笔画)基本合乎要求。学习一些简单的英文名字，注意区别性别，并为自己取一个英文名字。能看、听、说、唱本单元所列的日常交际用语，重点学会打招呼、相互问候并做到语音语调正确。注意一些字母及日常交际用语的发音，总结元音字母a和e的发音规则。
二、单元学情分析
本单元围绕“问候他人”这一话题，展开听、说、读、写的教学活动。为了创设较为真实的语言环境，首先让学生们认识一些较为简单的英文名字，并让学生们为自己取一个英文名字，让学生们感知、认识英语，并尽快进入英语的环境中。在教学过程中应让学生体会打招呼用语的奥妙所在，做到灵活运用。刚开始学习英语，学生们肯定对学习英语的兴趣非常深厚，教师一定要利用好这一点，让学生在学习英语中能获得乐趣。并逐步让学生们形成稳定的学习兴趣。
三、单元教学建议
采用自主学习、小组合作学习、Role playing、 pair work等方式开展听、说、读、写的学习活动。教师要尽量利用幻灯片、挂图、实物等给学生创造较为真实的英语情景。在教学中创设切实可行的任务型教学活动、突出交际性。引趣激趣策略，创设情景调节气氛，引发激发学生兴趣。教师可以用手势，表情，动作等示意，帮助学生听懂课堂用语和日常交际用语，不讲或少讲汉语。
四、单元课时分配
本单元可用2课时完成教学任务：
(1a-2e) 用1课时
(3a-4d) 用1课时
(1a-2d)
一、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下词汇：字母Aa ~ Hh, good, morning, Good morning!, hi, hello
2) 能掌握以下句型：
① Good morning, Helen!
② Hello, Frank!
③ Hi, Bob!
3) 能理解用英语打招呼的不同说法，并能灵活运用。
4) 能掌握字母Aa ~ Hh的字母顺序，读音及书写。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
让学生们在相互问候的过程中，学会礼貌待人，与同学之间友好相处。万事开头难，首先利用这个单元培养学生们对英语的兴趣，因为兴趣是的老师。
二、教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 认识一些简单的英文名字，并为自己取一个英文名字。
2) 学习用英语进行见面打招呼，并能体会不同的打招呼用语的奥妙所在，做到灵活运用。
3) 学习掌握字母Aa ~ Hh的字母顺序，读音及书写。
2. 教学难点：
1) 学习掌握字母Aa ~ Hh的字母顺序，读音及书写。
2) 认识一些简单的英文名字，并为自己取一个英文名字。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Lead in
Listen to a “Good morning!” song. Then Ss learn to sing this song.
(利用JEFC教材中的Good morning!歌曲导入新课.)
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. Come into the classroom and greet the class with a smile and say Good morning! Now, introduce the words “teacher” and “class” by using gestures. Repeat this several times and have the class repeat after you. Students can answer as a whole group, as rows and as individuals.
T: (By gestures) Teacher; Class
Ss: (Repeat after teacher) Teacher; Class
2. Point to yourself and say I’m Miss/Mr. … Have them repeat. Explain the terms Miss and Mr. in Chinese. Ss repeat this a few times with rows and individuals.
Ss: Miss/ Ms. … (Ss repeat)
Ss: Morning, Miss/Ms. … (Ss repeat)
Ss: Good morning, Ms., Mr. … (Ss repeat)
3. Leave the classroom, return and say Good morning, class! Help the students respond with Good morning, Miss/Mr. … Say Sit down, please. Now let’s start the lesson.
(Practice it several times.)
Ⅲ. Game (Choose an English name.)
1. T: We have many new friends in our class this year. They are from the U.S.A. and England. Who are they? Do you want to know them? Now please look at the screen.
(过大屏幕展示第一页上的彩图，然后再展示单张图片，并分别与名字相对应。)
九年英语课件 篇7
一、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 学习掌握下列词汇：cream, workday,pie, show up, bean, market, by the endof,
2)进行一步复习巩固学习Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。
3)巩固过去完成时的用法
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
1)能运用所掌握的语法，句型和词汇进行交流。
2)能比较流利地讲述自己曾经有的特别的经历。
二、教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 复习巩固Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。
2) 总结过去完成时的不同句型。
3)总结过去完成时的用法。
2. 教学难点：
过去完成时的用法
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Revision
1. Have adictationof the new words learned in the last class.
2. Review somemainphrases we learned in the last class. Check the homework.
把下列短语翻译成英语
1. 即将2. 倒杯咖啡
3. 排队等候4. 起床
5. 出去6. 迟到
7. 到时候 8. 闹铃响
9. 开始做某事 10. 搭便车
3. Revision
过去完成时的构成：had+动词的过去分词
II. Lead-in
T: What happenedtoyou on a bad morning?
Ss…
引导学生用过去完成时回答。
III. GrammarFocus.
1. 过去完成时讲解。
2. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。
1)当我到达学校的时候，我才意识到我把书包忘在家里了。
When I gottoschool, I realized I ______ ______ my backpack at home.
2)到我返回学校的时候，铃声已经响过了。
_____ _____ _____Igot back to school, the bell ______ _______.
3)我到达公共汽车站之前，汽车已经离开了。
Before I __________the bus stop, the bus ______ _______ _______.
4)我决定先买一杯咖啡，然后再准备去办公室，
I __________________ go up to my office when I decided to get a coffee first.
5)就在我和别的工作人员一起排队等候的时候，听到了一个巨大的声响。
As I ___________________ ______ with the other office workers, I ______ _____ ___________.
Keys: 1.hadleft 2. By the time , had rung3. got to,had left4. was about to5. waswaiting in line , heard a loud sound
3. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。
4. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。
IV. Try to Find
1. 由when, by the time, before等引导时间状语从句时，若描述发生在过去的事，主句常用过去完成时(had + 过去分词)表示动作发生在过去的过去。
2. be about todo,be doing等表示即将或正在做某事时，常用when引导从句表示突然发生的动作，when可省略。
Ⅴ. Practice
1. Work on 4a.
Ask Ss tomakesentences using by the time or before on their own.
1) Ask fivestudents to the blackboard to writetheir sentences.
1. Tim went intothebathroom. Mary got up.
By the timeMary got up, Tim had already goneinto the bathroom.
2. The coffeebecamecold. I put cream (n. 奶油) in the coffee.
__________________________________
3. Theteachercollected the math homework. I got to school.
__________________________________
4. I completedthework for my boss. The workday (n. 工作日) ended.
__________________________________
5. Themoviestarted. I arrived at the cinema.
__________________________________
6. Mymotherfinished making the apple pie (n. 果馅派). I gothome from my language course.
__________________________________
2) Correcttheir sentences together in class.
2. Work on 4b.
1) Let Ss readthewords or phrases in the box and try to understand the meanings of them.
2) Fill intheblanks with the correct forms of the words by themselves.
1. By the timeIarrived at the party, everyone else_____ already __________.
2. When he putthenoodles into a bowl, he realized he____________ toadd the green beans (n. 豆).
3. By the timemymother came back from the market (n. 市场), I ____ already __________ the door to gofor mypiano lesson.
4. Before she gottothe airport, she _________ ___about the earthquake.
5. Whenshe_________ the movie theater, she _____ remembered she had forgotten to feedherdog.
6. Before she gotachance to say goodbye, he ____________ the building.
3) Correcttheiranswers together.
Work on 4c.
1) Let Ssthink about his/her day yesterday.
2) Let themwrite two true statements and onefalse statement about their day yesterday.
3) Ask theirclassmates to guess the falsestatement.
e.g. 1. By thetimeI left for school in the morning, ___________________________.
2. By the end oftheschool day, _____________________
3. By dinnertime,_____________________________
VI. 如果有时间的话，再做以下练习吧!
用括号里所给词的适当形式填空。
1. When Tim getbackhome, he started to realize that the thief ________ (come) to his house.
2. By the timeIreceived the letter, I ____________ (tell) the content of it.
3. When I wasborn,I _____ (cry) heavily the first time in my life.
1. had come2.hadbeen told3. cried
翻译下列句子：
1.当他到达学校的时候，老师已经开始上课了。
2.当我出来的时候，我爸爸已经离开家了。
3.在我拿书包以前我把门锁上了。
4.在她做完作业之前我妈妈已经回来了。
VII. Homework
1. 复习Grammar Focus 中的内容。Try tomakesentences with before, by the time and be doing … when, and make use of the pastperfect tense.
2. 写作：描述一次难忘的经历。
九年英语课件 篇8
一、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 复习被动语态的不同用法。
2) 能够用英语描述一些常用生活用品的制作材料;描述一些熟悉物品的制作过程。
3) 能用就本单元所学习的语法知识及语言材料，就自己所熟悉的话题写一篇小作文。
介绍自己家乡的某个较为著名的艺术品、食物、工商产品等。
2.情感态度价值观目标：
了解一些日常用品的制成材料，增加生活常识，养成良好的生活习惯;了解一些地方知名产品或传统艺术品的制作过程以及制作材料，培养学生的民族自豪感及爱国主义精神。
二、教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 能运用本单元所学的语法及语言材料，完成写作介绍自己熟悉的物品的制件材料及过程。
2)掌握本单元所学被动语态这一语法知识点，并能运用这一知识进行造句。
3)能总结本单元所学的物质材料、及一些艺术品的简单制作过程。
2. 教学难点：
阅读短文，完成写作。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Revision
Review themainphrases and sentences.
Ⅱ. Talking
Ask some Sstodescribe how to make a Chinese clay piece.
First, the pieces are carefully shaped by handfrom a very special kind of clayand then allowed to air-dry.
Second, after drying, they are fired at a veryhigh heat.
At last, they are polished and painted.
Ⅲ. Discussion
Talk aboutsomespecial things that your city is famous for.
e.g.
A: What’syour city famous for?
B: Our cityis famous for making lanterns.
A: Really!What are they made of?
B: They’remade of bamboo, silk or paper.
A: What theycan do?
B: They werefirst used for lighting in theold days. Today, they are used at festivals andother celebrations.
A: Why arethey special?
B: Chinesepeople love lanterns very muchbecause they’re symbols of good luck and family reunion(团圆).
Ⅳ. Writing
1. Work on 3a.
What aresomespecial things that your town/ city is famous for? These can be food,artworkor any other products. Discuss them with a partner and take notes.
2. Work on 3b.
Write aparagraphabout the product. Use your notes in 3a.
1. Use thefollowingexpressions to help you:
My town/cityisfamous for…
…is famous in my town/ city.
…is / are made of/ from/ with/ by/ in…
…is / are used for…
…is / are known for…
…is / are special because…
2. 写作指导：
这是一篇科普性说明文，让同学们介绍灯笼的相关情况，语态应为被动语态为主;时态应以一般现在时为主，辅以少量一般过去时态或其他时态的句子。
写作时，应理清自己的写作思路，逐条清晰地进行介绍。比如，可以先介绍灯笼的历史、用途及象征意义。然后介绍人们悬挂灯笼的时间。最后，介绍灯笼的制作材料、产地及其类型。
注意要恰当运用被动语态，检查被动语态句的数、时态以及句子结构等是否正确。
3. Ss try towritedown their answers in the blanks.
4. Walk aroundtheclass give any help Ss may need.
Onepossibleversion:
Lanterns havebeenaround for about 1800 years. They were first used for lighting in the , they are used at festivals and other celebrations. Chinese peoplelove lanternsvery much because they’re symbols of good luck andfamily reunion.
From SpringFestivalto Lantern Festival, lanterns are hung up everywhere. Lanterns wereusually madeof bamboo and paper in the old days. Now they are made of manykinds ofmaterials, such as steel, silk, cloth, plastic and so on. They aremade allround China. Lanterns are made in the shape of different animals,vegetables,fruits and many other things.
Ⅴ. Self Check
Work on SelfCheck1.
1. List somethingsyou use every day. Write down what they are made of/from and where theyweremade?
2. Let Ssdiscusswith their partners. Try to fill in the blanks.
If necessary, Sscanreview the things in Section A and B.
Work on SelfCheck2.
1. Tell Ss tomaketrue sentences with the information in Self check 1.
2. Give Ssoneexample:
My pencil is madeofwood and it was made in Shanghai.
Ss try to maketheirown sentences.
3. Exchangetheirsentences and check if there’s any mistake.
Work on SelfCheck3.
Make sure Ssknowwhat they should do.
T: Completethesentences using the correct forms of the words in brackets.
Ⅵ. Exercise
Ⅰ. Complete the sentences.
1. 皮革是动物的皮做的。
Leather ______________ the skin of animals.
2. 这个小镇以其手工艺品而广为人知。
The small town__________ _____ for its handicraft products.
3. 茶叶被手工采摘，然后送去加工。
The leaves forteaplants are picked by hand and then _____ ____ for _________.
4. 无论你做什么，都要尽力去做。
___________________ you do, you must do it with great efforts.
5. 国际风筝节每年在潍坊举行一次。
The ___________kitefestival ____ ______ in Weifang every year.
6. 据新闻报道，纽约州昨晚下了大雪。
________ ____thenews report, it snowed heavily in New York last night.
7. 饭桌上铺着一层塑料台布。
The table____________ _______ a plastic table clothes.
8. 大意驾驶酿成很多交通事故。
Careless_________causes many ________ ___________ .
Keys: 1. ismade of2. is famous for3. aresent, processing
4. No matterwhat5. international, is held6.According to
7. iscovered with8. driving, trafficaccidents
Ⅱ. Finish the sentences.
1. Inspring, we can see green ______ (leaf)and grass everywhere.
2. The Internetis______ (wide) used in most families in our country today.
3. English________(speak) by many people in the world.
4. The companyhopes____ (it) product will be successful on the European market.
5. My teacherdidwhat he could to make his class ______ (live).
6. If thetraffic_____ (be not) heavy, it’ll take us an hour to getthere.
7. They spentonepart of their holiday in _____ (French) and the other in England.
8. Bell is______(know) for inventing the telephone.
9. The Chineseuse_________ (chopstick) instead of knives and forks.
Keys: leaves,widely, is broken, its, lively,isn’t, France, known,chopsticks
Homework
上网搜索你所喜欢的中国传统工艺品相关情况，用所学的句子写一个报告。
yjs21.cOm更多幼师资料编辑推荐
新目标九年级英语课件
如果你对“新目标九年级英语课件”感到好奇请阅读下面为你准备的资料。教案课件是每个老师工作中上课需要准备的东西，每天老师要有责任写好每份教案课件。编写完整的教案是完成授课任务的保障。热烈欢迎您莅临这里我们将不断提高网页质量为您带来更棒的体验！
新目标九年级英语课件(篇1)
广州市东圃中学 张虹
1、单词
maybe也许 countryside乡村 camera照相机 film胶卷
drink饮料 bring带来 weatherman 天气预报员 cut割；切
degree度数 stop阻止 pack打包/行李 snowman雪人
2、短语
nothing much没什么 look forward to盼望 go climbing去爬山
It doesn’t matter.没关系 best wishes最真挚的祝愿
in the world全世界 That’s a pity!真糟糕/遗憾！
go sightseeing去游览 have a picnic去野餐
3、句子
1) Listen! Tomorrow’s weather report is on the radio.
听！收音机里正在播放天气预报。
2) I hope you won’t forget us. 我希望你不要忘记我们。
3) The snowmen will slowly becomes water when it gets warm.
当天气变暖时，雪人会慢慢变成水。
4) I will send you a postcard. 我会给你寄一张明信片。
5) I’m waiting for your answer. Please write to me soon.
我在等你的来信。请尽快给我写信。
6) Thanks for inviting me. I’d love to go with you.
谢谢你的邀请。我很乐意和你去。
新目标九年级英语课件(篇2)
新课程标准感知
知识要点 本单元用虚拟句谈论一些假设的情况
本单元要点如下
1． 学会谈论一些假设的、虚幻的情况；
2． 达到如何使用虚拟句提出建议的目标；
3． 学会表示与现在的情况相反的虚拟语气的结构；
4． 学会用虚拟语气表述自己的还没有实现的愿望
一.重点词汇
million、pimple、energetic、confident、shirt、tie、medical、research lottery、million、
trouble、energetic、confident、in public、social
二.重点短语
1. won the lottery 赢得抽奖 2. in public 公共的、公众的
2. in the slightest 一点也；根本 4. plenty of 很多的、足够的
get along with 与…相处 6. let …down 使…失望、沮丧
7. come up with 提出、想出（问题） 8. medical research 医学研究
9. what if 如果…怎么办 10. be late for 迟到…
11. be nervous 紧张的 12. get nervous （变得）紧张的
13. take a long walk 散步 14. ask one’s permission 征求某人的许可
15. without permission 没得到许可 16. introduce oneself 自我介绍
17. rather than 而不是 18. a circle of good friends 朋友圈子
三.交际用语
1. If I were you , I’d wear a shirt and tie. 如果我是你，我就会穿衬衫打领带。
2. If I were you , I’d take an umbrella. 如果我是你，我就带把伞。
3. What would you do if you won a million dollars ? 如果你赚了一百万美元，你会做什么？
4. What if I don’t know anyone ? 如果我一个人也不认识怎么办？
5. You should eat lots of fruits and vegetable and drink lots of water.你应该吃大量水果、蔬菜，大量喝水。
6. What are you like ? I think I’m outgoing. 你的性格如何？我想我很外向。
四.语法聚焦
What would you do if you won a million dollars ？
I’d give it to medical research .
I can’t sleep the night before an exam .What should I do ？
If I were you , I’d take a long walk before going to bed .
第一课时
Section A
Step 1 Free Talk
Talk about good habits of the students. Say, “ Wd all have some good habits. Can you tell the other students what good habits you have.” For example, getting up early, reading, helping others, not wasting money, etc.
When they talk, write some on the blackboard. Get the students to think about if they don’t hav have these good habits what will happen.
Step2 Talking and writing
Say, “Please imagine, what would you do if you had a lot of money?” The students discuss with the partners. Then get them to write some other situations in the list and share the answers. Point out: The sentences here are imaginary situations. They may not come true, just imaginary. So we often use the past tense and “would ” to express this kind of situation.
Step 3 Listening and talking
1b. First talk about some information in the picture. Say, “ We are going to listen to a conversation about their ideas about how to spend a million dollars.”
Students listen to the tape and number the pictures.
Then help the students practice the similar dialogue simply in 1c.
Step 4 Listening
First ask “ What would you do if you went to a party? What would you wear? What would you bring? What would you feel if you don’t know anyone at the party?”
After talking about the questions, come up with the question in 2a “ Why is Larry nervous?” Then listen.
2b. Listen again. Check the four things Larry’s sister says to him. Then check the students’ answers.
Step 5 Pairwork
According to the listening Text above, get the students to practice the conversation by looking at the instruction in 2c.
Ask some pairs to act out their own dialogues.
第二课时
Step 1 Free talk
Say “Imagine, what would you do if you were very old?”
“What would you do if you were teachers?”
“ What would you do if you had a lot of money?”
Get the students to talk about the questions. Collect their answers and write some on the blackboard.
Step 2 Grammar Focus
Point out the sentences on the blackboard all belong to imaginary situations. Ask the students to find out the rules in the sentences. Then look at the sentences in Grammar Focus. Comprehend them. Talk about some information about imaginary situations.
Step 3 Reading and watching
Ask “ Do you have some trouble during your daily life?” The students talk about their trouble and ask the other students to give advice. Then 3a, ask the students match each problem with the correct advice. Check the answers. Then comprehend the sentences.
Step 4 Game
Ask the students to write their problems on a piece of paper. Ask one student to choose some paper with problems on and read the problems. After he / she reads one problem, the other students try to give advice by using “ You should…” or “ If I were you…”.
Exercises:
完成句子：
1. He doesn’t know ______________( 穿什么) at the party.
2. _____________ (如果我是你), I would buy a small present.
3. What would you do ______________ (如果你获得了第一名)？
4. You’d take a long walk ______________ (在吃过晚餐之后).
5. I ______________(变得紧张) before big exams.
第三课时
Section B
Step 1 Word competition
Say “ We usually use adjectives to describe a person. Do you know those words? Let’s have a competition.”
Get representatives of boys and girls to come to the front and write the words about description on the blackboard as many as they can.
Step 2 Giving definitions
Say “ Just now we had the word competition. Then let’s try to give definitions of these words in English.” Discuss with partners and give definitions.
Step 3 Writing and competition
Get the students to understand the instructions in 1a. Understand the meaning of every word. Then fill in the blanks with the words. Check the answers.
After students write the words, have a competition of making up sentences. Say, “ Please make up sentences by using these words. Let’s see who can make up more sentences , boys or girls?”. Then do it.
Step 4 Listening
2a. At first help the students understand the instruction. Look at the personality survey. Explain “ give a speech, without permission, introduce oneself to sb.” Then listen. Check the questions Celia asks.
Some points:
1. give a speech = make a speech, give a talk 演讲
2. without permission （未经允许） with permission （经过允许）
permission n. “允许” permit v. “允许”
permit sb to do sth 相当于allow sb to do sth 意思是“允许某人做某事”
例：The teacher didn’t permit us to swim in this river.
= We can’t swim in this river without the teacher’s permission.
3. introduce oneself to sb. 意思是“向某人自我介绍”
例：Let me introduce myself to you. I am Jim.
2b. Listen again. Circle Bill’s responses. Then check the answers.
Step 5 Practice
Get the students to practice the similar conversation in 2c by looking at the personality survey.
Exercises:
翻译句子：
1． 他害怕在公众场合讲话。
2． 这个女孩很善交际。她有许多朋友。
3． 莫扎特是个很有创造力的音乐家。
4． 男孩们总是精力旺盛。他们几乎从不感觉到累。
第四课时
Step 1 Free talk
Ask questions like “What would you do if the teacher asked you to give a speech in front of the whole school? What would you do if someone took away your things without permission? What would you do if someone asked you to be in a movie? What would you do if you wanted to be friends with a new student?”
Get the students to talk about them.
Step 2 Reading
Ask the students to read the passage in 3a and fill in the blanks in the results with “a”, “b” or “c” according to the survey in 2a. Then help the students comprehend the whole passage.
Some points:
1. pretty ① 相当，非常 相当于very, quite
② 漂亮 相当于beautiful
2. in the slightest 意思是“根本，一点也”
not….in the slightest 意思是“根本不，一点也不”，相当于not…. at all.
slight 是adj. 表示“轻微的，不重要的”
例：I have a slight cold. 我有点轻微的感冒。
3. company ① 陪伴 （不可数n.）
② 公司 （可数n.）
例：I feel at home in your company. 和你在一起令我轻松自在。
He is a driver in a bus company. 他是一家汽车公司的司机。
4. rather than, would rather…than 意思是“与其……倒不如”，“宁愿…...而不愿”
例：I want to stay at home rather than go to school.
I would rather stay at home than go to school.
这两个短语前后都连接两个相同的成分。
After explaining the points, ask the students to read the passage.
Step 3 Groupwork
Divide the students into several groups with four students in each. Design a personality survey according to the example in 3b. The survey must include at least two questions. Then discuss about the questions with the group members.
At last share the students’ answers and make a conclusion, such as “Student….. is very outgoing. Student … is very friendly” and so on.
Homework:
Recite the passage in 3a.
第五课时
Step 1 Warming up
Ask the students make examples about good or bad personality. Discuss about the personality the students like.
Step 2 Self check
For Ex 1, fill in each bland with the correct word given. Understand the Chinese meaning of every sentence.
For Ex 2, read the e-mail and comprehend it.
Then read the passage. Write a reply according to this email. Ask some students to read their replies.
Step3 Just for fun
Students read the funny cartoons at last.
第六课时
Step 1 Warming up
Talk about the questions “ Do you often surf the Internet? Do you have a net friend? What would you do if the net friend wanted to meet you?”
Step 2 Reading
Say “ In our daily life, we would meet lots of situations. And what would you do if something happened? Then let’s study the passage.”
Give a reading task to the task to the students. “ Find out all the accidents and problems in the reading text.” After the students finish the task, help them comprehend the passage.
Some points:
1. If I were you, I’d have a first-aid…..
此句使用了虚拟语气，对现在的事情进行假设，表示与现在事实相反的一种假设。此时，主句中谓语动词使用“should / would + v原形”的结构。If从句中谓语动词使用一般过去时态，如果该动词是be动词，则一律用were.
例：If I knew this, I would tell you.
2. burn-burned – burned 或burn – burnt – burnt 意思是“烧伤，烧坏”
例：The house is burning.
如果表示“被烧死”，则常用be killed by fire / in the fire, 也可用be burnt to death.
3. injure “伤害，损伤”，指事故中肉体上受到伤害，也指精神上的损伤，常用人作主语。
例：She was badly injured in an accident.
4. hurt “疼痛”，可用疼痛的具体部位作主语，也可用人作主语。
例：My head hurts.
She hurt herself yesterday.
Read the passage, and finish 3b.
新目标九年级英语课件(篇3)
广州市东圃中学 张虹
1、单词
London伦敦 Germany德国 Spain西班牙 term学期
Walu华露 India 印度 New Zealand 新西兰
Moscow莫斯科 Toronto 多伦多 Madrid马德里 building大楼
New York纽约 Singapore新加坡 Berlin柏林 Italy 意大利
class teacher班主任 Auckland 奥克兰 Paris巴黎 Tokyo东京
2、短语
on weekdays周一至周五 at the age of ten 在十岁时
answer the questions回答问题 far from远离
3. 句子
1）I hope you all become good friends. 我希望你们都成为好朋友。
2）A good beginning helps to make a good end.
好的开头有助于取得好的结果。
3）How are you? I’m very well. 你（身体）好吗？我很好（健康）。
4) How do you do? 你好吗？
5) Do you often get to school early ? 你经常早上很早上学吗？
新目标九年级英语课件(篇4)
学习目标
1.熟记学过的单词
2.重点短语：on your own，bit by bit，instead of
3.重点句型：Are you stressed out each time youhave a test?
学习重点
能够应用所学的知识完成本单元的写作
学习难点
能够应用所学的知识完成本单元的写作
自主学习
一、认真预习3a-SelfCheck找出下列短语和句型。
1.靠你自己
2.逐渐地
3.取代
4.你每次考试的时候紧张吗?
课堂导学
Step 1 情景导入
Teacher：We have learnt some ways to learnEnglish well.Can you remember them?Nowplease say some good ways to learn English well with your partners in groups.
环节说明：通过这个环节复习了本单元的重要的短语和句型，同时又为本节课的写作训练做好了铺垫。
Step 2 完成教材3a的任务
1.你的好朋友想要提高他的英语，他现在向你寻求帮助，请你在3a的表格中写出你给的方法及原因。(3分钟)
2.根据3a表格中的内容及3b方框中的提示，给你的朋友写一封信，告诉他学习英语的一些好的建议。完成后小组内互相交流纠错，教师抽查点评，完成3b。(10分钟)
参考案例
There are three good waysto learn English.I think you should be interested in what you do.If you
are interested in something, your brain will bemore active and remember it very quickly.It's also a good idea to watch Englishmovies.You can watch the actors say the words.In this way you can remember the wordsvery well.You could also try to improve your English by joining an English club，there you can speak Englishwith other people.It can improve your spoken English.I am sure that if you finda good way and don't give it up，you will do well in English.
环节说明：通过这个教学环节，让学生熟练掌握描述学习英语的方法的句型并且能够针对他人的问题提出建议。
Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务
1.组长领读SelfCheck 1中的单词和短语，组员跟读并弄懂每个单词和短语的意思，为短文填空做好铺垫。(2分钟)
2.认真阅读2中的句子，然后将它们按正确的顺序排列，完成后集体核对答案，然后两人一组练习对话，并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)
3.根据3中Jane,Li Ming和Meiping的问题给出自己的建议，完成后小组内互相交流答案。(5分钟)
环节说明：这一环节通过训练，让学生对本单元的语言目标——提建议得以更灵活的运用。
Step 4 问题探究
( )1.We can learn English bit ________bit，dayby day.
A.buyB.withC.to D.by
答案选择D，bit by bit 意为“逐渐地，一点一点地”。
( )2.The box is very heavy.I can't carryit ________ my own.
A.on B.with C.to D.by
答案选择A，on my own=all by myself意为“靠我自己”。
当堂评价
请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Unit2 Ithink that mooncakes are delicious!
新目标九年级英语课件(篇5)
本学期我任教九年级（2）班的英语课。经过以往几年的学习，大部分学生都能端正学习态度，主动参与学习活动。不少学生都打下了良好的英语基础，积累了一定的学习经验，掌握了行之有效的学习方法，形成了自己学习英语的学科理念，具备了较高的英语素质。但也有部分学生有求知欲，没自信心；有学习的潜力，却没良好的学习习惯，自控力极差。这诸多原因造成他们学习困难，衍生出厌学情绪。期末测试题目偏难，所以上学期的学科检测情况总体不好 ，两个班的合格率都有所下滑，优等生的人数更少 。总之，这批学生的优势和不足并存，希望与困难相伴，我们要发挥学生们的优势，弥补他们的不足，一方面集中力量培养一批优等生，另一方面又要帮助带动每一位学习困难的同学都能学好英语课，达到共同提高的总体目标。
本学期的中心任务是：疏导心理，激发兴趣，指导学法，夯实基础，培养能力。
在今后的教学活动中，教师需注意以下几点：
1、结合社会大环境，引导学生信仰学习，崇尚知识。
2、帮助学生树立起学习英语的自信心。
3、帮助学生制定自己的学习小计划，找出适合自己的学习方法。
5、激励学生主动、持久、高效地学习。
6、学习过程中注意因材施教，爱心感染。
向青春期过度的孩子们情绪不稳，明辨是非的能力较差，叛逆心理严重，这就要求教师必须耐心细致，严以律己，言行一致，脚踏实地，持之以恒地去工作，督促指导学生努力地、科学地学习，成为造福社会的栋梁之材！
本学期的任务有两项：一是完成九年级英语第二学期的教学任务，二是系统复习七八九三个年级的所学全部内容，为最后的学业水平测试做准备。九年级英语第二学期的教学任务是11---15共5个单元的新授及Units 11-15的一个复习单元。其主要内容涉及现在完成时，现在进行时，被动语态等。其特点是生词量大，知识点零碎。我们应重在练习，加强巩固。
七年级教材内容侧重基础，难度不是很大，在考试中所占比例也不大。复习时要以点带面，精讲多练，教师只起一个点拨的作用即可。八年级教材所涉及的词汇、短语、句型结构明显增多，难度加大，阅读量增加，是复习的重中之重。九年级教材所涉及的词汇、短语、句型结构、语法更多，内容贴近生活，词汇量大而且难记，在中考中所占比例最大，是复习时的重点更是难点。
在复习过程中，要夯实基础，注重知识间的联系与区别，并以中考题型为参照，加强题型和做题方法的探讨和研究，给予学生精要的指导和引导，是他们掌握知识的同时，更能学得做人做事的道理和方法。
三、本学期要达到的教学目标（包括知识与技能、过程与方法、情感态度三个方面的目标）
（一）知识与技能：
1、能够系统掌握七至九年级相关的教学内容，牢固掌握基础知识。
2、各知识间的区别于联系要明确，并在测试中做到不混淆。
3、由知识到能力的转化，技能明显提高，能够将知识和能力做到有机统一。
1、狠抓过程中基础知识的落实，以此促进能力的提高。
2、引导学生通过自主学习，进行知识的归纳、总结，使总结知识的过程成为掌握、提高、锤炼的过程。
3、抓好过程的调控，因材施教，并注重反馈和总结。
1、培养学生的积极性和良好的习惯。
2、促进学生间的合作，并体验创作的快乐。
3、对比中外文化的差异，开阔视野。
4、磨练意志，达到自我教育的目的。明辨是非，形成正确的人生观、世界观、价值观。
1、教材处理方面：深入学习新课标，领略其精髓所在。总览教材，把握重点，勾划难点。遵循由易到难，由点及面的教学规律，把它作为一种课内教育资源，进行创造性地使用。
2、教学研究方面：与时俱进，学习先进的教育理论，更新教育观念，把任务型教学的精神实质实践于英语课堂中。真正做到“以学生的发展为本”，把课堂还给学生，提高学生用英语交际的能力。加强集体备课的力度，学人之长，补己之短，团结合作，共同提高。
3、培优转差方面：学会赏识每一个学生，尤其关爱中下游学生。加大对优等生的培养力度，鼓励他们拔尖，发挥榜样带头作用，带动中下游学生，大面积提高学习质量。
4、思想教育渗透方面： 把爱国主义情感、集体主义道德、个人自立精神以及崇尚科学的精神融于日常教学之中。增强人口意识、环境意识，帮助学生形成正确的人生观、价值观。
尊重学生的个性差异，及时赏识学生。鼓励他们创新。利用学习互助小组，大力开展合作学习，在合作中培养责任感，并品尝成功的快乐，使其更爱学习。
利用计算机辅助教学，渗透信息技术教育，拓宽学生视野。
四、教学进度：
1 Unit 11 Unit 11 Section A-Section B(2C)
2 Units11-12 Unit 11 Section B(3a)- Reading -Unit 12Section A(2c)
3 Unit 12 Unit 12Section A(3a)-Reading
4 Units13 Unit 13Section A-- Section B(2C)
5 Units13--14 Unit 13 Section B(3a)-Reading -Unit 14 Section A(2c)
6 Unit14 Unit 14Section A(3a)-Reading
8/9 专项复习名词、冠词、数词、代词、介词、连词、形容词、副词
13 题型训练 阅读理解,完型填空,
新目标九年级英语课件(篇6)
广州市东圃中学 张虹
1、单词
before在---之前 bowl碗 hear 听见
hold拿 granddad爷爷，外公
2、短语
brush one’s teeth 刷牙 put…into 把---放进---
go shopping 去购物 Hurry up !赶快！
do morning exercises做早操 go running 去跑步
feed the cat 喂猫 How often…? 多久一次---？
go swimming去游泳
3、句子
1) They are good at playing basketball. 他们擅长打篮球。
2) It’s time to have lunch/for lunch. 该吃午饭了。
3) She’s never late for school. 她从不迟到。
4) All the family are trying to help her. 全家人都努力帮她。
新目标九年级英语课件(篇7)
Unit 15 We’re trying to save the manatees!
Part 1: Teaching design (第一部分：教学设计)
Structures: Review of structures
Target language: I think that animals should not live in zoos. I disagree with you. I feel that zoos provide clean and safe places for endangered animals to live.
Vocabulary: manatee, cheetah, kangaroo, chimpanzee, recycle, aquatic, habitat, gentle, aggressive, playful, furry, gray, enormous, strong, spotted, underwater, mangrove, vegetation, swamp, save, environment, educate, public, politely
Learning strategies: Classifying, Listening for specific information
Section A
Goals
● To review structures learned
● To listen and talk about animals
Procedures
Warming up by learning about animals
Animals are living things. Plants can make their own food or
energy from the light of the sun, but animals can't do this.
Animals have to eat plants or other animals to get energy to live.
Some animals eat only plants. We say that these animals are herbivores. Some animals eat onlymeat. We say that these animals are carnivores. Some animals eat both plants and meat. We say that these animals are omnivores. Plants can't move around, but most animals can move around. Animals are divided into groups.
1a Looking and describing
On page 118 in the picture you will see a zoo with animals and visitors. Now choose adjectives listed in the box to describe the six animals.
African elephants
Chimpanzees
Kangaroos Manatees
Cheetahs Polar bears
enormous
noisy playful gentle,
shy
spotted,
fast
Furry,
aggressive
1b Listening and circling
Victor and Ginny are talking about animals. They are describing them with many different words.
Now listen to their talk and circle the words used in 1a to describe the animals.
星沙英语网整理
Tapescript
Boy: Hey, Ginny. What’s that big, furry animal in the pond?
Girl: It’s a polar bear, Victor. They’re kind of aggressive.
Boy: Are they? Looks like they really love water.
Girl: Uh-huh.
Boy: And what do you call those big, gray things in the water?
Girl: They’re called manatees.
Boy: What?
Girl: Manatees. They’re very gentle and very shy.
Girl: They’re cheetahs. The cheetah is the fastest animal on earth
1c Doing groupwork
We humans are animals, too. So we are like animals in some ways. Now in groups of four, you are going to think of an animal that is the same as you are in some ways. Then you are to describe the animal and the others are to guess its name.
A: I am like this animal because I am strong and intelligent. I like water, and I like to eat vegetables.
B: You’re like an elephant.
A: No.
B: You’re like a manatee.
A: Yes!
A: I am like this animal because I am heavy and enormous. I like forests, and I like to go around the mountain.
B: You’re like a chimpanzee.
A: No.
B: You’re like an elephant.
A: Yes!
A: I am like this animal because I like spotted clothing and I run the fastest in my school.
B: You’re like a manatee.
A: No.
B: You’re like a cheetahs.
A: Yes!
2a Listening and matching
A boy is asking a man about animals he likes.
Tapescript
Boy: Can you tell us about the manatees, please?
Man: Sure. We’re trying to save them.
Boy: Why? Are they endangered?
Man: Yes. There used to be a lot of manatees, but now there aren’t very many of them.
Boy: Do you know how many there are?
Man: At this point, there are only about 2, 500 in the U.S. In 1927, it was discovered that they were endangered. Since then, the government has passed laws to protect them.
Boy: Where do they live?
Man: Their favorite habitat is the water under the trees in mangrove swamps.
Boy: And why are they endangered?
Man: Some of the swamps have become polluted. Also, there sometimes isn’t enough food for all of them. As you can see, they’re large. The average manatee is about ten feet long and weighs about 1, 000 pounds. They need about 100 pounds of aquatic feed a day.
Boy: Aquatic feed?
Man: Oh, that’s underwater plants and vegetation. That’s what they eat.
Now listen to their talk and match the words with the definitions in the box on page 119.
1. endangered →b. there aren’t very many of them.
2. mangrove swamps → d. a place where trees grow in water
3. habitat → a. the place where something lives
4. aquatic feed → underwater plants and vegetation
2b Listening and completing
Next you are going to complete the chart on page 119 in the middle. Listen to the talk once more for the necessary information.
Kind of animal Manatee
Number 2,500 in the US
Habitat the water under the trees in
mangrove swamps
Reason why they are endangered Some of the swamps have become polluted. Also, there sometimes isn’t enough food for all of them.
description The average manatee is about
ten feet long and weighs about
1, 000 pounds. They need
about 100 pounds of aquatic feed a day.
In the end you are going to read the tapescript. While reading, you must try to blacken all the predicates, underline all the expressions and circle all the connectives.
2c Doing pairwork
You are going to interview a zoo attendant. Now use the facts from above activities to role play a conversation between you and the attendant.
A: How big are manatees?
B: They’re about 10 feet long and they weigh about 1,000 pounds.
A: How much do they eat everyday?
B: They need about 100 pounds of aquatic feed a day.
A: What is Aquatic feed?
B: It is underwater plants and vegetation.
A: That’s what they eat?
B: Yes, it is.
A: Are manatees endangered?
B: Yes, they are endangered. But, we’re trying to save them.
A: Wait a moment. Why are they endangered?
B: Because their homes are disappearing.
A: Where do they live?
B: They live in the swamps. And they have become polluted. They are endangered also because there sometimes isn’t enough food for all of them.
A: I am sorry to hear that. There used to be a lot of manatees, but now there aren’t very many of them left, I think.
B: You are right. At this point, there are only about 2, 500 in the
U.S.
A: Are there any laws to protect them.
B: Since 1927 laws have been passed protect them.
A: Thank you for your information.
3a Reading and underlining
Turn to page 120. Disgusted has written a letter to the editor. Now read it to underline the reasons why Disgusted is opposed to zoos. While reading remember to box all the connectives, blacken all the predicates. That’s grammar study.
Dear Editor,
I am writing to say that I am against building a new zoo in our town. Zoos are terrible places for animals to live. I've visited a lot of zoos in my life, and I have never seen one I liked or one that was suitable for animals to live in. Just last week, I visited a zoo and couldn’t believe what I saw. The animals are kept in tiny cages and can hardly move at all. And they are only given food once a day. Is this a good way for animals to live? I don't think so.
Sincerely
Disgusted
3b Reading and writing
A man called Animal Friend wrote a letter to the editor, too. Now read this letter on 120. While reading, underline all the expressions, box all the connectives, and blacken all the predicates. That’s grammar study, too.
Dear Editor.
I visited our zoo yesterday and I was very surprised to find hardly anyone there. Zoos are very important places. They are like living textbooks for young people. They provide homes for many endangered animals, and help to educate the public about caring for them. If we don’t support our zoos, they won't have enough money to take care of so many fine animas. I urge all of your readers to visit our wonderful zoo soon.
Sincerely, Animal friend
4 Debating
Next we are going to have a new activity-to debate.
Let’s make two teams. Team A is to debate against keeping animals in the zoos, and Team B is to debate for keeping animals in the zoos for protection and education of the people.
Useful expressions
I think that… I agree with you.
I believe that… I disagree with you.
I feel that… I agree with…
A: I think that animals should not live in the zoos.
B: I disagree with you. I feel that zoos provide clean and safe places for endangered animals to live.
A: I don’t think so.
B: A zoo is a place where many different species of animal are kept and usually can be seen by members of the public.
A: Why can people go and see the animals in the forest?
B: In that case, more harm will be done to the animals.
A: Kept in the zoos animals are losing their natural nature of living.
B: Most modern zoos are also centers where animals are studied so that more animals in the forest could be saved and protected.
A: Some rare animals are dying out.
B: Yes, they are. Rare animals could be preserved when they are in danger of dying out.
A: You are right in saying that. But I still think that it is not right to put animals in the zoos. They belong to the forest, the river, the sky and the sea.
Closing by learning about Brown Eared-pheasant（褐马鸡）
To end this period we shall turn our attention to a rare animal found almost only in Shanxi, China, Brown Eared-pheasant, or褐马鸡 in Chinese.
This species qualifies as Vulnerable because it may have a small population, and although its numbers within protected areas appear to be stable, elsewhere remaining unprotected and isolated populations are declining (potentially rapidly) through ongoing habitat loss and hunting.
新目标九年级英语课件(篇8)
教学综述
一. 本周教学内容：
Unit 10 By the time I got outside, the bus had already left.
一. 学习目标（Language Goal）
1. Learn to narrate past events. 学会描述过去所发生的事情。
2. Learn to express something with Past Perfect Tense.
学习使用过去完成时态。
3. Strengthen the consciousness of doing things regularly.
做事加强连续性，有条不紊。
二. 语言结构（Language Structures）
1. Past perfect Tense过去完成时
2. “By the time”和“when”引导的时间状语从句
三. 目标语言（Target language）
1. By the time she got up, her brother had already gone into the bathroom.
2. By the time she went outside, the bus had already gone.
3. By the time she got to class, the teacher had already started teaching.
4. When she got to school, she realized she had left her backpack at home.
5. Have you ever overslept?
6. Have you ever been late for school?
四. 重点词组（Key phrases）
1. by the time 到…时候为止
2. get outside 到外边
3. get to school 到学校
4. get up 起床
5. get into the shower 去洗澡
6. get home 到家
7. start doing/ to do sth 开始做某事
8. be late for 迟到
9. go off （闹钟）闹响
10. wake up 醒来
11. come out 出来，出现
12. run off 迅速离开，跑掉
13. on time 准时
14. in time 及时
15. come by （走）过来
16. give sb a ride 让某人搭车
17. break down 损坏，坏掉
18 show up 出席，露面
19. stay up 熬夜
20. a costume party 一个化装舞会
21. sth happen to sb 某事发生在某人身上
22. so …that … 如此…以至于
23. set off 出发，开始
24. April Fool’s Day 愚人节
25. get married 结婚
26. marry sb 与某人结婚
27. both …and… 二者…都…
28. get dressed 穿好衣服
29. on the first day 在第一天
五. 语法重点（Grammar Focus）
1. Past perfect Tense过去完成时
构成：had +过去分词（had没有人称和数的变化）
过去完成时可以表示过去某一时刻或某一动作之前完成的动作或呈现的状态。也就是说发生在“过去的过去”。既然过去完成时的动作发生在过去某一时间之前，那么，使用过去完成时就必须先有这样一个过去的时间。
e.g. I had finished my homework before supper.
我在晚饭前把作业做完了。
句中的supper既是过去某一时间，而had finished这一动作就是在supper之前完成的。如果只说I had finished my homework. 听者会觉得难以理解。由此可见，过去完成时是个相对的时态，它不能离开过去的时间而独立存在。
e.g. By the end of that year Henry had collected more than one thousand foreign stamps.
到那年年底，亨利已经收集了一千多张外国邮票。（过去时间是the end of that year）
e.g. When we got there, the football match had already started.
当我们到那里时，足球比赛已经开始了。（过去时间是when从句）
2. when和by the time引导的时间状语从句
by the time到…时候为止，指从过去某一点到从句所示的时间为止，这一时间段。
when 当…时候，指过去的某一时间点。从句用一般过去时，主句为过去完成时。
e.g. By the time she got up, her brother had already gone into the bathroom.
到她起床的时候，她的弟弟已经去洗澡间了。
By the time she went outside, the bus had already gone.
到她走到外面的时候，公共汽车已经走了。
When she got to school, she realized she had left her backpack at home.
当她到学校的时候，她意识到她把书包放在家里了。
（在这句话中，过去的时间点为“到校”的时候，“她把书包放在家里”则发生在“过去的过去”。）
3. How to narrate past events.
如何描述过去的事件。
描述过去的事件，首要注意一点是时态。由于事情发生在过去，因此一定要用过去的某种时态。但如果是直接引语（如在双引号“”之内），则根据当时的情况来决定。
请看例文1：
It was Sunday. I went to a pool to fish. I thought there must be some fish for me to catch. I held my fishing pole, waiting patiently. Suddently a big fish was caught. I was glad and put it into my little basket. Before long my sister came. Without a word she put back the fish into the water. I was astonished. I really thought she became mad. She ordered me to put down the fishing pole and led me to a place not far away. There stood a sign, reading “No fishing”. I realized that I was making a mistake.
（注意观察文中时态的应用）
例2：请大声朗读Section A 3a，并找出其中用到的时态。
六. 疑难解析（Key Points）
1. 关于get的词组小结
在本单元出现大量关于get的词组，要注意背诵
get to school 到学校 get to class 到班级
get into the shower 去洗澡
get outside 到外边
get home 到家
get up 起床
get married 结婚
get dressed 穿好衣服
2. I’ve never been late for school, but yesterday I came very close.
我上学从不迟到，但是昨天我险些迟到。
close adv. （副词）邻近地、接近地，意思是接近上课时间才到校。
3. Have you ever been an April fool?
你曾经做过愚人节傻瓜吗？
April Fool’s Day愚人节 每年的四月一日，在那天，如果被人愚弄的人就被称为April fool. （愚人节傻瓜）
4. He had changed the clock to an hour earlier.
他把表调快了一个小时。
change…to（into）… 把…变成…
e.g. Please change these sentences into English.
请把这些句子译成英文。
5. I only just made it to my class.
我刚好赶上上课。
only just“刚刚才、恰好”
eg. They’ve only just gotten up. 他们刚刚起身。
make it 办成功，做到、赶到
eg. You can’t make it to the other shore in this weather.
天气这样恶劣，你可到不了对岸。
6. Welles was so convincing that hundreds of people believed the story, and panic set off across the whole country.
Welles是如此地让人信任，以致于成百上千的人都相信了这个故事，进而激起了全国性的恐慌。
（1）so …that…句型中，so后面应加一个形容词或副词，意为“如此…以至于…”
eg. This book is so interesting that everybody in our class wants to read it.
这本书是如此的有趣以至于全班同学都想看看。（so+形容词）
He ran so fast that I couldn’t catch up with him.
他跑得那么快，以致于我跟不上他。（so+副词）
so…that引导的是表示结果的状语从句，但不一定要死套“如此…以至于”的模式来译成汉语。
eg. It was so dark that he couldn’t see the faces of his companions.
天太黑了，他不能看见同伴的脸。
（2）so that主要用来引导目的状语从句，其从句中的谓语动词通常和can, may, should等情态动词连用，而且主句和从句之间不使用逗号意为“以便，使能够”。
e.g. They set out early so that they might arrive in time.
他们早早地出发以便按时到达。
Let’s take the front seats so that we may see more clearly.
我们坐在前排吧，以便可以看得更清楚。
7. By the time the authorities revealed that the story was a hoax, thousands of people had fled from their homes.
当权威机构揭露这个故事是一个骗局时，成千上万的人已经逃离家园。
8. The TV star lost both his girlfriend and his show.
那个电视明星既失去了他的女朋友，也失去了他的电视节目。
both …and… 二者都
The First Period
Ⅰ．Teaching Aims and Demands
1．Knowledge Objects
(1) Key Vocabulary
oversleep
(2) Target Language
What happened?
I overslept. And by the time I got up, my brother had already gotten in the shower.
2．Ability Objects
(1) Teach the students to use the new words.
(2) Train the students to narrate past events with the Past Perfect Tense.
(3) Train the students' listening and speaking skills with the target language.
3．Moral Object
It's a good habit to go to bed early in the evening and get up early in the morning. So you'll never be in a hurry in the morning.
Ⅱ．Teaching Key Points
1．Key Vocabulary
oversleep
2．Target Language
Narrate past events with the Past Perfect Tense
Ⅲ．Teaching Difficult Points
1．Train the students to narrate past events with the Past Perfect Tense.
2．Train the students to understand the target language in spoken conversation.
Ⅳ．Teaching Methods
1．Thinking of examples from the students' real lives.
2．Making sentences by looking at the pictures.
Ⅴ．Teaching Aid
A tape recorder
Ⅵ．Teaching Procedures
Step Ⅰ Revision
1．Revise the language points in Unit 8. Ask some questions like this: What volunteer work would you like to do? Help the students to answer, I'd like to …/I love to …/I hope to …
2．Practice the dialogue in Activity 3c on page 62 again. Get students to role play the similar dialogues with the following.
SA: I'd like to join the school volunteer project, but I'm not sure what I should do.
SB: What do you like doing?
SA: I love playing football.
SB: Well, you could help coach a football team for little kids. Let the children practice in pairs.
3．Check the students' homework by asking some students to read their sentences with the phrasal verbs. Then ask the students to hand in their homework.
4．Dictate the following words:
clean up, cheer up, give out, put off, set up, run out of, take after, fix up, give away, call up, hand out, work out, hunger, establish, commitment, veterinarian, strategy
Step Ⅱ 1a
This activity introduces new vocabulary which can be used to narrate past events. First write by the time on the blackboard, and tell the class the meaning of it.
“by the time” means not later than, before, as soon as, or when the indicated comes. When we use the words. “By the time … ,” we are talking about two different things that happened in the past. Say this sentence to the class; By the time the teacher came in, the students had begun reading English.
Tell them to note the struture “had begun” in this sentence. Begun is the past participle of begin. When we talk about two events both happened in the past, the one which happened earlier should use and plus a past participle. The words following By the time … talk about the thing that happened later. And tell the students when they use had plus a past participle, they are using the Past Perfect Tense. Also explain what is the past participle form of a verb for the students. Tell them it is as the same as the past form for a regular verb. And they have to remember the irregular verbs' participles one by one.
Play a game to help the students understand the sentences with the words By the time … Do it like this:
Pretend that the teacher will leave the classroom and the students will do some things. When the teacher returns, the class will make statements starting with By the time …
Write By the time I came back … on the blackboard.
Say to the class, By the time I came in, what had happened?
Help one student to answer like this,
By the time the teacher came in, Don had written his name on the blackboard.
Then get more students to answer differently, such as,
By the time the teacher came in, we had discussed an English problem.
By the time the teacher came in, I had drawn a picture.
Write these sentences on the blackboard, and teach the students to read several times.
Read the instructions to the students and read these questions to the class as well, What do you usually do in the morning before school? Do you like morning? Why or why not?
Choose one good student to answer them by saying something he or she usually does in the morning.
He or she may answer like this,
I usually get up early, wash my face and have breakfast. I like mornings because the air is fresh. or I usually get up as late as possible. Then I have to wash my face and have breakfast in a hurry. I often rush to school without breakfast. Sometimes I forget something at home. I don't like morning, because I am always too busy.
Then have the whole class practice in pairs. Ask each other the questions.
After they finish talking, ask one or two pairs to say their conversations to the class. Correct the mistakes they may make with the other students.
Call the students' attention to the pictures in Activity 1a. Ask students to tell what they see.
Say, Any sentences which make sense are accepted to describe the pictures. The girl in the pictures is Tina. Present the new words by providing sentences showing the meanings of them like this: T; What can you see in Picture 1?
S1: She slept a long time.
T: That's correct. She slept too late. She overslept. Class repeat. She overslept.
Ss: She overslept.
T: What do you see in Picture 2?
S2: Her brother or sister is in the bathroom
T: That's correct. She wants to go into the bathroom. She can't because someone is taking a shower. Class repeat. Someone is taking a shower.
Ss: Someone is taking a shower.
Write these words on the blackboard:
overslept, taking a shower, had left, left her backpack at home.
Then tell students to talk about the pictures in groups of four. Move around the classroom, listening to students and offering help. Make sure that they talk in English.
After they all finish talking, ask different groups to tell the class about the pictures. They may say like this:
Tina overslept in the morning. She wanted to go to the bathroom, but her brother had already gotten in the shower. When she got to the bus stop, the bus had already left. She had to run to school. After she got to school, she realized she had left her backpack at home. The sentences can vary, but should be correct.
Step Ⅲ 1b
This activity gives students practice in understanding the target language in spoken conversation.
Ask the students to read the instructions together. Have them look at the two columns, A and B. in the chart. Point out the sample answer. Read the two parts of the sentence.
Then go over the other unconnected parts of sentences, too.
You will connect the two parts of the sentences, connect a sentence beginning in the first column with the end of that sentence in the second column. Please guess the other two sentences before I play the tape.
I guess most of the children can get the correct sentences by guessing. So just let them guess. Don't tell them whether their answers are right or wrong.
OK, just keep your answers by guessing. Let's decide if they are right by listening to the tape now.
Play the recording for the first time. Students only listen. Then play it a second time. Let students match two parts of each sentence. Check the answers by asking some students to tell their answers. Make sure that all of them have got the correct answers by listening. Say congratulations to the students who get the answers correctly by guessing.
Answers
1．b 2．a 3．c
Tapescript
Boy: Hi, Tina. You look stressed out.
Girl: I am. I had a bad morning.
Boy: Really? What happened?
Girl: Well, first of all I overslept. By the time I got up, my brother had already gotten in the shower.
Boy: Oh, what a pain!
Girl: So, after he got out of shower, I took a quick shower and got dressed. But by the time I went outside, the bus had already left.
Boy: Oh, no!
Girl: Oh, yes! So I ran all the way to school. But when I got to school, I realized I had left my backpack at home.
Boy: No wonder you look stressed out.
Step Ⅳ 1c
This practice provides guided oral practice using the target language.
First play the recording in Activity 1b again and let the students read after it. Do it at least twice.
Then read the instructions together with the whole class.
You will make conversations in pairs. Each of you will have to take turns being Tina. Look at the pictures in Activity 1a to help you. Tell your partner what happened to you this morning. Ask a pair to read the example to the class before they begin.
SA: What happened?
SB: I overslept. And by the time I got up, my brother had already gotten in the shower.
Write the conversation on the blackboard.
Have the students work in pairs. Move around the room offering language support as needed.
After they all finish talking, ask some pairs to say their conversations to the class.
Step Ⅴ Summary
Say, In this class, we've learned how to narrate past events, using the Past Perfect Tense. We've also done some listening practice in understanding the target language in spoken conversation. Also, we've done much oral practice using the target language.
Step Ⅵ Homework
1．Write out the story of Tina, Note to use the target language.
2．Revise when to use the Past Perfect Tense and the verb structure of it.
Step Ⅶ Blackboard Design
Unit 9 By the time I got outside, the
bus had already left.
Section A
The First Period
1．By the time …
By the time the teacher came in, the students had begun reading.
By the time the teacher came in, Don had written his name on the blackboard.
By the time the teacher came in, we had discussed an English problem.
2．Some words to describe the pictures
overslept, taking a shower, had left, left her backpack at home.
3．Target Language:
A: What happened?
B: I overslept. And by the time I got up, my brother had already gotten in the shower.
The Second Period
Ⅰ．Teaching Aims and Demands
1．Knowledge Objects
(1) Target Language
By the time she got to class, the teacher had already started teaching.
When she got to school, she realized she had left her backpack at home.
When I got home, I realized I had left my keys in the backpack.
(2) The Three Forms of the verbs.
2．Ability Objects
(1) Train the students' listening skill.
(2) Train the students' writing skill with the target language.
(3) Train the students' speaking skill.
(4) Train the students to use the three forms of the verbs.
3．Moral Object
Try to be a careful person and do everything carefully. Remember not to be as careless as Tina.
Ⅱ．Teaching Key Points
1．Listening practice with the target language.
2．Use the correct verb forms to fill in the blanks by listening.
3．Make sentences using the Past Perfect Tense.
4．The three forms of the verbs.
Ⅲ．Teaching Difficult Points
1．Write an ending for the story in Activity 2c.
2．The three verb forms in Grammar Focus.
Ⅳ．Teaching Methods
1．Listening
2．Pairwork
Ⅴ．Teaching Aids
A tape recorder
Ⅵ．Teaching Procedures
Step Ⅰ Revision
1．Revise what happened to Tina in the morning by asking one or two students to tell the stroy on page 68.
They may say like this:
Tina had a bad morning. First of all she overslept. By the time she got up, her brother had already gotten in the shower. And by the time she went outside, the bus had already left. She had to run all the way to school. When she got to school, she realized she had left her backpack at home. All these made her look stressed out. After that, ask the whole class to work in pairs. telling the stroy and helping each other in turns. Remind them to use the correct verb forms.
2．Ask students to check each other's homework in pairs, pointing out all the mistakes they might have made.
3．Revise the Past Perfect Tense by asking the children when to use it and what its verb structure is.
Step Ⅱ 2a
This activity provides guided listening practice using the target language.
We have known Tina had a bad morning. But something worse happened to Tina later. Let's go to Activity 2a on page 69 and see what happened to Tina later in the morning.
Read the instructions to the class. Be sure that all of them know what to do. Call the students' attention to the four pictures. Get them to guess the correct order of the pictures first. The first one is given as a sample. Ask one or two children to tell their stories by describing the pictures according to their own order.
Then, we will hear Tina talking about what happened to her after she got to school. We can see there is a small box in each picture. Please write a number from 1 to 4 in each box to show each picture's correct order. The first one has been given as a sample. Get the children to get ready to listen to Tina continue her story.
Play the recording the first time, students only listen. Play the recording again and ask the children to number each picture. Check the answers with the class and see who have ever got the correct answers without listening.
Answers
The pictures should be numbered in this order:
3 1 2 4
Tapescript
Boy: So then what did you do, Tina?
Girl: Well, I ran home to get my backpack. But when I got home, I realized I had left my keys in the backpack.
Boy: You're kidding!
Girl : So I ran back to school without my keys or my backpack. And by the time I got back to school, the bell had rung.
Boy: Oh, no!
Girl: And by the time I walked into class, the teacher had started teaching already. She asked for our homework, but of course I didn't have it.
Step Ⅲ 2b
This activity gives students practice in understanding and writing the target language.
Ask the students to read the instructions together. Point out the blanks in the sentences and the verbs in the brackets.
This activity has two parts. First let's fill in the blanks with the correct verb forms. We can see some verbs in the brackets. They are the base forms of the given verbs. For example, get and got, Get is the base form of the verb. Your job is to write the correct forms of these verbs in the blanks. Look at number one. A sample answer is given.
Let the students fill in the blanks with the correct forms individually.
Move around the classroom collecting the common mistakes they may make.
After they all finish writing, tell them to get ready to listen to the conversation and check their answers.
I will play the recording again. Please check your answers and correct any mistakes you might have made while listening. Play the recording. Students listen and check their answers. Correct the answers by asking seven different students to say theirs to the class.
Answers
1．got home 2．realized 3．had left 4．got 5．had rung 6．walked 7．had started
Step Ⅳ 2c
This activity gives students oral practice with the target language.
Ask the whole class to read the instructions together.
We have a new task now. We know Tina was late for class. What do you think happened after Tina was late for class Work with a partner. Make up an ending for the story by continuing it. The beginning has been given.
Get students to discuss in pairs, Complete the ending. Make sure they are talking in English. Move around the classroom, offering language support if needed. After ten minutes, ask students to stop discussing. Get some pairs of students to tell the class how they think the story ended. And let the whole class decide whose ending is the best. Tell each pair to write down their ending, or do it after class if time is not enough.
Sample ending of the story
The teacher looked at Tina and said, “Why are you late and where is your homework, Tina?”
“I had a bad morning today. ”Tina said sadly.
“I'm sorry to hear that, but may I know what happened?”said the teacher.
Then Tina told the teacher and the whole class her story. All her classmates laughed loudly after it. Some of them said,“Poor Tina!”
Bob, one of Tina's classmates, stood up and said, “ Well, Tina, I'd love to help you. Why not let me keep the keys for you? I would put your keys in my backpack. ”
Step Ⅴ Grammar Focus
This activity introduces the target language of this unit. Call students' attention to the sentences on the left. Ask four different students to read the four sentences and point out where had plus a past participle is used. Write the sentences on the blackboard.
Draw a simple time line for each sentence to help students to understand the grammar focus. For example:
Then get the students to look at the box. Teach students to read the three forms of each verbs first. Then ask several students to read the verbs to the class to see if they can read. Write the verbs on the blackboard.
Ask the students to make sentences correctly using each form of the verbs in the box. For example:
I usually get up at 6:30.
I got up at 5:30 yesterday.
By the time I got up, my sister had already gotten in the shower.
Tell the students when we talk about the first thing that happened. We use had plus a past participle (had gotten) and when we talk about the second thing that happened, we use the simple past tense (got up) . Ask some to read their sentences to the class.
Ask the students to make their own lists of other verbs used in this unit. Tell them to put the lists in their notebooks using a three-column format like the one in the Look! section. The lists have to include these verbs: leave, walk, start, oversleep, ring, be.
Check the answers.
Some sample sentences with the three verb forms
1．I got up at 6 : 30 every day.
I got up at 6 : 00 yesterday.
By the time I got up, my sister had already gotten in the shower.
2．We usually go to school at 7 : 30.
We went to school at 8:30 yesterday.
By the time we got to the classroom, the students had gone to the chemistry lab.
3．My father leaves home at 8:30.
He left home at 9:30 this morning.
When my father went outside, the bus had left.
4．The teacher often starts teaching at 9:00.
The teacher started teaching at 8:30 the day before yesterday.
When Tina got to class, the teacher had already started teaching.
The three forms of the verbs used in this unit:
leave left left
walk walked walked
start started started
oversleep overslept overslept
ring rang rung
be was/were been
Step Ⅵ Summary
Say, In this class, we've done much listening and writing practice with target language. We've also done some oral practice in pairs. And we've discussed the Grammar Focus of this unit.
Step Ⅶ Homework
1．Write down the ending of Tina's story.
2．Make sentences using each form of the verbs below:
leave, walk, start , oversleep, ring, be
3．Review the Grammar Focus.
Step Ⅷ Blackboard Design
Unit 9 By the time I got outside, the
bus had already left.
Section A
The Second Period
Target Language:
1．By the time she got up, her brother had already gone into the bathroom.
2．By the time she went outside, the bus had already gone.
3．By the time she got to class, the teacher had already started teaching.
4．When she got to school, she realized she had left her backpack at home.
Verbs:
get got gotten
go went gone
leave left left
start started started
The Third Period
Ⅰ．Teaching Aims and Demands
1．Knowledge Objects
(1) Key Vocabulary
bell, ring, go off, rush, run off, on time, give sb. a ride, lock, break down
(2) Target Language
By the time I got there, the bus had already left.
By the time I woke up, my father had already gone into the bathroom.
2．Ability Objects
Train the students' reading skill with target language.
Train the students' speaking skill with target language.
3．Moral Object
Have you ever done anything carelessly?
Share your story with your friends.
Ⅱ．Teaching Key Points
1．Guide the students to read the article in activity 3a.
2．Help the students do the oral practice with the target language.
Ⅲ．Teaching Difficult Points
1．Help improve the students' reading skill by, Activity 3a.
2．Help the students describe what has happened to them with the target language.
Ⅳ．Teaching Methods
1．Get the main idea by reading.
2．Pairwork.
Ⅴ．Teaching Aid
A projector
Ⅵ．Teaching Procedures
Step Ⅰ Revision
1．Revise what happened to Tina by asking several students to tell the story.
2．Revise the three forms of the verbs in Grammar Focus by asking four students to write them out on the blackboard.
3．Check homework by asking one or two to read their own endings of the stroy.
4．Check homework by asking some students to read the sentences which they made.
5．Ask the students to hand in their homework.
Some sample sentences with the verbs used in this unit:
1．I leave home at 7:30 every morning.
I left home at 8:00 this morning.
By the time I got to the airport, the plane had left.
2．I walk to school sometimes.
I walked to school yesterday afternoon.
When I got there, the sick girl had walk away.
3．The meeting start at 3: 00 every Wednesday afternoon.
The meeting started at 3: 30 last Wednesday afternoon.
As soon as Mr. Jones got to the meeting room, the meeting had already started.
4．Tina seldom oversleeps.
Tina overslept this morning.
Tina said she had never overslept before.
5．The bell rings at 8:10 every morning.
The bell rang at 7:10 this morning.
When I got to school, the first bell had rung.
6．I am here now.
I was at home last night.
I had been here for 20 years by the end of .
Step Ⅱ 3a
This activity provides reading and writing practice using the target language.
Show the vocabulary on the screen by a project:
bell n 钟；铃
ring v. 鸣；响
go off 闹钟(闹响)
rush v. 冲；奔
rush off 跑掉；迅速离开
on time 准时
give sb. a ride 让某人搭便车
lock v. 锁；锁上
break down 损坏；坏掉
Point to the words one by one and teach the students to read them. Do it several times. Then ask several students to read the words to see if they can pronounce each word correctly.
Ask the whole class to read the instructions together. There is an article in Activity 3a. Your task is to read the stroy and write the events in the correct order. Have a look at the sample answer on the right of the article before you start. Then let the children complete the work on their own. After a while; ask some students to report their answers to the class. Write the events on the blackboard as they report, putting the events in the correct order.
After checking the answers, tell students to read the article again more carefully. Tell them to find out the words or sentences which they can't understand this time.
A few minutes later ,let the students ask questions on the words and sentences which they can't understand. Do some explanation and make sure that the students make everything clear about the article. Then ask the students to read the article aloud. Move around the classroom while they are reading, offering help as needed. Next ask students to pick out the sentences with the Past Perfect Tense. Tell them to underline them and come up with the reason to use the tence.
Ask two students to read their answers and explain the sentences.
Answers
1．alarm clock didn't go off
2．father went to bathroom
3．woke up late
4．took shower
5．had some breakfast
6．bus left
7．ran to bus stop
8．started walking
9．got a ride with a friend
10．bell ringing
11．got to school
12．got to class
Sentences with the Past Perfect Tense in the article:
1．…by the time I woke up, my father had already gone into the bathroom and …
2．Unfortunately, by the time I got there, the bus had already left.
Step Ⅲ 3b
This activity provides reading and writing practice using the target language.
Call the students' attention to the photo of the woman sleeping. The girl is sleeping. She may oversleep. How about you? Have you ever overslept?
Get a students to answer the question simply, such as Yes, I have. /No, I haven't.
Then ask one student to read the instructions to the class.
We can see six questions in the box.
You'll have to read the questions in the box and you have to describe the circumstances in which these things happened. Explain that describe the circumstances means to tell when, where and how the things happened.
Ask one student who has ever overslept to answer the first question and describe the circumstance. Help him or her use the Past Perfect Tense to describe the circumstance.
Then ask students to read the questions and write their answers in their exercise books. Tell them that they have to describe the circumstances if their answers are Yes, and there should be at least one sentence with the Past Perfect Tense in each description. Move around the classroom providing sentences to the ones who need. Ask several students to share their stories with the class. Correct any mistakes they may make. Let them check the answers in pairs.
Step Ⅳ 3c
This activity provides listening and speaking practice using the target language. Ask the whole class to read the instructions together. Then call the students' attention to the sample conversation on the right. Ask a pair of the students to read the conversation to the class. Please ask your partner the questions in Activity 3b. Ask more questions if he or she says “Yes”.
Ask the students to work in pairs. Encourage them to ask as many questions as they can. As they work, move around the room offering help and answering questions as needed. Ask some pairs to say their conversations to the class.
Step Ⅵ Summary
Say, In this class, we've learned an article. And we've done much practice in reading, listening, speaking and writing. We've done much practice with the target language.
Step Ⅶ Homework
1．Write the answers to the questions in Activity 3b.
2．Write a conversation in Activity 3c.
Step Ⅷ Blackboard Design
Unit 9 By the time I got outside, the
bus had already left.
Section A
The Third Period
Answers to Activity 3a:
1．alarm clock didn't go off
2．father went to bathroom
3．woke up late
4．took shower
5．had some breakfast
6．bus left
7．ran to bus stop
8．started walking
9．got a ride with a friend
10．bell ringing
11．got to school
12．got to class
The Fourth Period
Ⅰ．Teaching Aims and Demands
1．Knowledge Objects
(1) Key Vocabulary
costume, show up, exhausted, embarrassed, empty, fool, April Fool's Day, go off, stay up
(2) Target Language
When I got there, I found that he had fooled me.
After an hour, the other kids showld up, and I realized that my brother had fooled me.
By the time I got to match class, I was exhausted because I had stayed up all night studying.
I found out that my friend had fooled me.
2．Ability Objects
(1) Train the students' writing, listening and speaking skills with the target language.
(2) Train the students to use the new vocabulary.
3．Moral Object
Have you ever been fooled on April Fool's Day? Share your story with your friends.
Ⅱ．Teaching Key Points
1．Train the students' listening and speaking skills with target language.
2．Teach the students the new vocabulary.
Ⅲ．Teaching Difficult Points
1．Guide listening and oral practice using the target language.
2．Help learn to use the new vocabulary correctly.
Ⅳ．Teaching Methods
1．Listening
2．Pairwork and groupwork
Ⅴ．Teaching Aid
A tape recorder
Ⅵ.Teaching Procedures
Step Ⅰ Revision
1．Revise the article in Activity 3a on page 70 by asking several students to read it.
2．Dictate the following words and phrases:
bell, ring, go off, rush, run off, on time, give sb. a ride lock, break down.
3．Check the homework.
Step Ⅱ 1a
This activity reviews vocabulary, introduces some new vocabulary, and provides writing practice.
Read the instructions to the students. Remember to read the sentence in the brackets. Point to the chart with the three headings-Nouns, Verbs and Adjectives. Read the words in the brackets to the students and help the students to understand the meanings of nouns, verbs and adjectives.
Teach the students to read the new vocabulary below:
costume, show up, exhausted, embarrassed, empty, fool.
April Fool's Day
Write them on the blackboard or show them on a screen by a projector while teaching. Tell the children the meaning of each word and do a little explanation.
Then call the students' attention to the list of the words on the left. Ask a student to read them and tell the meanings at the same time. Find out the words which the students don't understand and give some explanation.
Please put these words in the correct columns in the chart. Some words can be put in more than one column.
Get a student to read the sample answers to the class before they start say, Fool can also be a verb. For example, He fooled me. So it is pat in both Column Nouns and Column Verbs.
Ask the students to complete the chart on their own.
Correct the answers by asking three students to read their answers to the class.
Answers
Nouns: fool, costume, change, clock
Verbs: fool, invite, empty, go off, get up, get dressed, show up, realize, change, stay up
Adjectives : embarrassed, empty, exhausted
Step Ⅲ 1b
This activity provides guided oral practice using the target language.
Ask a student to read the instructions to the class.
Ask another student to read the example on the right.
Work in pairs now. Tell your partner about something that has happened to you recently. Note to use two or more phrases from the list in Activity 1a. Get the students to talk in pairs. Move around the classroom checking their work and offering language support as needed.
After they all finish talking, ask some pairs to say their conversations to the class.
Step Ⅳ 2a
This activity provides guided listening practice using the target language. Say something about April Fool's Day to the students like this:
Every year on the first tit April, Americans do silly things to surprise each other. For example, someone might tell you to go to the teacher's office to get your new book. But there is no book at all !Call the students' attention to the four pictures. Ask the student, what is happening in each picture.
Ask four different students to describe the pictures. For example, they can describe Picture 1 like this:
A boy was told to take part in a costume party. So he dressed himself up like a monster. But when he got there, he found that his friend had fooled him. It wasn't a costume party. He frightened the others. Read the instructions to the class.
You'll listen to three boys, Dave, Nick and Joe, talking about April Fool's Day. There is a box under each picture where you can write each boy's name. Now listen to the tape and write the name of each boy under his picture. I have to tell you there will be one picture without a name under it.
Tell them to see the example for Picture c. Play the tape the first time. The students only listen. Then play the tape again. Ask the students to write each boy's name in the correct box. Check the answers by asking different students to tell their own answers.
Answers
a. No name b. Joe c. Nick d. Dave
Tapescript
Boy 1 : Have you ever been an April fool, Dave?
Boy 2 : Yes, I have. A friend once invited me to a costume party. When I got there, I found that he had fooled me. It wasn't a costume party. I was the only person wearing a costume. I was really embarrassed. How about you, Nick?
Boy 1: Well, last April Fool's Day, when my alarm went off I got up, took a shower, got dressed, and went to school. But when I got there, the school was empty. I was the only one there. After an hour, the other kids showed up, and I realized that my brother had fooled me.
Boy 3: He had?
Boy 1: Uh-huh. He had changed the clock to an hour earlier. What happened to you on April Fool's Day, Joe?
Boy 3: Well, I was sick last April first. My friend called me and told me we had a maths test the next day. By the time I go to maths class, I was exhausted because I had stayed up all night studying. Then I found out that my friend had fooled me. We didn't have a test at all!
Step Ⅴ 2b
This activity provides guided listening practice using the target language.
Read the instructions to the class. There are six phrases in the box. Your task is to find out who says each of the phrases, Dave, Nick or Joe after listening to the same recording. And write “D” for Dave, “N” for Nick and “J” for Joes on the short lines before the phrases. Look at the first one. The answer has been given as a sample.
Play the recording the first time. The students only listen. Then play the recording again. Ask the students to write the letters in the blanks. Ask six different students to report their answers to the class. Check the answers with the class.
Answers
1．D 2．N 3．J 4．J 5．D 6．N
Step Ⅵ 2c
This activity provides oral practice using the target language.
First play the recording again. Pause after each sentence and get the students to repeat.
Do it at least twice.
Ask a student to read the instructions to the class. Then have them look at the sample conversation on the right. Ask a pair of the students to read and try to continue it like this:
SA: What happened to Dave on April Fool's Day?
SB: Well, a friend invited him to a costume party. When he got there, he found that he had fooled him. It wasn't a costume party. He was the only person wearing a costume. He was really embarrassed.
Then ask the students to work in pairs. Each pair makes two. conversations using information from the earlier activities.
Move around the room as they work, offering help as needed. Ask one or two pairs to say their conversations to the class.
Step Ⅶ Summary
Say, In this class, we've learned some new words. And we've done much listening and oral practice. We have enjoyed some interesting stories happened on April Fool's Day.
Step Ⅷ Homework
1．Write something that has happened to you recently. Use two or more phrases from the list in Activity 1a.
2．Write a conversation in Activity 2c.
Step Ⅸ Blackboard Design
Unit 9 By the time I got outside, the
bus had already left.
Section B
The Fourth Period
1．Answers to Activity 1a:
Nouns: fool, costume, change, clock
Verbs: fool, invite, empty, go off, get up, get dressed, show up, realize, change, stay up
Adjectives: embarrassed, empty, exhausted
2．Target language:
A: What happened to Dave on April Fool's Day?
B: Well, a friend invited him to a costume party. When he got there, he found that he had fooled him. it wasn't a costume party. He was the only person wearing a costume. He was really embarrassed.
The Fifth Period
Ⅰ．Teaching Aims and Demands
1．Knowledge Objects
(1) Key Vocabulary
announce, describe, convince, panic, set off, authority, reveal, hoax, flee/fled/fled, spaghetti, girl-friend, show, marry, thrill, get married, reply, ending
(2) The reading passages about April Fool's Day.
(3) W rite stories happened on April Fool's Day.
2．Ability Objects
(1) Train the students' reading skill.
(2) Train the students' writing and speaking skills.
3．Moral Object
Try to collect the jokes happened on April Fool's Day and share them with your friends.
Ⅱ．Teaching Key Points
1．Teach the students the new vocabulary.
2．Help the students understand the three articles.
3．Guide the students to write stories happened on April Fool's Day.
Ⅲ．Teaching Difficult Points
1．Help the students understand the three articles.
2．Help the students write the stories happened on April Fool's Day.
Ⅳ．Teaching Methods
1．Reading method.
2．Write a passage using the notes.
3．Tell jokes.
Ⅴ．Teaching Aids
A project and a tape recorder.
Ⅵ．Teaching Procedures
Step Ⅰ Revision
1．Revise the three boy's stories happened on April Fool's Day. Ask three different students to tell their stories to the class.
2．Check the homework. Ask some students to read their stories and conversations to the class. Then have them check each other's homework in pairs.
Step Ⅱ 3a
This activity provides reading practice using the target language.
Show the new words and expressions on the screen by a projector.
announce v. 宣告；通告
describe v. 描述；描绘
convince v. 使确信；使信服
panic n. 恐慌；惊恐
set off 激起；引起
authority n. 权威机构；行政管理机构
reveal v. 揭示；揭露
hoax n. 骗局；恶作剧；玩笑
flee n. 逃跑；逃走
spaghetti n. 意大利式细面条
girlfriend n. 女朋友
show n. 演出；展示；炫耀
marry v. 嫁；娶；与……结婚
thrill v. 回答；答复
ending n. 结局；结尾
get married 结婚
reply v. 回答；回复
Call the students' attention to the screen.
Point to the words on the screen one by one.
And Teach the students to read the words several times. Make sure that the students can read each word correctly.
Read the instructions to the students.
You'll have to read three articles. The three articles are about three different stories happened on April Fool's Day. Not all of them are true. Tell which of these stories is the most believable and which is the least believable. And you have to tell the reasons as well. At last, think over if you would be fooled by any of the stories.
Read the first article to the class. The students look at their books, listen to the teacher and find out the answers to the questions in the instructions.
After reading, ask the students if it is believable and why. Ask several students to tell their opinions on the believability of the first article. They may say like this: I think it is believable because the exact time and person's name are given in the first sentence. or, I don't think it's believable because I think no one dared to fool the people like that.
Do the same with the two articles left. Ask two good students to read the articles instead of the teacher. Elicit students' reasons for their answers. At last tell the students the correct answer.
Answers
The first story really happened. The radio program was called “The War of the World. ”
Step Ⅲ 3b
This activity provides reading and writing practice using the target language.
Read the instructions to the class. Play the recording again to help the students, Ask three different students to read the notes to the class.
Help the students make sentences with the notes first.
Look at the first line of the notes, please. Let's see what happened first by making sentences using the notes.
Let the students make sentences with the phrases given in the first line orally, based on the story happened to Nick. For example, when the alarm went off, Nick got up, took a shower, got dressed, and went to school. Then go on with the second line. They may say:
But when he got to school, the school was empty, An hour later, the other kids showed up.
The sample sentence for the third line.
He realized that his brother had fooled him.
After making sentences, ask the students to write a magazine story about Nick in Activities 2a and 2b. using the notes below. As they write, move around the room offering help and answering questions as needed.
After around ten minutes, ask a student to read the completed article to the class. The rest of the class help correct the mistakes the student may have made. Get them to check each other's writing carefully in pairs.
A sample answer
On April Fool's Day Nick's alarm went off. He got up and took a shower. Then he got dressed and went to school. When he got to school, the building was empty. An hour later the other kids showed up. Then he realized that his brother had fooled him. His brother had set his alarm an hour earlier.
Step Ⅳ 3c
This activity provides writing practice using the target language.
Read the instructions to the class. Be sure that the students know what they are asked to do. At first, have the students think what they might write about.
Then tell them to make a list of ideas before starting writing. The list should include the three parts, what happened first, what happened next, and what you finally realized. They can use the notes in Activity 3b as samples.
Write a sample list on the blackboard:
What happened first; school gate/met Don/Li Lei/waiting for/on the playground/ran to the playground.
What happened next: got to the playground/no one was there.
What I realized: Don/fooled me Next ask the students to write their jokes. Tell them they can use the article they wrote for Activity 3b as a model. After they start to write, move around the room providing help as needed.
Ask some students to read their' articles to the class. Correct as many of the articles as possible in class.
A sample writing
On April Fool's Day I met Don at the school gate. He told me that Li Lei was waiting for me on the playground. Then I ran to the playground. When I got there. I found no one was on the playground. Then I realized that Don had fooled me.
Step Ⅴ 4
This activity provides reading, speaking and listening practice using the target language.
Read the instructions to the class. Review the meanings of funniest, most embarrassing and most creative. Say, Each of you has to read your joke to the class. The class will vote on the funniest joke, the most embarrassing joke and the most creative joke.
Have the class have a look at the sample conversation in the box before reading. Ask a pair of the students to read it to the class.
SA: What's your joke?
SB: Well, last year, on the first day of school, my sister put a piece of paper on my back that said “Please say hello. ” All day at school, many strange said hello to me.
Write the conversation on the blackboard. Then ask the students to read their stories to the class. After all of the students have read, ask the class to vote for the funniest, most embarrassing and most creative stories.
Step Ⅵ Summary
In this class, we read three articles first. And then we wrote a magazine story based on some notes. Next we wrote a joke. At last, we voted for the funniest joke, the most embarrassing joke and the most creative joke. However, we've done much reading, writing and speaking practice.
Step Ⅶ Homework
1．Read the three articles aloud after class.
2．Correct the magazine story and the joke you have written.
3．Try to remember the new vocabulary.
Step Ⅷ Blackboard Design
Unit 9 By the time I got outside, the
bus had already left.
Section B
The Fifth Period
1．Sample notes to Activity 3c:
What happened first; school gate/met Don/Li Lei/waiting for/on the playground/ran to the playground.
What happened next; got to the playground/no one was there.
What I realized: Don/fooled me.
2．Target language:
A: What's your joke?
B: Well, last year, on the first day of school, my sister put a piece of paper on my back that said “Please say hello. ”All day at school, many strangers said hello to me.
The Sixth Period
Ⅰ．Teaching Aims and Demands
1．Knowledge Objects
(1) Verbs
rush, realize, invite, show up, stay up.
(2) Write an article according to the pictures given.
(3) Vocabulary
homework, look, costume, empty
2．Ability Objects
(1) Train the students to use these verbs correctly:
rush, realize, invite, show up, stay up.
(2) Train the students writing skill.
3．Moral Objects
Have you ever had a similar Sunday with Ming? Tell your own story to your classmates.
Ⅱ．Teaching Key Points
1．Help the students have a self check on the key words and target language of this unit.
2．Practise using these verbs: rush, realize, invite, show up, stay up.
3．Review the new vocabulary introduced in this unit: homework, lock, costume, empty.
4．Direct the students to write an article according to the pictures given.
Ⅲ．Teaching Difficult Points
1．Help the students make sentences with the verbs.
2．Direct the students to write an article with the pictures given.
Ⅳ．Teaching Methods
1．Teaching by providing sample sentences.
2．Teaching by describing the pictures.
Ⅴ．Teaching Aid
Just the blackboard.
Ⅵ．Teaching Procedures
Step Ⅰ Revision
1．Revise the contents in the three articles in Activity 3a on page 72 by asking the question below
Questions
(1) What did a radio program announce in 1938?
(2) What had happened by the time the authorities revealed the story was a hoax?
(3) What did a reporter announce on April Fool's Day?
(4) What had happened by the time people realized that the story was a hoax?
(5) What did a famous TV star once do on April Fool's Day?
(6) What was the ending of the last story?
2．Ask three different students to read the articles.
3．Dictate the following words:
announce, convince, panic, authority, reveal, spaghetti, describe, hoax, thrill, flee/fled/fled.
Step Ⅱ Part 1
This activity focuses on vocabulary introduced in the unit. Focus attention on the box. Invite a student to read the vocabulary words at the top.
You are asked to fill in the blanks with the words. In some cases, you may need to use another form of the word, for example, adjusting for tense or subject/verb agreement.
Ask students to fill in the blanks on their own. Check the answers. Five students each reads a sentence, filling in the blanks. The rest of the students check their work.
Answers
1．realized 2．rush 3．stay up 4．invite 5．show up
Ask students to make their own sentences with the words, preferably sentences that are meaningful. Move around the room. Collect a few students' answers with mistakes on the blackboard. Along with the students' help correct the mistakes.
Suggested answers
1．As soon as the bell rang, the students rushed to the playground.
2．By the time he got to the office he realized that he had locked all his keys at home.
3．Mr. Green invited his good friends to have a big dinner at home last Sunday.
4．We have to finish the task before the boss shows up.
5．Jack stayed up very late last night. He couldn't wake up on time this morning.
Step Ⅲ Part 2
This activity provides writing practice using the target language.
Have the students look at the seven pictures. Tell the children that the pictures are connected to each other in an order.
Ask: What is happening to Ming?
Get the whole class to read the instructions. Then ask the students to describe each picture in order. Write some useful sentences on the blackboard. For example, for the first picture, help the students to say Ming wakes up at 10: 00 and thinks she is late for school.
The sentences can vary.
After describing each picture, ask the students to write a story about Ming's day on their own. Walk around the room offering language support if needed.
After a while, ask a few students to tell the class about Ming's day. Let the rest of the class help correct the mistakes that they may have made.
Tell them to exchange their articles with their partners and help each other correct the mistakes. Ask the students to rewrite their articles to make the articles perfect after class.
A sample answer
Ming woke up at 10; 00 o'clock in the morning. She thought that she must be late for school. So she got up and rode a bike to school was empty. She was the only one there. Then she realized That it was Sunday.
Her good friend, Han Mei, came to see her after she had got home. Ming told Han Mei the whole story happened in the morning earlier. It made Han Mei laugh a lot.
Ming went to her grandparents' house with her parents. They had dinner together and talked happily.
Ming watched TV in the evening and she went to bed at 10 : 00.
Step Ⅳ Part 3
This activity focuses on the new vocabulary introduced in this unit.
Call the students' attention to the box Have them look at the four groups of words. Get the students to read the instructions together. Ask them to circle the words that don't belong in each group.
The first one has been given as a model. Ask some students to tell their answers to the class. Check the answers with the whole class.
Answers
1．homework 2．lock 3．costume 4．empty
Step Ⅴ Just for Fun!
This activity provides reading and speaking practice with the target language.
Call the students' attention to the cartoon pictures. Tell them to see what happens.
Ask the students to read the sentences under the pictures together.
Then ask the children what is funny about this cartoon. Help the students to answer like this:
The boy saw the clouds and he felt the rain long before he got home. He should have realized much sooner that he had forgotten his umbrella.
Step Ⅵ Summary
In this class, we've practiced using some verbs and we've written an article based on the pictures given. At last, we enjoyed a funny cartoon. All of you have done very well!
Step Ⅶ Homework
1．Revise all the language points in this unit.
2．Finish off the exercises on pages 36～38 of the workbook.
3．Make another more sentence with each verb below, rush, realize, invite, show up, stay up.
4．Rewrite the article.
Step Ⅷ Blackboard Design
Unit 9 By the time I got outside, the
bus had already left.
Self check
The Sixth Period
Answers to Activity 1 :
1．realized
2．rush
3．stay up
4．invite
5．show up
Sample answers to Activity 1:
1．As soon as the bell rang, the students rushed to the playground.
2．By the time he got to the office, he realized that he had locked all his keys at home.
3．Mr. Green invited his good friends to have a big dinner at home last Sunday.
4．We have to finish the task before the boss shows up.
5．Jack stayed up very late last night. He couldn't wake up on time this morning.
Reading : Changing English
The Seventh Period
Ⅰ．Teaching Aims and Demands
1．Knowledge Objects
Key Vocabulary
quarter, normal, traffic light, competition, significant, position and so on.
2．Ability Objects
Train students' ability of identify main idea.
Train students' ability of understanding words in context.
Train students' ability of reading for special information.
3．Moral Object
If you can speak both good English and your native language, it may help you get more chances in searching jobs.
Ⅱ．Teaching Key Points
Key vocabulary
Read the text to identify main idea.
Read the text to understand words in context.
Read the text for special information.
Ⅲ．Teaching Difficult Points
Train students' reading skill.
Ⅳ．Teaching Methods
1．Up-down reading methods.
2．Pairwork.
3．Groupwork.
Ⅴ．Teaching Aid
A projector.
Ⅵ．Teaching Procedures
Step Ⅰ Key Vocabulary
This activity introduces the key vocabulary words.
Show the following vocabulary on the screen by a projector.
quarter n. 四分之一
population n. 人口
native adj. 本国的；本地的
speaker n. 说话者；演讲者
wherever adv. 无论哪里
Singaporean n. 新加坡人
adj. 新加坡人的；新加坡的
India n. 印度
Hindi n. 印地语；印地人
adj. 印度北部的
German n. 德语；德国人
adj. 德语的；德国(人)的
invention n. 发明；创造
business n. 生意；商业
Say the words and have students repeat several times until they can pronounce them fluently and accurately.
Step Ⅱ Part 1
This activity is designed to activate students' background knowledge before attempting the reading.
Read the title Changing English to the class. Ask, What do you think the article is about?
Read the instructions to the class.
Point to the three questions in the box. Say, You are to discuss the questions about English with your partner. But don't look at the reading. Use your background knowledge instead.
Get students to complete the task in pairs. As the pairs work together, walk around the room. Ensure that they are discussing the questions in English.
When most students are finished, invite pairs of students to report their results. Don't say yes or no to their answers.
Step Ⅲ Part 2
This activity provides practice in scanning for specific information.
Look at the picture. Ask students to describe what is happening in the picture.
Read the instructions and draw students' attention to the list of numbers. Get a student to say the sample answer like this: In 1950 English started being more popular for science.
Please read through the article silently. Find information for the numbers. Remember to skim for the key ideas rather than read slowly. Get students to work on their own. As they are doing this, move around the classroom answering questions they may have and offering language support as needed.
Check the answers.
Answers
1950-In this year English started being more popular for science.
10 000-number of words in the South African dictionary not found elsewhere in the world.
a hundred-number of years ago that German was the most popular language for science.
one billion-number of people learning English.
375 million-the number of native speakers of English.
Step Ⅳ Part 3
This activity encourages students to use the strategy of reading in context.
Ask students to read the article once.
Say, Pay attention to the bold word and expressions. And note any other word or sentence you don't understand. Read in context, guessings their meanings from the other words around them.
A few minutes later, ask different students to say the meanings of the words and expressions indicated in bold by guess. Don't give them the correct answers. Let students look at the words and expressions and their meanings in the box. Point out the sample answer. Then ask students to match the correct meanings with the correct words and expressions. Allow them one or two minutes to do this.
Check the answers.
Answers
quarter d, normal a, traffic light e, competition f , significant b, position c
Get students to make sentences with the words and expressions. Remind them to look at the article again for extra help. Answers to this activity will vary. Ask a student to write his/her answers on the blackboard.
Sample answers
1．A quarter of students in my class are girls.
2．I hope the situation will soon return to normal.
3．When the traffic lights are red, you must stop.
4．He took part in a swimming competition.
5．Listening, speaking, reading and writing are four significant skills in learning English.
6．She is fit for the position.
Step Ⅴ Part 4
This activity helps students read for specific information.
Read the instructions to the class. Call students' attention to the chart. Ask a student to read the five sentences to the class. Say, You are to read the article again and decide if these sentences are true or false. And correct the false sentences. Give students a sample answer to the first sentence.
T: Do you think the first sentence is true or false?
Ss: False.
T: Why is it false?
Ss: Because Egyptians say Welcome to Egypt.
Get students to do the activity on their own. As students work, move around the room answering any questions they may have.
Check the answers. Ask different students to give their answers. For the false sentence, have them give the correct statement.
Answers
F Egyptians say Welcome in Egypt.
F Traffic lights in South Africa are called robots.
T
T
F Hinglish of Chinese and English is called Chinglish.
Step Ⅵ Part 5
This activity lets students work in groups and think critically about what they have read.
Read the instructions to the class.
Call students' attention to the chart. Set a time limit for students to go through all the sentences and the lettered languages. Say, The underlined words come from different languages. You are to read the sentences again and guess where these words come from or look them up in a dictionary. Try to match them with the languages they come from.
Give students a sample answer to the first s
新目标九年级英语课件(篇9)
九下第15单元短语
big are manatees?海牛多大？ /ten feet long10英尺长 /two meters tall两米高
pounds重1000在磅（How heave are the …） used to be a lot of manatees.过去曾有许多海牛 against/for doing sth/sth反对、赞成做某事 suitable for对……适用
sth in tiny cages把某物保存在小笼子里 for sb(them)关心、照顾他们 animals濒是临灭绝的动物 in cars坐车兜风 a bike骑自行车 house of trash垃圾房
/make sth out of /of/from sth由…建成的 built/made out of/of/from sth被用….建成的 down推倒
an inspiration to us对某人来说是个灵感
her spare/free time在他的空闲时间
money for the Children’s Hospital为儿童医院募集钱 do sth强烈要求某人做某事
of ＝hear about听说 from 收到…的来信 sth for sb =provide sb with sth 为某人提供某物 sb about sth 教育某人某事 不规则动词
burned preferred/ preferredburntburnt
threwthrown shot stuckstuck fedfedlightedlighted
1.海牛多大？ 英尺长 3.两米高
4重1000在磅（How heave are the …）5.过去曾有许多海牛 6.反对、赞成做某事 7.对……适用
8.把某物保存在小笼子里 9.关心、照顾他们10.濒是临灭绝的动物 11.坐车兜风 12.骑自行车 13.垃圾房 14.由…建成的 15.被用….建成的 16.推倒
17.对某人来说是个灵感
18.在他的空闲时间 19.为儿童医院募集钱 20.强烈要求某人做某事 21.听说23.收到…的来信 24.为某人提供某物 25.教育某人某事 不规则动词
新目标九年级英语课件(篇10)
单元背景 本单元是继第六单元定语从句重点语法学习的基础上，重点学习定语从句中先行词在从句中做状语的情况，即关系副词wherewhenwhy的选择使用。单元以旅行为话题展开学习，教学重点是关系副词的使用，难点是旅行中对所遇到的景观和人物等的表达。根据教材编排顺序和教学的需要我把教材分为四个课时：第一课时语法讲解和听力练习；第二课时话题展开和学习，包括3a的两篇短文阅读；第三课时Reading部分，重点培养学生的阅读理解能力；第四课时练习巩固。主要采用多媒体和学生的亲身经历的点滴事迹来展开学习，达到学生会说会用的目的。本节课是第一课时
课时设计说明 1.必备单词：capital，beach，jungle，fall，sight，tower,cathedal,church,wine,firm,pacific,programming,translator,conclusion
常考短语：by taxi,be supposed to do,take it easy,in general…
经典句型: I love the places where the people are really friendly
For your next vacation,why not consider visiting paris
It’s best to travel with…
2.本节课为本单元第一课时，主要是让学生理解和运用本课的重点单词和句型。本单元的话题学生都很熟悉，有很大的习兴趣。我将要求学生结合实际，用所学的句型谈论他们喜欢去的地方，并用形容词描述他们地点的特点及他们的感受。
1.七八年级我们已经学过Where did you go on vacation? What are you doing for vacation? Have you ever been to amusement park?来谈论假日的活动，对这种接近生活的话题有较大的兴趣，新的表达方式也不难，加上操练，应该很容易掌握。
2.本单元有个重难点即定语从句，在unit6的作业中体现出学生对关系代词的掌握还是不好，如果在本单元接着讲关系副词，容易混淆，需要更细致地教学。。
学习目标 1、知识目标：重点词汇--educational, fascinating, thrilling, peaceful, jungle等；
重点句型---Where would you like to visit?
---I'd like /love/ I hope to visit...
2、能力目标：使学生能够用目标语言谈论想参观的地方；能够用不同形容词描绘假期；使学生掌握听力技巧。
Maybe some words can not be read out correctly
Leading to read is useful to master the words.
1）Qs：where did you go this summer vacation?what do you think of the **?do you like it?”
2)Make Ss read the new words by themselves in 2 minutes;
Correct the wrong place;
Ss descdibe the place in the picture using the new adj.
Ss lead to read the words appeared just now 认真完成老师布置的预习作业，在上课前摆好课本、练习本，并安静。
And in 3),it is a little difficult to guess the vacations and change the simple sentences to Complex Sentence 1)1a, Q:what do you think of the vacations in 1a?
Read adj.together twice.
Guess where sam/gina would like to visit?
Let's listen,check where they would like to go and why?
Check the answers.
2)2a,Q:where would you like to visit this winter vacation?why?
Listen,some friends are talking about their plans, number them in the order,then check the answers.
3)2b,listen again,why do they decide not to visit these places? check
show pictures and guess my friends’vacation plan.(Garfield,Ba Jie,Backkom,dore emeng) 认真听课，积极进行课堂学习活动。并有自已独立的见解。
Practice the new sentence patterns Pairwork: show pictures on places in the worlds and work in paris,practice,then act it out 积极参加小组活动，爱动手、动口、动脑能力强，与同学合作愉快。
Read aloud Read Grammar focus Preview section A 3a 按时保质保量独立完成。
课后反思 本节课较为成功之处有以下几点：
1.以学生为中心，通过活动让学生进行口头表达；
2.创新，同时追求学以致用。所以关注细节，使教学步步推进，自然流畅；
3.用提问的方式引导学生循序渐进,顺利进入话题.
新目标九年级英语课件(篇11)
一、不同引导词引导的宾语从句
（一）、由从属连词that引导的宾语从句。
注：陈述句用that引导。 that只有语法作用，没有实在的意义，在口语和非正式文体中可以省略。例如：
·She says, “I am from Shuanggu ”。
She says that she is from Shuanggu .
2. She says, “She can’t sleep well ”。
She says that she can’t sleep well
e.g.
1. I hear (that) _______________________. （一小时后他会回来）
2. He said (that) ______________________. （他非常想念我们）
3. The teacher told us (that)_________________.（地球围着太阳转）
（二）、由从属连词whether, if 引导的宾语从句。If和whether在句中的意思是“是否”。例如：
·He wants to know, “Is Tan Dun a world
famous composer?” （改为宾语从句）
He wants to know ifwhether Tan Dun is a world-famouscomposer.
2.“HasTan built a bridge between the East and the West?” he asks. （改为宾语从句）
He asks ifwhether Tan has built a bridge between theEast and the West.
e.g.
1. I want to know ___________________.（他是否跟我们一起去公园）
2. Ask him _____________________. （他是否能来）
3. I don’t know ___________________________.（是否要下雨）
（注意：当句末为or not时，引导词只能用whether而不能用if.）
（三）、注意：以下情况只用whether，不用if。
I don’t know _____ he will come or not.
2.I don’t care of ______ heis taller than the other players.
3.He wondered ______ to remain there foranother week.
4. ______ this is true or not, I’m not sure.
小结：
1.whether引导的从句常可以与连词or或or not直接连用。
2. whether及其引导的成分可放于介词之后，作介词的宾语。
3. whether可以引导带to的不定式。
4. 当宾语从句提到句首时，只能用whether引导。
二、中考链接
1. The young man asked it's summer or winter.
A. either B. that C. if D. whether
2. We don't know they did it .
A. whether B. who C. what D. which
3.Does anybody know Tan Dun is famous for “WATER” or not .
A. if B. where C. whether D. that
5.if和when既能引导条件状语从句，又能引导宾语从句。因此，遇到它们就要认真分析一下。
1.I want to know if he _______ (come) tomorrow.
If he _______(come). Please tell me.
2.Can you tell me whenhe________ (appear) ?
Please call me when he _______ (appear).
三、由连接代词what, whom, whose, which, what及连接副词 when,where, how, why引导的宾语从句
例如：
n Do you know who (whom) they are waiting for?
n He asked whose handwriting was the best.
n Can you tell me where the No.3 bus stop is?
n I don’t know why the train is late.
eg:
1.He asked __________________________. (谁能回答这个问题）
2.Do you know_________________________. （他们在等谁）
3. Can you tell me .(他在哪儿）
4. Could you tell me ______________________ .（我该怎么去车站）
5. Would you tell me ______________ .（为什么火车迟到了）
二、时态归纳：
1、当主句的谓语动词是一般现在时或一般将来时，宾语从句的谓语动词可以用所需要的任何一种时态。eg
Jim_______ ( be ) a worker two years ago.
Jim ( be ) an English teacher now.
Jim ( cook ) dinner tomorrow .
Jim ( sing )a popular songnow.
Jim ( be ) to the Great Walltwice . J
2、当主句的谓语动词是一般过去时，宾语从句的谓语动词要用相应的过去时态，但当宾语从句叙述的内容为客观真理时，仍然用一般现在时。e.g.
He will go to Hong Kong.
2) He is sick.
3) He is reading a book .
4) He has finished his work.
1) He_________ to Hong Kong.
2) He_____ sick.
3) He ___________ a book .
4) He____________
Exercise：
将下面的句子连接成为含有宾语从句的复合句。
1)These flowers are from Guangdong. He said.
He said ____ these flowers _______ from Guangdong.
2)Light travels faster than sound. My teacher told me.
My teacher told me _____ light _______ faster thansound.
3)Are the children playing games? Tell me.
Tell me ______ the children ______ ______ games.
4)Have you finished your homework yet? Mr. Zhao asked MaChao
Mr. Zhao asked Ma Chao _______ _______ ______ _____ _____homework yet. 三、宾语从句的语序
宾语从句的语序应为陈述句的语序。例如：1. “I am having an English lesson.” He said to me .
He told me that he was having an English lesson.
2. “I will play basketball .” Spud said.
Spud said that he would play basketball
一随主，二随宾，三不变
n I think (that) you will like this school soon.
n Can you tell me how I can get to the zoo?
n Please tell me when we’ll have the meeting
九年英语课件收藏13篇
俗话说，不打无准备之仗。幼儿园教师在平时的学习工作中，都会提前准备很多资料。资料主要是指生活学习工作中需要的材料。有了资料才能更好的在接下来的工作轻装上阵！那么，你知道幼师资料的主要内容是什么吗？以下“九年英语课件收藏13篇”由小编为大家收集整理，请马上收藏本页，以方便再次阅读！
九年英语课件(篇1)
Unit 3 Could you please tell me where the restrooms are?
1．打扰了。请问去书店怎么走？
(1)Excuse me. Could you tell me to the bookshop?
(2)Excuse me. Could you tell me how the bookshop?
(3)Excuse me. Could you tell me how to the bookshop?
(4)Excuse me. Could you tell me the bookshop ?
(5)Excuse me. is the way to the bookshop, please?
(6)Excuse me. the bookshop, please?
(7)Excuse me. How can I get to the bookshop, please?
2、Where can you do the things below?
get some money get some magazines
get some information about the town buy a newspaper
buy some stamps get a pair of shoes
restroom /restru:m/ n. （美）洗手间；公共厕所 p.17
get some money get some magazines
get some information about the town buy a newspaper
buy some stamps get a pair of shoes
听磁带一次，完成任务，同桌交流，核对答案。
Girl: Excuse me, could you tell me where I can buy some ?
Boy: Yes. There’s a post office on Center Street.
Girl: Oh, could you tell me how to get to Center Street?
Boy: Sure. You see that bank there?
Boy: Just go the bank and then right. The post office is on the right, to the library.
Boy: Excuse me, do you know where I can get a dictionary?
Girl: Sure. There’s a on Main Street.
Boy: Oh, could you please tell me how to get ?
Girl: Yes. Go along Center Street and then turn left on Main Street. Then you will see the bookstore on the side of the street.
Boy: Thanks! Do you know when the bookstore today?
Girl: I think it closes at 7:00 p.m. today.
听读材料，模仿语音语调、句群停顿。
朗读材料，勾画短语。
go past the bank turn right.
on the right, next to the library.
Thanks a lot! Could you please tell me how to get there?
Go along Center Street turn left
on the other side of the street.
Do you know when the bookstore closes today
①．许多带复合宾语的句子，宾语从句经常移到句子后部，而用it做形式宾语。结构是：主语 + 动词 + it + 形容词/名词等宾语补足语 + 宾语从句
We think it wrong that he told a lie to everyone.
I thought it impossible that he could finish this job in just two hours.
②. 带有宾语从句的`复合句的疑问形式一般是对主句进行变化。
I know he will come to my party.
→ Do you know he will come to my party. ?
→ I don’t know he will come to my party.
Lucy tells me that he likes the English teacher.
→Does Lucy tell you that he likes the English teacher?
→Lucy doesn’t tell me that he likes the English teacher.
主句的谓语动词是think,believe,imagine,suppose,consider,espect,fancy,
guess等,并且主句的主语是第一人称而且为一般现在时,从句的否定词一般要转移到主句上来,其反义疑问句一般与宾语从句一致.
我认为他不会来我的舞会。 I don’t think he will come to my party.
我认为他不喜欢英语老师。I don’t think he likes the English teacher.
在think / believe / suppose / guess / imagine / expect等动词后跟宾语从句否定式时，应转移到主句上去，完成反意问句时，应与从句主、谓保持一致。（注： 否定前移的条件是，主句主语是第一人称）
eg． I don't think you are right,are you
I don't believe they have finished their work yet,have they？
I don’t suppose they will come, _______ ______ ? (改为反意疑问句)
→ I don’t suppose they will come, will they ？
再如：
She doesn’t suppose they will come, _______ ______ ? (改为反意疑问句)
She doesn’t suppose they will come, does she ?
对于含有宾语从句的复合句进行简化，即由复合句变成简单句，可以分为两种情况：
第一：如果主句的谓语动词是，ask,tell,hope,wish,decide,agree等，从句部分可以转化为动词不定式结构。例如：
I hope that I can receive your email(改为简单句) →
I hope to receive your email.
例：I don’t know what I should do next.
I con’t know what to do next.
He didn’t know where he would live.
He didn’t know where to live.
第二：有些以特殊疑问词引导的宾语从句，从句部分亦可以简化为动词不定式结构，即特殊疑问词+to do ,特别是当主句的谓语动词为know,ask,forget,remember,learn,tell,teach等。例如：
I don't know how I can get to the hospital.（改为简单句） →
I don't know how to get to the hospital.
这类题也可以反过来做：
例如：Lucy hasn't decided which trousers to buy.（改为复合句） →
Lucy hasn't decided which trousers I will can buy.
1、Excuse me. Can you tell me how ________ get to the cinema?
A. can I B. do I C. I can D. I do
2、Do you know _________?
A. where is the post office B. how can I get to the post office
C. which way can I choose D. how to get to the post office
3、Look! There are some boys _______ football on the playground.
A. are playing B. play C. playing D. played
4、Could you tell me how _______ (mend) the bike?
5、I don’t know what I shall do next. (改为简单句)
I don’t know ____________________ next.
6、I think if you want to buy a computer, you’d better __________ (取点钱).
______________ (集邮) is good for your growing.
Could you tell me _______________________(这儿是否有个邮局)?
I don’t know ______________________(从哪里买杂志？).
I _____________________ (买了一双鞋子) to Jim yesterday.
_____________________________(三楼有一家银行).
九年英语课件(篇2)
Master the grammar of this unit. ------直接引语和间接引语Direct Speech & Indirect Speech
直接引语和间接引语是人教版高中必修1第一单元的语法，也是学生升入高中后需要掌握的第一个完整、系统的语法项目，它与高中重要的语法项目之一------宾语从句有着紧密联系，因此学、学透这一语法对于高一新生来说有着至关重要的作。学生在初中接触过它，因此也是初、高中衔接的一个总要内容。
我们转述别人的话有两种方式：
1. 引用别人的原话，被引用的部分叫直接引语，直接引语放在引号内，不用连词连接；
2. 用自己的话转述别人的话，叫间接引语，不用引号，但通常用连词与主句连接。
这两种引语都是宾语从句。
例如：Mr. Black said, “I am busy.” --------( ) 引语
Mr. Black said that he was busy. -------( ) 引语
温馨提示：遇到直接引语变间接引语时，我们首先考虑是以下那种句式：陈述句，疑问句，祈使句，然后根据相应的规则来变，或套用相应的句型。
直接引语如果是陈述句，变间接引语时，谓语动词后常用连词that 引导（that在口语中常省略），主句的谓语动词可直接用引语中的said, 也可用told来代替。可以说sb. said that或 sb. said to sb. that,或sb. told sb. that，不可直接说sb. told that
比如：
He said, “I have been to the Great Wall.”
→ He said to us that he had been to the Great Wall.
→He said that he had been to the Great Wall.
→He told me that he had been to the Great Wall.
另外从句中的人称、时态、指示代词、时间状语、地点状语等也要做相应的变化。这方面汉语和英语有许多相似之处，因此在做直接引语和间接引语的转化练习时要注意句子的`意思。
He said, “I like it very much .” -------He said that he liked it very much.
He said to me, “I’ve left your book in my room.”------He told me that he had left my book in his room.
一般现在时 → 一般过去时 She said, “I need a pen.” → She said that she needed a pen.
现在进行时 → 过去进行时 He said, “I am expecting a call.” → He said that he was expecting a call.
Tom said, “Our team has won the game.” →Tom said that his team had won the game.
Mary said, “I took it home with me.” →Mary said that she had taken it home with her.
过去完成时→过去完成时 He said, “I had finished my work before supper.” → He said that he had finished his work before supper.
一般将来时→过去将来时 Paul said, “I will call again later.” →Paul said that he would call again later.
The geography teacher said, “The sun rises in the east and sets in the west.” →
The geography teacher told us that the sun rises in the east and sets in the west.
2. 主句谓语动词的时态是现在时态或将来时态，在引述时，时态不变。
She says, “I’ll never forget the days in the country.” →She says that she’ll never forget the days in the country.
He will say, “The boy was lazy.” → He will tell you that the boy was lazy.
3. 直接引语是一般过去时，并且和具体的过去时间连用，时态不变。
She said, “I was born in 1983.” → She said that she was born in 1983.
（学生自我检测： 你发现上述时态发生了变化了吗？试试你记住这些规定了吗？）
（学生自我检测：根据现有知识积累，你能填出下列直接引语变间接引语时词的变化吗？试试看！）
时间状语： 3 now → 4 ago → 5 four years ago →
6 today → 7 tomorrow → 8 yesterday →
9 this week → 10 last week → 11 next month →
12 the day after tomorrow →
13 the day before yesterday →
一般疑问句变为由if /whether引导的宾语从句，其他方面变化同陈述句的变化，
即句型：sb. asked (sb.) if/ whether +陈述句
特殊疑问句变为由特殊疑问引导的宾语从句，其他方面变化同陈述句的变化，
即句型：sb. asked (sb.) what/when/who +陈述句
选择疑问句 变成whether…or句型来表达，而不用if…or…，也不用either…or…
例如： He asked, “Do you speak English or French?” →He asked me whether I spoke English or French.
I asked, “Will you take bus or take train?” → I asked him whether he would take bus or take train.
He said, “Are you interested in English?” →He asked whether I was interested in English.
He asked us, “How many car factories have been built in your country?”
→He asked us how many car factories had been built in our country.
转述祈使句时，将祈使句的动词原型变为动词不定式，并在不定时to 前根据句子的意思加上tell, ask, order 等动词，形成3 种句型
（1） 表示邀请、请求某人做某事时用ask sb. to do sth.
(2) 表示叫、吩咐某人做某事时用tell sb. to do sth
(3) 表示命令某人做某事时用order sb. to do sth .
表示否定时，在不定式前加not，构成句型ask sb. not to do sth., tell sb. not to do sth, order sb. not to do sth
例如： The old man said, “Don’t smoke in the hall.” → The old man told us not to smoke in the hall.
The officer said, “Go away.” → The officer ordered us to go away.
She said to us, “Please have a seat,” → she asked us to have a seat.
注意： 1. 当祈使句的直接引语变间接引语时，因为祈使句表示请求、命令等语气，所以不存在时态的变化，但是人称、指示代词、时间、地点状语等还要做相应的变化。
2. 祈使句中的please 在间接引语中必须省去，用句型ask sb. to do sth.
拓展： 1. 如果直接引语是表示“建议”的祈使句或疑问句，通常变为suggested that sb. should do sth或suggested doing sth
例如：He said, “ Let’s go to the park.” → He suggested (our) going to the park.
→ He suggested that we should go to the park.
2. 直接引语是感叹句时，间接引语可以用what或 how引导，也可以用 that引导
She said, “What a lovely day it is !” → She said what a lovely day it was!
→ She said that it was a lovely day.
I. Change the Direct Speech into Indirect Speech (解题技巧：先判断句子类型，再套相应句型)
1. “Shut up. ”she said to him.
_____________________________________
2. “Speak louder, please,” he said to her.
________________________________________
3. “Can you speak louder?” he asked her.
___________________________________________
4. “Don’t wait for me,” he said to them.
_________________________________________
5. “Use your knife to cut the boots open,” the officer said to the guard.
___________________________________________
6. He said, “Light travels much faster than sound.”
___________________________________________
7. She said, “Did you see him last night?”
___________________________________________
8. “What do you call your diary?” Anne’s sister asked her.
___________________________________________
9. “When did you go to bed last night?” Father said to Lucy.
___________________________________________
10. He said, “These books are mine.”
___________________________________________
II. 单项填空 ABCD四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。
1. He asked ________for the computer.
A did I pay how much B I paid how much
C how much did I pay D how much I paid
2. “Have you seen the film?” he asked me. → He asked me__________.
A had I seen the film B have I seen the film
C if I have seen the film D whether I had seen the film
3. “ I am a teacher,” Jack said. → He said_____________.
A that I am a teacher B I was a teacher
C that he is a teacher D he was a teacher
4. “You have already got well, haven’t you?” she asked. → She asked___________.
A if I have already got well, hadn’t you B whether I had already got well
C have I already got well D had I already got well
5. He asked, “Are you a Party member or a League member?” → He asked me ____________.
A am I a Party member or a League member
B was I a Party member or a League member
C whether I was a Party member or a League member
D whether was I a Party member or a League member
6. He asked, “How are you getting along?” →He asked____________.
A how am I getting along B how are you getting along
C how I was getting along D how was I getting along
7. He asked me _______with me.
A what the matter is B what the matter was
C what’s the matter D what was the matter
8. The mother asked her daughter__________.
A what did she do the day before B where did she find her lost watch
C when she got up that morning D that if she had finished her homework
9. Mary said, “I went to China in .” →Mary said she _______to China in 1998.
A went B had gone C have gone D go
10. He said, “ Mother, the boy is very naughty.” → He ________very naughty.
A said his mother that the boy was B said to his mother that the boy is
C told his mother that the boy was D spoke to his mother that the boy was
11. Mr. Smith warned her daughter ________after drinking. (浙江高一检测)
A never to drive B to never drive C never driving D never drives
12. A famous website was making an online survey asking us ________the film Jaws.
A how do we like B how we liked C how did we like D how we like
13. The teacher asked us ________so much noise.
A don’t make B not make C not making D not to make
14. -----Please don’t stamp the grass.
------Pardon?
-------I ___________stamp the grass. (20山东高一检测)
A tell you don’t B tell you not to C told you didn’t D told you not to
15. As soon as he comes back, I’ll tell him when _______and see him.
A you will come B will you come C you come D do you come
I have learned a lot about the grammar----direct speech and indirect speech.
I know___________________________________________________
Key 2: 1一般过去时 2过去进行时 3过去完成时 4过去完成时 5过去完成时 6过去将来时
Key 3: 1 that 2 those 3 then 4 before / earlier 5 four years before / earlier 6 that day 7 the next /following day 8 the day before 9 that week 10 the week before 11 the next month 12 in 2 days’ time 13 2 days before / earlier 14 there 15 go 16 take
1. 祈使句 She told him to shut up. 2. 祈使句 He asked her to speak louder.
3. 一般疑问句 He asked her if she could speak louder.
4. 祈使句的否定句He told them not to wait for him.
5. 祈使句 The officer ordered the guard to use his knife to cut the boots open.
6. 陈述句 He said that light travels much faster than sound.
7. 一般疑问句 She asked (me) if /whether I had seen him the night before.
8. 特殊疑问句Anne’s sister asked her what she called her diary.
9. 特殊疑问句 Father asked Lucy when she went to bed the night before.
10. 陈述句 He said that those books were his.
Key 5 1----5 DDDBC 6----10 CDCAC 7 What’s the matter? 做宾语时语序不变
九年英语课件(篇3)
案例，这一新名词出现在教学中，给我们的教学工作带来一把解决问题的金钥匙。通过案例，我们不断反思，进而在教学过程中调整教与学，最终提高教学质量。
下面以高一英语S B I A Lesson 50 Abraham Lincoln为例，具体介绍该课在教学中的实际情况。
本课文Abraham Lincoln是一篇人物传记，我启发学生在课前收集有关林肯的资料。请学生来简述其生平：
祁超（高一3学生）：I know something abent Lincoln. He was the President of the USA.
师：Can you odd some information（指向另一学生--王宏元）
王宏元：he was the president of the USA fwm 1860 to 1864.
师：you did a good job, Thank you, and try your best to raise some quest'ons
林山枫、王玲琳举手，依次让她们提问。
林山树：What was Lincoln's greatest work?
Q1一颜曼：To build a free state for all the people.
Q2-张鑫：Because the slave owners hated him for sefting the slaves free.
顺理成章地转入下一个步骤：
围绕刚才的问题，让学生进行搜寻式阅读，培养学生捕捉关键句的技能。
（此时，关玲同学举手。问Slave和Slavery有什么区别？）
Read the text as quickly as possible to get a general idea of ea uh Paragraph:
（提出这个问题后，不少同学是紧锁眉头。显然，这种综合概括型题对学生偏难）
于是，我有意识地提示每一段：
Para5关键词：（我笑着对学生说：这段用得着提示吗？）学生齐答：No,It is vang simple.我趁热打铁，让学生逐一归纳。
易 通 Para2：Lincoln was a young man
（归纳完整，简明么？师问，并继续请学生归纳）余 鎏Para2 :Lincoln's youth.
王平：Para3 :the American civil war.
全班齐：Para5 :one of the greatest of all American Presidents.
按时间顺序，了解课文主要情节，获取有关信息：
Read the text carefully. First. Extract the time. and then wmplete it.
⑴In 1809_______ ⑵As a child _____
⑶In 1818_______ ⑷As a young man _____
1860：Lincoln became President of the USA.
1864：Lincoln became President again
疏通课文中阅读疑难和语言障碍让学生提出：
张 帆：When she saw that Abrahom liked reading, she did all she could to help him.
师：问得好，我正想分析此句：“she could”is an Attributive clause to modify the pronoun “all”Arcer the modal verb“could”,the verb“do” is omitted. So the complete sentence should be……,she did all (that) she could (do) to h elp him.fire fou clew?
多数同学点头，有几位不懂、摇头。
莫 勇（举手提问）：As a child he used to work hard and help his father on the small farm where they lived.（“这句话怎样理解？难道Where是状语从句？”）
师：“Where”introducer orn Auribufive claw to modify the noun“farm”,Here it means “on the farm” Do you understand?
（当场多数学生点头，为照顾差生，师再用汉语重复解释，直至学生理解）
为及时检查理解程度，细读之后组织学生两人一组（work in pairs）,根据课文内容，互相用wh- 特殊疑问形式提问及回答，每人不少于五个问题。
How did Limoln spend his Childhood?
Why did the American Civil War break out?
What happened after the war ended in 1864?
How did he become a lawfer?
Was he good at studying?
针对第五个问题的创造性，当场予以表扬，并让学生讨论。
通过各小组围绕贯穿主线的时间展开讨论，并造句、连成段落，让学生“纲举目张”的复述手法使学生表达起来“顺理成章”。
书面表达练习是检查课文整体教学的效果，它立足于说，又是说的提高，抓住学生对课文较熟悉，趁热打铁，布置改写或从第一人称（假如自己是林肯；林肯之父，奴隶；奴隶主）去练习写作。
九年英语课件(篇4)
一． 教学目的和要求（Teaching aims and demands）
1． 词汇 grateful tail lonely success make up one’s mind mostly pig education countryside treat before long regard regard…as… exactly keep experience painful rock as if at sea story two-story grab crash mobile phone at all least at least
rewarding wag vet heal injection earthquake
2． 日常交际用语 Do you like being a doctor for animals?
Vets helped heal horses,…
He started treating…
Is it easy to heal…?
It isn’t easy to give the baby an injection.
It is important to do what the doctor tells you .
It is a little painful to get an injection.
To help animals is helping people.
1． 检查家庭作业。
2． 复习可作为宠物的名字：dog, cat, snake, parrot, rabbit, fish. 问：Does anyone have a pet?让学生讨论他们拥有什么样的宠物动物。
教师问：Why do people have pets? What does the pet do for them? Where do people take their pets if they get sick?让学生两人一组套讨论这些问题。然后全班一起讨论这些问题。
学生用书第71页第1部分。口语录音带第57课，让学生合上书。问学生：What animal does the dad like best? 放录音，让学生寻找答案。全班核对答案：He doesn’t have a favourite animals.让学生打开书。再放一遍录音，让学生边听边重复。让学生通过上下文猜测生词：rewarding ,grateful, wag, tail, lonely等。如果学生猜不出来，可以允许他们查字典。
做练习册第57页练习1。全班核对答案。让学生两人一组练习朗读这个对话。让几组学生为全班表演这个对话。
练习册第57课练习2和练习3。两人一组做练习2。
完成联系册中的练习。
1． 检查家庭作业。
2． 让学生通过讨论宠物来复习词汇。
学生用书第72页第1部分。让学生分小组讨论这些读前的问题，然后全班一起讨论这两个问题。
学生用书第72页第2部分。口语录音带第58课。让学生看课文标题。问学生：What do you think this story is about ？学生两人一组讨论这个问题。然后叫几组学生说出他们的观点。然后再问：Who is the man who loved dogs?学生快速阅读课文寻找答案（James Herriot）。然后让学生再次快速阅读课文并划出不熟悉的词语。这些单词和短语应包括：Scotland, make up one’s mind, vet, mostly, heal, education, Yorkshire, countryside, treat, before long, regard, regard…as, exactly, keep, experience 等。你可以用简单的英语解释其中的一些词语，如：
make one’s mind = make a decision
vet = veterinarian which is a doctor for animals.
continue = to keep doing something and stopping.
做练习册第58课练习1。
再放一遍录音，让学生边听边重复。让学生注意语音语调。
练习册第58课练习2--4。独自做练习2。
两人一组做练习3造句子。
把练习册第58课练习3的句子写下来。
1． 检查家庭作业。
2． 复习第58课的故事，可用练习册第58课练习1中的问题作为指导。
教师说：I don’t like going to the doctor’s because I don’t like injections。出示一张打针的图片，说：When I have to get an injection, I make a face like this（痛苦的怪相）because it’s a little painful. However ,I let the doctor give me an injection because it’s necessary。当你说这些生词时把这些生词（injection, painful, necessary）写在黑板上。说：Now let’s interview each other to see how you feel about going to the doctor’s。问学生：What are some questions you can ask each other？帮助学生回答下列问题：Do you like going to the doctor’s? What do you have to get an injection? Would you like to be a doctor?等。让学生两人一组活动，相互采访。叫一组学生向全班汇报他们的采访结果。
学生用书第73页第2部分，和学生一起过一遍这些句子。保证他们知道做什么。让学生两人一组像本课第2步一样进行采访，在他们相互采访时完成这个对话。叫几组学生向全班汇报他们的采访结果。
参考答案：interesting, a good job, they are so pretty, it is very difficult
学生用书第73页第1部分。和学生一起过一遍这些句子。然后让学生两人一组看图并讨论。全班一起，让学生改变这些句子，并给出他们所想的更多的句子。答案如下：
1． It’s important to do what the doctor tells you.
2． It is a little painful to get an injection.
3． It is not easy to give the baby an injection.
4． It is necessary to take medicine on time.
5． It is not interesting to work in the hospital.
练习册第59课练习1--3。两人一组做练习1。课堂上口头做练习2。
做练习3时，先个人读一读，然后两人一组回答问题。
完成练习册中的练习。
1． 检查家庭作业。
2． 复习不定式，把下列句子写在黑板上：It is important to do what the doctor tells you. It’s a little painful to get an injection. It’s necessary to take medicine on time. It’s interesting to work in a hospital.让学生把不定式放在句首来改变这些句子。
学生用书第74页第1部分。听力训练录音带第60课。让学生合上书：告诉学生：There’s something wrong with Tom’s dog .The doctor gives him some pills.？（如有必要，解释pills的意思）.What colour are the pills?放录音，学生寻找答案（red, yellow和 white）。然后读练习册第60课练习1的表格。保证学生知道做什么。再放一、二遍录音，让学生寻找答案。学生两人一组讨论答案。最后全班一起核对答案。
听力原文：
Cody felt ill. His nose was warm and he just lay around. His owner, Joe, took him to the animal doctor.
The doctor said, “Listen carefully. I’m going to give you three different medicines. First, I’m going to give you these red pills. I want you to give one pill three times a day to Cody. Now , look at these yellow pills. I want you to give one to Cody every night before he goes to sleep. Now look at these white pills. Give him two every time his is warm, but NEVER give him more than four in a day. Do you understand?”
“ Yes, doctor.” Said Joe, “thank you very much.”
Joe took Cody home and did as the doctor told him. Soon Cody was running around as happily as ever before.
答案：
1. C 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. A 6 B.
学生用书第74页第2部分。口语录音机第60课。问学生：学生快速阅读课文并寻找答案：He grabbed the baby in his mouth. 然后让学生再认真地读一遍课文。让学生猜测下列词语：earthquake, rock, as if ,at sea, story（另一种拼写形式为storey）, two-story, grab, crash, mobile phone, least和 at least.
做练习册第60课练习2。让学生自己做这个练习，并与同伴检查答案，然后全班核对答案。
学生用书第75页第3部分。让学生两人一组自己编造谚语。让学生说明这些谚语在什么情景下使用。例如，有人犯了错误，他/她的朋友会告诉他/她：“To make a mistake is human.”建议性谚语如下：
To read every day is a door to knowledge.
To work hard is the key to happiness.
It is better to listen , than to speak and let everyone know you are a
fool.
To drive fast in the middle of town is to invite a policeman to your
car.
To help animals is the same as helping people.
学生用书第75页第4部分。首先让学生写一段关于他们父母的情况，在写作中至少要用上两处不定式。然后让他们向其同伴展示其作文。同伴为其改正错误。然后按同伴的修改意见修改作文。教师在教室内巡视，必要时提供帮助。作文样张如下：
My father is a teacher and my mother is a doctor. They both think that to work hard is the key to success. Since I was in primary school, they have always wanted me to do well in school. Even though they are both very busy, they always have time to help me with my homework. However, they also teach me to be resposible at home as well. Since I was 8 years old, I have always had jobs to do around the house. I have to keep my room clean and take out the rubbish every day. When the dog needs to go outside, it is my job to take her. I also have to walk her for at least 30 minutes a day. I’m glad my parents have taught me how to work hard. This will help me in the future.
过一遍本单元的复习要点15。必要时再给学生一些练习：可以复习前几课的对话。花点时间练习一下常用短语。复习本单元的词汇，处理学生提出的任何问题。
听写下列内容，按要求停顿。
Tom and his mother* are at the doctor ‘s.* Tom says * he has got a headache and a cough. He says * he feels very bad and tired .* But Tom has caught a bit of cold. * He thinks* that the boy will be fine* after the biggest football match of the year.
做练习册第60课练习3--6。练习3和练习5可以单独做。
练习4应首先全班一起做。然后让学生两人一组练习对话。如果时间允许，让几组学生为全班说一说他们的对话。
练习6可以两人一组做，也可以以小组的形式做。当他们完成写作之后，让他们读他们的故事。
复习本单元的内容。
把练习册的练习4的对话写在练习本里。
把练习本练习6里的故事写在练习本里。
九年英语课件(篇5)
一、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 复习一般过去时态被动语态的用法。
2) 能够用英语讲述自己所熟悉的某一发明的简单过程。
3) 能用就本单元所学习的寓言故事等语言材料，进行完型填空。并用英语介绍某一发明的简要过程。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
了解世界上一些对人类有着重大意义的发明的相关信息，开阔学生的眼界，养成勤于思考，善于发现的好习惯，培养学生的创造精神。
二、教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1)用英语介绍某一发明的简要过程。
2)掌握本单元所学的词汇、句型及语法知识，并能进行综合练习运用。
3)完成Self check部分的练习试题。
2. 教学难点：
用英语介绍某一发明的简要过程。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Revision
1.Reviewtheexpressions and sentences in Section B 1.
2. Checkthehomework.
Let Ssintroducethehistory of basketball.
Ⅱ. Lead in
1. AskSswhichinvention they like best.
Ssthinkabout their favorite inventions.
2. Let someSstalkabout their favorite inventions.
Ⅲ. Thinking
1. Ask Sswhatthingsthey don’tlike to do.
e.g. Problem: quicklytaking notes inclass.
2. Discussingroupand think of an invention that could help you.
e.g. Newinvention: a special pen
What it is usedfor： taking notes quickly in class
3. Ssdiscussingtheproblems and try to make their own notes.
4. Let someSsreadtheir notes to the class.
Ⅳ. Writing
Work on 3b:
1. Tell Ss towriteadescription of your new invention.
2. Thefollowingsentencestructure may help you.
常用句型：
① Ithink … is a very useful invention.
我认为……是一项很有用的发明。
② … was invented by…
……是由……(某人)发明的
③ … was invented in…
……是在……(某时间)发明的
④ Itwas used for…它被用来……
⑤… is made of………是由……(材料)制成的
Ⅴ. Self Check
Work onSelfCheck1:
1. Read thewordsinthe box and make sure they know the meaning of each word.
2. Readthepassageand try to fill in the blanks with the proper word.
3. Readthepassageagain. Check if the forms of the words are correct.
3. Let someSsreadtheir answers. Correct the mistakes.
Work on Self Check2
1. Tell Sstorewritethe sentences using the passive voice.
2. 方法指导：
复习一般过去时态的被动语态的句子结构。
复习将主动语态句子变为被动语态句子的过程。
3. Ssworkbythemselves and try to rewrite the sentences.
4. Checktheanswerswith the class.
Work on Self Check3
Findoutinformationabout an invention you would like to know more about andwritesentencesbelow.
Invention:__________
When:_____________
Who: _____________
Purpose:__________
Exercise:
If time isenough,dosome more exercises on big screen.
一、用所给单词的适当形式填空
1.Duringtheafternoon, there was a _______ (suddenly) heavy fall of snow.
2. Ithinkthetelephone _____________ (invent) before the car.
3.The__________(Canada) song Alouette(百灵鸟) is a fun songabout a bird.
4.They____________(invite) to take part in the May Day celebrations in Beijing.
5.The___________(popular) of private cars is changing the people’slifestyle.
6. Whenthebill____________ (bring) to him, he was such surprised.
7. Theygavetheirlives for their country and were honored as ________ (hero).
8.We___________(divide) into eight groups by our teacher last week.
Homework
1. 试着向你的朋友用英语讲述篮球的发展过程。
2. 用下列词汇造句子。
look upto,bymistake, daily activities, It is said, all of a sudden, fall into, at theOlympics.
九年英语课件(篇6)
一、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 学习掌握下列词汇：boss,Germany,surface, material, traffic, postman, cap, glove
2) 进行一步复习巩固学习Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。
3) 对询问物品的制作材料、生产地点、生产制作过程等语句进行归纳总结和探究学习。
4) 掌握被动语态的用法，并通过不同方式的练习，来熟练掌握被动语态。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
了解一些日常用品的制成材料，增加生活常识，养成良好的生活习惯;
二、教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 复习巩固Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。
2) 被动语态的用法。
2. 教学难点：
1) 探究学习询问物品的制作材料、生产地点、生产制作过程等句型。
2) 被动语态的用法。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Have adictationof the new words learned in the last class.
2. Review somemainphrases we learned in the last class. Check the homework.
Ⅱ. Grammar Focus.
1. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。
①你的衬衫是棉的吗?
____ yourshirts____ ____ cotton?
②是的，而且它们产于美国。
Yes. And theywere_____ ___ the US.
③飞机模型是由什么制成?
______ themodelplane ______ of ?
④它是由旧木头和玻璃制成。
It’smade of _____ ______ and ______
⑤茶产自中国哪里?
_______ ____tea___________ in China?
⑥茶产自很多不同的地区。
It’sproduced inmany ________ _______.
⑦茶是如何制成的?
_____ istea__________?
⑧茶树种植在山坡上。当茶叶长成后，它们被手工采摘下来，然后送去加工。
Tea plants____________ on the sides of the mountains. When the leaves are ready they___________ by hand and then ______ ______for _________.
⑨在杭州人们种植茶叶。
People_______________ in Hang Zhou.
Tea _____________(by people) in Hang Zhou.
Ⅲ. Summary
一、被动语态
当主语为动作的执行者时, 谓语的形式为主动语态;当主语为动作的承受者时, 谓语要用被动语态。
e.g. Manypeoplespeak English.
(主动语态, 句子的主语manypeople是动作speak的执行者)
English is spokenbymany people.
(被动语态, 句子的主语English是动作speak的承受者)
二、被动语态的构成
被动语态由“助动词be + 及物动词的过去分词”构成。与主动语态一样，被动语态也有时态、人称和数的变化, 其变化规则与be作为连系动词时完全一样。
肯定式 否定式 疑问式
一般
现在时 Iam asked …
He/She is asked …
We/You/They are
asked… I am not asked…
He/She is notasked…
We/You/They arenotasked … Am I asked …?
Is he/she asked …?
Are we/you/they
asked …?
IV. Practice
1. Work on 4a:
Tell Ss to readthesentences in 4a and try to fill in the blanks with the correct forms oftheverbs in brackets.
Learn somenewwords.
2. Work on 4b:
1) 让学生们阅读句子，理解句子的意思，为进行句子转换做好准备。
2) 将主动语态句变为被动语态句时，应先确定句子的谓语动词，并找出句子的宾语。然后，将句子的宾语变成被动句的主语，将谓语动词变成be+ V-ed形式。
3) 逐句进行分析推敲，确定括号中单词的恰当时态。
4) 最后，通读一遍句子，进行综合理解，看句子是否通顺，合理。
5) Check theanswerswith the Ss.
Learn somenewwords.
V. Talking
1. Askfiveclassmates about something they are wearing or have in their schoolbags.Thelist of words below may help you. (Learn some new words.)
2. Let one pairreadout the conversation in the box as a model.
3. 提示学生们运用左侧方框中的示例词。
4. 让学生们以小组为单位分别自主发挥，用英语谈论自己的物品的制作材料及生产地点。
Homework
将下列句子变成被动语态句
1. We usecomputersto search information.
2. The teacheroftenrepeats the story.
3. They don’tallowfishing here.
4. Bill looksafterhis cat carefully.
5. We don’toftenspeak English at home.
四年级英语上册课件九篇
古人云，工欲善其事，必先利其器。幼儿园教师在平时的学习工作中，都会提前准备很多资料。资料可以指生产、生活中必需的东西。如：生产资料；生活资料。有了资料的帮助会让我们在工作中更加如鱼得水！那么，你知道优秀的幼师资料是怎样的呢？于是，小编为你收集整理了四年级英语上册课件九篇。在此温馨提醒你在浏览器收藏本页。
四年级英语上册课件【篇1】
教材分析：
本课时是PEP小学英语六年级上册第三单元第四课时的内容，包括“Let’s learn” “Let’s play” “Let’s try”。课文以图文并茂的形式呈现了一般将来时的表达方式。在“Let’s play” 中，学生将在小组中运用所学句型来购买书籍，具有较强的交际性。
教学目标：
(一)知识能力目标
1.让学生理解并运用句子“What are you going to do? I’m ....When are you going? This afternoon. .”
2.使学生能听懂会说单词post card, dictionary,magazine,comic book,newspaper.
3.让学生掌握一般将来时的基本形式。
(二)情感态度目标
1.培养学生学习英语的良好习惯，上课要积极思考，踊跃发言.
2.培养学生小组合作学习的精神.
教学重点：
1.学会新单词 post card, dictionary, magazine, comic book, newspaper.
2.学会一般将来时的基本表达形式be going to 句型.
3.掌握购物的基本用语.
教学难点：
1.Dictionary中字母组合tion 的发音及magazine的重音.
2.Be going to 句型在句子中的运用.
教学方法：
“任务型”教学方法。
在本课的教学中，学生要完成购买书籍这样一个任务.这给学生创造了一个真实的语境去运用所学的句子进行交际.教师安排了4个活动：单词操练游戏、小组竞赛、小组活动和购物。
教学准备：
(一)教师准备：1.单词卡片。2.课件。3.各种书籍。
(二)学生准备：各种书籍.
学习策略：
在本节课上，学生可以通过多种方法来学习并记忆单词，如跟读、拼读、分音节、读看实物说单词、听单词拿实物等等.小组竞赛能激发学生的学习热情，鼓励学生表现自己.
教学过程：
一、复习和热身(Warm up)
1. 唱英语歌曲.
2.朗读“口语天天练”的句子.
3.日常对话.
二、呈现新课(Presentation)
1. 播放课件，呈现单词.学生跟读单词.
2.学习新单词.
(1)教师带读单词，学生跟读.
(2)拼读单词.
(3)学生熟读单词.
三、操练(Practice)
1.播放课件，学生拼写单词.
2.教师说单词，学生展示书籍.
3.教师展示书籍，学生说单词.
4.听录音，学习句子.
5.翻译句子.
6.分组操练句子.
7.听力练习：Let’s try.
四、小组活动(Activity)
1.播放课件，展示一组购物的动画和对话.
1.学生朗读对话.
3.小组中开展购物的的活动.
4.每个小组向全班展示.
五、课堂小节
1.小节本课所学内容.
2.表扬获胜小组及同
3.布置家庭作业.
4.布置预习新课.
板书设计：
Unit 4 What are you going to do?
What are you going todo ? I’m going to …。
When are you going ? This afternoon.
四年级英语上册课件【篇2】
各位评委老师好，今天我说课的内容是PEP教材四年级上册Unit 2My schoolbag中的第一课时，其包括：说教材，说目标，说教材重难点，说学生，说教学方法和教具以及说教学过程这六部分。
首先是，说教材
本节课是人教版小学英语PEP教材四年级上册Unit 2My schoolbag中的第一课时，内容包括P.A Let’s learn、P.C Let’s sing 两部分。本课的主要内容是学习关于书本的生词，以及会运用句型How many„do you have? I have„；会唱歌曲“Books and pencils”。学好本课为更好地学习本单元有关学习用品的话题奠定了基础，也为下面第四册Unit 1 Our school的学习做好了铺垫。
其次是，说目标
1、教学目标：依据新课标要求、本课的内容和学生现有的认知水平我确定以下教学目标：A知识目标：能够听、说、认、读本课六个生词English book，math book, Chinese book, story-book, notebook, schoolbag，会运用句型How many„do you have? I have„.并通过创设真实情境来运用及交流；学唱歌曲“Books and pencils”。B技能目标：能综合运用所学语言进行交流，将新学词汇运用于句型中，发展学生自主学习的能力。C情感目标：通过本课的学习使学生乐于听、说英语，乐于模仿，积极参与，培养学生的合作精神。
然后是说，教学重难点
a本课的重点是掌握单词,做到能听、说、认、读，并学会歌曲“Books and pencils”；b难点是将新学词汇运用于句型How many„do you have? I have„中，联系生活来运用及交流 下面是、说学生
1、四年级学生的年龄在十岁左右，他们活泼好动，表现欲、参与欲非常强烈，喜欢直观形象思维，对歌曲、游戏、模仿特别感兴趣。针对其年龄特点，课堂上要以表扬为主，注重培养学习英语的兴趣，把知识融合在符合他们兴趣的任务活动中。
接着是，说教法
英语的习得过程是新旧语言知识不断交替复现的过程。在本节课导入新课时，我充分利用新旧知识的联系温故知新。在操练单词时，利用新旧知识之间的相同点强化记忆。我还发挥英语歌曲、chant、游戏比赛以及TPR活动的激趣作用，让学生在愉快的气氛中，通过多种活动来操练重点单词和句型，突破教学重难点，并在教学过程中贯穿对学生的形成性评价。再者是，说过程
首先，我会问学生书包里都有什么，让学生积极主动地参与课堂学习。然后再拿出自己的书包，让学生猜测老师书包里有什么。在此过程中，再一一拿出六本书，边拿边说：I have 6 books: an English book, a Chinese book, a math book, a notebook and two story-books.接着出示单词卡片，老师一一教授本课生词：English book, math book, Chinese book, story-book, notebook, schoolbag。
接着，进行单词识记练习。多媒体屏幕上出现图片及单词，五秒钟后图片及单词消失，让学生凭记忆找出相对应的单词和图片，老师给找对的同学给小贴贴奖励或给该组记分。通过单词练习引出句型，引导学生用数字回答句型How many„do you have?，先个别操练，再分组，后全班练习。
然后是学唱歌曲“Books and pencils”，要求学生边听音乐边配以恰当的动作，边唱边做。（拓展练习这三个环节的设计，既让学生在活动中运用了所学的语言，又激发了学生学习的兴趣。最后一首歌把整堂课的气氛推向了高潮，使整堂课显得更加完整、有序。）最后布置学生的: Homework。
四年级英语上册课件【篇3】
Unit 6 Meet my family
第一课时
教学内容: A/Let’s learn Let’s play 教学目标: 1.能听、说、认读单词：family，parents，uncle，aunt，baby brother.2.能用英语简单介绍自己的家庭。
3.了解英语国家中家庭成员之间的称呼习俗。教学重点：
听说认读四会单词：family parents uncle aunt baby brother 教学难点：
理解parents uncle aunt baby brother等词的含义。教学准备：Family tree,本课时单词图片、课件。教学过程：
（一）热身／复习（Warm-up/Revision）
1、播放第二册学生用书Unit 2《Father and mother》的歌曲，让孩子边唱边表演。
2、教师在黑板上画出family tree，请孩子把father mother等贴在family tree相应的位置上，大声读一读。
3、教师出示课件（自己的家庭照片），用This is my„.She/He is.„进行介绍和描述。
（二）呈现新课（Presentation）
1、教师出示课件说：“Do you know this is my family? 教师把family这个单词贴在黑板上family tree的顶端。教师：I have a big family.How many people in my family? 学生回答。再问：How many people
in your family.鼓励孩子回答。This is my mother.This is my father.They are my parents.教师带读，学生练词。教师把parents贴在family tree上相应的位置。教师指自己的家庭成员说：“This is my uncle.This is my aunt。”并把两个单词贴在family tree上，说：“My uncle is my father’s or mother’s brother.My aunt is my father’s or my mother’s sister.”
2、播放课件：教师说：“This is Amy’s family.How many people in Amy’s family.Who are they? ”指课件中的单词认读。
3、教师分别出示Amy的家庭成员的照片，让孩子说说单词。让孩子扮演Amy。其他孩子表演Amy的家庭成员，孩子用“This is my„.” 介绍家庭成员。
（三）趣味操练（Practice）
1、Listen to a song 《Come and see my family 》
2、听一听，画一画
学生相互描述自己的家庭成员，同组同学根据描述画出来。看看描述的是否准确。
(四)扩展性活动（Add-activities）边看视频边学唱《Come and see my family 》 课后反思：
第二课时
教学内容：
A/Let’s talk Let’s count 教学目标：
1.能听懂、会说本课对话，并能在情景中进行运用。
2.能听、说、认读本课句型How many people are there in your family ?并能进行替换练习。3.了解英语国家的一些称谓方式。教学重点：
熟练掌握句型How many „are there„?的用法并能在实践中运用。教学难点：
理解Let’s talk中句子的含义，并能进行初步的运用。教学准备：Let’s learn图片，本课时课件 教学过程：
（一）热身／复习（Warm-up/Revision）
1、Sing the song(上节课扩展练习的中的歌曲)鼓励孩子边唱边演
2、单词抢答: 教师出示单词卡片，学生快速抢答
3、教师少拿一张卡片，让孩子猜猜。“How many cards in my hand?” 教师将卡片码成一沓，问：“How many cards in my hand?” 教师将卡片藏在身后，问：“How many cards in my hand?”
（二）呈现新课（Presentation）
1、教师出示上一课Let’s learn部分的课件。说：“This is Amy’s family.How many people are there in my family? Who are they?” 引导学生回答：“They are my father, my mother, my aunt ,„”
2、猜一猜：
教师分别请几名学生拿着自己的家庭照片提问：How many people are there in my family? Who are they?”大家试着猜一猜，用句子:”There are „people in the picture.They are my„.”来回答。
3、教师让学生猜一猜自己的照片：（把照片在孩子面前晃一下）问：How many people are there in my family?。学生说：“There are 6 people in your family.”教师说：“My family has 6 members.”
4、教师提问一些学生How many people are there in the picture?将答案写在黑板上，再请孩子用My family has „ members.的句型说一说。
学生在小组中进行问答练习。
5、教师指着人数较少的家庭说：“That’s only 3”学生跟读练习。
6、教师出示课件：
播放课件，让孩子边听边看。但学生在最后一组对话发生疑问时，教师说：“But, that’s only 6.”学生提出疑问时，教师指着小狗说：“Gee, and my little puppy.”puppy的含义。让孩子跟读课文。
7、Let’s count(本节课授课中，根据各小组回答问题和听讲情况，教师为每组设立一个苹果树，随时根据学生的表现贴苹果评价)教师和学生一起总结：问：“How many apples are there on the tree?”引导学生回答。
然后看书中的练习，孩子两人一小组作问答练习
（三）趣味操练（Practice）
1、Who are they? 教师快速出示Amy 的家庭成员照片，让孩子猜猜Who are they?
学生小组游戏。
2、猜一猜
一学生蒙上眼睛，几组学生分别clap hands、step feet、knock at the door, 让孩子猜一猜How many people are there? 运用句型： How many people are there in your family? Who are they? My family has „members 课后反思：
第三课时
教学内容：A/Let’s spell 教学目标：
1.通过观察，读词，复习几个元音字母在单词中的发音。
2.能正确判断所听到的单词中包含的元音字母的发音，并选择出正确的单词。
3.能正确规范的在四线三格中进行单词的书写。教学重点：
观察回忆元音字母在每个单词中的发音并总结出规律，本课几个单词的正确书写。教学难点：
观察元音字母在每个单词中的发音并总结出规律以及听单词进行选择。
教学准备：Let’s spell 动画课件
教学过程：
一）热身／复习（Warm-up/Revision）1． 让学生背诵字母表或唱字母歌。2． 复习五个元音字母的发音
（二）呈现新课（Presentation）1． 呈现单词，学生自读。
1）自己读词。2）小组读词。
3）观察每个词中不同颜色的字母是什么? 4）每个词的发音有什么规律？ 5）你能举出其他的例子吗？ 2．全班总结
1）学生发言 2）学生补充 3）教师强调 3．听力练习4．书写单词
1）教师范写 2）学生练习书写
（三）趣味操练（Practice）
游戏1：小组比赛书写
书写完之后小组评一评写的最规范最漂亮的是谁。
游戏2：看谁记得快
写完单词，进行单词的记忆，看哪个小组最先全都完成单词记忆。课后反思：
第四课时
教学内容：
B/Let’s talk Let’s play 教学目标：
1.能听、说、认读单词:doctor,nurse,driver,farmer和baseballplayer,并能介绍人物的职业。
2.能够听懂、会说句型What’s your father?My mother is a doctor.并能做替换练习。
3.会唱歌曲“Father and Mother” 教学重点：
词汇：doctor, nurse, driver, farmer, baseball player.句型：What’s your father? My father is a doctor.教学难点：
单词发音：baseball player My father is a doctor.中的“a” 的强调。教学准备：B Let’s learn 单词图片，本课时课件。教学过程：
（一）热身／复习（Warm-up/Revision）
1．做游戏：教师出示单词father, mother, brother, sister, grandfather, grandmother, 让学生认读。2．教学歌谣：可爱的home。Home是我可爱的家，墙上的picture美佳佳。
右边的woman是mother, 左边的man是father.可爱的friend是谁呀？
是我student 人人夸。
3．Sing a song《Come and see my family》
（二）呈现新课（Presentation）
1．Talk about the family: How many people are there in your family? Who are they? 2.模仿老师说句子，做连锁游戏：My mother is thin, she likes music.What about your mother/father/brother/sister„? 3.教师指着自己说：I’m a teacher.再指着一名学生说：He is a student.然后自问自答：What’s he? He is a student.教师问学生：What’s he? 引导他们说出：He is a student.4． 教师出示画有医生、护士和农民的图片，问学生：What’s he/she?引导他们说出：He/ She is a doctor/nurse/farmer.并教读这三个单词。
5．教师分别出示画有football player和driver的图片，启发学生通过提问What’s he/she?来得知答案。并学习football player, driver.6．看教学视频课件做对话练习。可参考的对话内容：
What’s your father? My father is a doctor.He’s tall.He likes sport.What’s your brother? He’s a football player.He’s strong.He likes sports.What’s your mother? My mother is a nurse.She’s thin.She likes music.What’s your father? My father is a driver.He’s fat.He likes playing computer games.What’s your grandpa? He’s a farmer.He likes painting.7．跟读课文。
8．看B/Let’s learn的课件，学习单词。
9．教师引导学生模仿从事各种职业的动作，教师发指令“Act like „” 10．两人一组操练Let’s play的内容，一人发指令，一人做动作。教师可适当告诉学生一些其他职业的词汇。
（三）趣味操练（Practice）
1．猜猜看。教师请一个学生上来表演人物，要求表演出人物的职业、外貌特征和兴趣爱好，让其他学生猜：He is a„/ He’s „/He likes„ 2．计时猜词竞赛
每个小组5－6人，小组之间进行计时猜词比赛。
比赛规则：教师准备好写有英文单词doctor, farmer, nurse, driver, teacher, student, baseball player的单词卡。每个小组依次到教室前面参加比赛。比赛前，小组内的第一名学生坐在椅子上，其他学生面对该名学生蹲在地上。教师站在这名学生的椅子后面，手拿单词卡放在他的头上。比赛计时3分钟，教师最好指派一名学生帮忙计时。比赛开始，教师出示第一张单词卡，蹲在地上的学生要看着这个单词用动作或语言来表述出此单词的含义。（如用语言表达则不能直接说出单词的中文意思，如果说出，视为犯规。）坐在椅子上的学生要根据组内同学的表述来说出英文单词。猜对计分并换人。第二名学生坐在椅子上，继续猜词。如有学生没猜对单词则不能换人，教师出示下一张单词卡让该学生继续猜，直到猜中单词时才可换人。按此规则小
组内的学生轮流坐到椅子上进行猜词，直到计时停止，比赛结束。最后看哪个小组猜对的词最多，得分最多，哪个小组就获胜。课后反思：
第五课时
教学内容：
B/Draw and say Read and write 教学目标：
1.能听、说、认读本课句型Is this your father?What’s your mother? He looks strong.并能在情景中运用。
2.能听懂、会说本课对话，并在实际情景中运用。3.理解会说Read and write 部分内容。教学重点：
理解句型Is this your„? What’s his/her job? 教学难点：
句型： Are they farmers?的运用 教学准备：Read and write 动画课件 教学过程：
（一）热身／复习（Warm-up/Revision）
1.让学生认读单词：baseball player, driver, doctor, farmer, nurse 2.Look and
write:
Act
like
a teacher/doctor/nurse/farmer/driver/baseball player.（二）呈现新课（Presentation）
1.教师提问：What’s your mother/father? 学生回答问题后，继续问其他学生。
2.教师指着一学生家庭照片上的人物问：Is this your mother/father? 启发学生回答：Yes, she /he is.No, she/he isn’t.3.教师指着一学生照片上的两位老人说：They look old.Are they your grandpa and grandma?引导学生回答：Yes, they are my grandpa and grandma.教师再继续问：Are they workers ?鼓励学生用Yes, they are.No, they aren’t.来回答。
4.教师分别出示Amy的叔叔，姨，爸爸、妈妈和爷爷、奶奶的图，问学生：Who are they? 5.让学生观看教学课件后回答问题。
出示uncle的图片问：Who’s this man? What’s his job? 出示aunt的图片问：Is this Amy’s aunt? What’s her job? 出示father的图片问：Is this Amy’s father? What’s his job? 出示mother的图片问：What’s her mother? What’s her job? 出示grandpa和grandma的图片问：Who are they? Are they farmers? 6.跟读课文。
（三）趣味操练（Practice）猜猜看
1.教师课前收集学生父母的照片，分别出示给全班学生看，让他们用句型Is this your„?来猜照片上是谁的父母。
2.教师每次找三至四个学生到前面来，小声告诉他们一种职业，让
他们用肢体语言表现出
来。其他学生通过他们的动作表情，用Are they„?来猜他们所表演的是哪种职业。课后反思：
第六课时
教学内容：
B/Let’s check Story time.教学目标：
1.通过对本单元的学习，能够正确完成Let’s check等的练习。2.学会唱英文歌曲。
3.通过自己阅读，小组交流，教师解疑等方式，能理解Story time.教学重点：
能够正确完成Let’s check等的练习。教学难点：
通过自己阅读，小组交流，教师解疑等方式，能理解Story time。教学准备：Let’s check 动画课件，Let’s sing 动画。教学过程：
（一）热身／复习（Warm-up/Revision）1． 指教室中的各个事物复习单词。
2． 游戏：教师念单词的前一个或两个字母，学生迅速从指出并读出单词。
（二）呈现新课（Presentation）
1． 小组合作，完成课本练习。1）自己做 2）组内交流
3）班内回报 2．Let’s check 1）做练习2）朗读句子 3． 学唱歌曲 Let’s sing 4．Story time 1）自己阅读 2）小组讨论交流 3）回答教师问题 4）跟读句子 5）尝试表演
（三）趣味操练（Practice）游戏1：看谁敲得快
学生准备好铅笔、尺子等可以用来敲打物品的东西，教师说单词学生要用最快的速度去敲击与所听相符的单词或图片，最快最准的获胜。
游戏2：猜字母
学生两人一组。一个学生在另一个学生的后背上用手书写字母，让他凭着感觉来猜出书写的是哪个字母。然后相互交换。课后反思：
四年级英语上册课件【篇4】
PEP小学英语四年级上册第六单元B部分第五课时教案
教学内容：PEP Unit 6 Part B Let's learn &Let’s play 教学目标：
1、能够听、说、读、写单词：doctor, nurse, farmer, driver,cook.2、能够根据单词中字母的发音尝试认读并记忆单词。
3、能用Come and meet my family.What’s your farher’s job? He / She is a doctor /..来介绍自己的一个亲人。
4、能做Let's play的动作。
5、教育学生热爱自己的家庭，热爱亲人。
6、对学生进行理想教育，教育学生要为自己的理想而努力学习。教学重点：
1、听、说、读、写单词：doctor, nurse, farmer, driver, cook.2、能够根据单词中字母的发音尝试认读并记忆单词。教学难点：
1、能够听、说、认读单词：job
2、能用Come and meet my family.He / She is a doctor /..来介绍自己的一个亲人。教学准备：
1、单词卡片。
2、简笔画。教学过程： 1.Preparation Greetings.T: Good morning / afternoon!Boys and girls.Ss: Good morning / afternoon!Mr / Miss...T: Nice to meet you.Ss: Nice to meet you, too.T：How are you ? Ss: Fine, thank you.And you?
T：I'm fine, too.(I'm very well!)thank you.Sit down, please.(用手示意学生坐下）Ss：Thank you!
（2）Review the old words.T：How many people are there in your family ? S: …….T: Who are they?（设计意图：引导学生复习家庭成员称呼，可以检查学生对单词的掌握程度.）S: …….2.Presentation T: What’s your farher’s job? S: He is a doctor /..教师教读单词doctor.（课件出示穿着医生服装图片）Look！What is his or her job?He or she is a doctor.教师教读单词doctor 2次。接着用单词卡片，进行班—组—个人的操练。T: Can you spell it? Ss: Yes!T: Show me your fingers.You spell,I write.（学生拼读，老师将这个单词写在黑板上）再指单词卡问： What is his or her job? Ss: She or he is a doctor.T: Who can act like a doctor? 让一名学生表演一下医生，边做动作边说doctor, doctor，act like a doctor.(2)教学farmer，出示farmer的单词卡。She or he is a farmer.Look carefully!F--/f/ , AR--/a/,连起来读什么？
Ss: /fa/.(由于我的电脑没有装音标输入系统，此处我找不到合适的音标，我用汉语拼音来代替，老师们在教的时候一定要把音给教准就可以了。下同，不再一一解释。）T: Good.Go on!M--/m/, ER--/ / ,拼在一起读什么？ Ss:/ mə /.T:两个音节连起来，试着读一读。Ss: farmer.T: Good.(点名让三四个学生读。读的时候要求学生升调、降调各读一遍，如果学生没有按升降调读，老师就领读一遍，再让他读，领读的目的就是提示他用升降调，最好是用手势告诉学生读升降调。）T: Can you spell it? Ss: Yes!T: Show me your fingers.You spell, I write.（学生拼读，老师将这个单词写在黑板上）再指单词卡问： What is his or her job? Ss: She or he is a farmer.T: Who can act like a farmer? 让一名学生表演一下农民，边做动作边说farmer, farmer，act like a farmer.用同样的方法教学driver,cook, nurse。出示driver,cook, nurse的图片，说: Look!What is his or her job?
2、单词游戏：老师用贴在黑板上的单词卡问，学生抢答。
(设计的意图：通过直观图片引出新词，再通过游戏巩固，避免枯燥的操练形式。)
3、Practice(1)T: Now, you do an action,anther guess the word.Do you understand? Ss: Yes.做动作，学生猜单词。这个活动速度可以快些，简单表示动作，学生直接一齐说出单词来。猜完之后老师接着说：Very good!Now let's do.Stand up, please.duction(1)当学生做完动作之后，教师说：Great!Sit down, please.用手敲击黑板说: Look at the blackboard and follow me.What's your father’s job?边领读边板书。在领读三四遍时板书完毕，注意书写不要太慢，但一定要认真。
领读并板书完之后，指板书用升降调有节奏的领读一遍。说：let's play.请打开你们的课本，看着第62页。老师只示范说第一句，由一个学生来做，老师问，其他学生说。
教师出示单词卡，再编一个chant。（不需要浪费时间，老师展示着图片，带着学生跟老师一起说即可。）
（2）T:OK!Now look at the blackboard.现在我们来分析如何记忆四线格中的单词。No1, farmer，/f/是哪个字母发的音？
Ss: F.T: /a:/ 呢? Ss: AR.T: /m/
Ss: M
T: /ə/
Ss: ER.T: /fa:mə/ Ss: F-A-R-M-E-R----farmer.T: Very good!Look at “doctor”./d/ 是哪个字母的音？
Ss: D T: /ao/
Ss: O T: /k/
Ss: C
T: /t/
Ss: T T:/ə/
Ss: ER T: /dэktə/
Ss: D-O-C-T-O-R----doctor.T: Very good!Look at “driver”./dr/ 是哪个字母的音？
Ss: DR.T: /ai/
Ss: I
T: /v/
Ss: V T:/ə/
Ss: ER T: /draivə/ Ss: D-R-I-V-E-R----driver T: Very good!Look at “nurse”./n/ 是哪个字母的音？ Ss: N.T: /ə:/
Ss: U R T: /s/
Ss: S T: 字母E在这里不发音，但是写的时候千万不要忘记。那么/nə:s/应该怎么拼读？ Ss: N-U-R-S-E----nurse..(3)OK!用刚才和老师一起分析单词的方法，在小组内逐个分析这四个单词，用字母的发音将单词写法记住。Let's begain。（学生在小组内分析单词，可以是小组长说音标，组员说字母或字母组合。然后同位之间再互相说。这个活动和过程可以稍长一点）(4)OK!Stop here!出示练习题，完成填空。让四名学生分别说答案。
学生在说的时候，一定是先说单词，再拼读一遍。如：No1, nurse.N--U-R-S-E。T: Who is all right? Very good!You are all clever!Progress.(1)T: boys and girls.Everybody has a good dream!每个人都有自己的理想，10年、20年之后，你理想的职业是什么呢？在英语中，我们可以用I'm going to be a...来表示。边说边把这句话贴在黑板上。领读两遍，带入具体单词再说两遍。
T: I'm going to be a teacher.What are you going to be? 如果你想做的职业我们还没学，你可以用汉语说，例如: I'm going to be a 宇航员。
提问四五个学生。提问时注意变换方式，What are you going to be ? What about you?交叉使用。当学生说完自己的理想后，老师要及时评价。可以说：I think , you will be a great teacher.Yes, you are a good doctor.Wow!you are a super 宇航员！等等，评价一定要针对学生的回答。
T: 是啊！你们每个人的理想都是美好的。但是理想和现实之间还有一定的距离，为了实现我们的理想，我们应该怎么办？ Ss：努力学习！
T: 对，只有努力学习，从现在开始打好基础，学好文化知识，才能成功地走向美好的明天！好，今天这节课就上到这里，听好你们的家庭作业： 1.读单词，看谁记得快。
2.把今天学会的单词教给爸爸妈妈。3.把你的家人用英语介绍给同伴。后记：
这是一节let’s learn与read and write的整合课，主要是通过语音的基本知识记忆单词并培养学生综合运用语言的能力。在我们进行直拼法单词教学实验的起始阶段，让学生在已经掌握的语音知识的基础上，学习并记忆单词。我们的做法是：从三年级开始教给学生每个字母的直拼音（当然，这与纯粹的音标教学不同，我们只是简单地渗透一点语音知识。）并将这些简单的语音知识运用于单词教学之中，让学生通过直拼法来掌握单词的听说读写四项基本技能。经过几年的实验，我们感觉这种方法比单纯的读、写、背要好的多。同时也为小学英语课时少、内容多找到了一条暂时的解决办法。
本课就是将原本两课时的内容整合到一节课中，并且让学生在学习单词的过程中复习了前面描写人物的句子，为学生的口语交际提供了示范并得到大量练习，同时也为高年级的写作打下了坚实的基础。
四年级英语上册课件【篇5】
我说课的内容是小学四年级英语上册Unit 3, Lesson 17。借助“任务型”教学通过听、说、玩、演、唱等一系列教学活动，充沛利用电化教学媒体，创设更多、更完善的情景，以生动、直观、形象、新颖的特征优化课堂教学，给同学提供更多的、更真实的语言实践机会，发挥同学的主动性、积极性和创新精神，让同学在融洽、和谐的氛围中达到对所学知识的意义建构，培养和发展同学的外语素质。
课文分析：
本课包括三局部，Just speak、Just read and Let’s play.第一局部的Just speak是一个情景对话，几个小同学在做猜一猜游戏，通过动手摸猜是什么水果或蔬菜，以旧引新。第二局部是两个三会单词eggplant and green pepper和一个四会单词tomato。第三局部Let’s play.是组织同学游戏活动。
教学目标：
1、知识目标：
（1）正确听、说、读、写单词“tomato” ，听、说、认读单词“eggplant，green pepper” 。
（2）能够在情境中理解、会说、会用“Let’s play a game. Are you sure? Is it green or red?” 。
2、能力目标：
（1）通过本课会话培养同学综合、灵活运用所学语言进行简单交流的能力。
（2）运用“Let’s play” 等活动培养同学的观察力、想象力和快速反应能力。
3、情感目标：
通过“奖励贴画”这一评价方式，鼓励同学课上积极发言，激发同学的学习兴趣。
情感态度与价值观：
1.培养同学乐于参与的精神。
2.注意饮食健康。
教学重难点：
1.本课三会四会单词和句型。
2.灵活运用所学语言。
教学模式：
任务型教学模式。
英语课程的学习，既是同学通过英语学习和实践活动，逐步掌握语言知识、语言技能、提高语言实际运用能力的过程；又是他们陶冶情操，拓宽视野，发展个性，形成有效的学习战略的过程。所以整个教学程序我采用了听、说、读、写、唱、玩、演、练等一系列教学活动，具体设计为：
一、热身/复习
1.课前先播放英语歌曲 Fruit song,让同学跟唱（利用课件出现歌词中相对应的水果）
2.进行Chant,渲染气氛(利用课件出现歌谣中相对应的`蔬菜)
二、情景导入
值日生组织做“Touch and guess” 游戏。通过“摸一摸，猜一猜”这个游戏，教师和同学进行对话，同学和同学进行对话，不只是复习了所学过的单词、句型，更主要的是游戏吸引了同学的注意力，增强了同学的参与意识。同时，教师用到了“Let’s play a game. Are you sure? Is it…or…?” ，为新授课的教学活动做好了铺垫。
三、学习新知
1.学习新单词：
继续做复习环节的游戏，引出“eggplant”和“green pepper”。寓单词教学于游戏之中，使枯燥无味的单词教学变得生动、自然，极大地调动了同学的各种感官参与学习活动，同学对新单词的印象更加深刻。
2.学习新句型：
在黑板上贴一张西红柿的图片，但只露出一角，让同学认为是苹果。然后问同学：“Guess what this is?” 同学也许回回答“It’s an apple.” ，师问：“Are you sure?” ，同学回回答：“Yes!” 。然后再图片进行类似练习.。环节的内容是本节课的教学重点之一。设计恰当的教学情景是学习和运用语言的关键，通过设悬念，促使同学去质疑；通过猜想游戏，激发同学运用语言的积极性；通过游戏中的形成性评价，使同学获得成绩感。
3.学习对话：
a.利用课件看一段短片，熟悉一下本课内容，并培养了同学的模仿能力。
b.利用课件出现本课图片，然后播放录音，句子随录音逐次出现。
c.同学利用课前准备好的实物，先分组练习，再到前面来扮演。
四、趣味操练
1、谜语
课件出现谜语内容，教师读完后，如同学猜中，点击出相应的水果或蔬菜，并奖励贴画。
2、Listen and do.
教师把课前准备的图片、实物发给同学，然后让同学听指令完成任务。
T: Pass me the… Show me the… Peel the … Eat the …
这样可以把本课知识与前几课书的知识有机结合，而且培养了同学的快速反应能力。
3、听力练习
通过课件出现出一种水果，然后播放录音，让同学判断对错，点击不同的答案得到不同的反馈，生动有趣，提高了同学的学习兴趣。
五、运用拓展
1、让同学自由结组编排一段新的对话。
2、课后同学之间继续做猜东西游戏。
四年级英语上册课件【篇6】
Unit4 At the farm
一、教材内容分析
本单元教学内容： 本单元通过农场里农作物以及各种动物的学习，从而展现了农场中缤纷多彩的生活。虽然与学生的实际生活相隔甚远，但其内容与学生的日常生活联系紧密。要求学生能用本单元的句型与单词进行有关农场里各种动物和各种农作物的表达。
二、教学目标：
1、能够区分农场上常见的蔬菜和牲畜，如： tomato, potato, green beans, carrot, horse, cow, sheep, hen
2、能够运用句型，如: ——Are these „？——Yes, they are./No, they aren’t.——What are these/those? ——They are „.——How many„ do you have？
3、能够根据图画，用英语说出一些农场常见的畜牲和蔬菜的名称。
三、教学重点：
1、单词:tomato, potato, green beans, carrot, horse, cow, sheep, hen及其复数形式的表达；
2、句型: ——Are these „？
——Yes, they are./No, they aren’t.——What are these/those? ——They are „.——How many„ do you have？
四、教学难点：
1、单词复数形式的表达 –s 和-es ；
2、字母组合 or 在单词中的发音。
三、教学用具：教学过程中所需要的实物、图片、录音、课件以及本单元的单词卡。
四、单元教学措施：
1、在教学过程中，对于学习困难的学生，可通过请学生复述老师的话或是复述同学的回答，让学生对老师和同学的发言引起注意，让学生意识到要仔细听别人的说话。
2、对于学习还不错，但是不愿或害怕发言的学生，课堂中教师主动请他们表达其意见，培养他们良好的学习英语的习惯。
3、充分运用英语名、英文歌、儿歌、绕口令、顺口溜、谜语等，给予小学生语言感染的机会。还可开展各种活动，鼓励学生交际。
五、单元教学反思：
第一课时
一、教学目标：
1、听、说、认读主要语言结构： What are these？Are these…? 并能根据实际情况进行简略回答。
2、能够准确朗读对话。
二、教学重点： 句型 What are these？ Are these…? 及其简略回答。
三、教学难点： these 的发音。
四、教具准备： 教学光盘、单词卡片。
五、教学过程：
1、Warming up and reviewing（1）教师和学生聊一聊每个人喜爱的蔬菜。（I like…Do you like…?）（2）教师说谜语，引导学生用 Are they…?来猜猜是什么蔬菜。
①They are red.They look like apples, but they aren’ t apples.What are they? ②They are tender and green.What are they? ③They are long and orange.Rabbits like eating them.What are they? ④They are round, pink and white.What are they? ⑤They are brown.French fries are made of them.What are they? 学生猜对了，教师回答 Yes，they are.并拿出相应的单词卡片请学生拼读；如果猜错了，教师回答No, they aren’ t.再请其他人猜, 直到猜对为止。
2、New step（1）教师请学生将装有蔬菜卡片的盒子盖好放在桌子上，然后走到同学们中间，随意指着几个盒子问： Are these…? 并引导学生根据实际用 Yes, they are./ No, they aren’ t.如果学生回答的是No, they aren’t.教师继续问：What are these？ 并引导学生用 They are …回答,适时板书句型框架。
（2）教师将自己带来的蔬菜实物分别放在几个盒子里，请几个学生过来边摸边问： Are these…?或 What are these？ 教师做出相应的回答。
（3）学生两人一组运用黑板上的句型互相猜猜对方盒内的蔬菜。（4）播发 Let’ s talk 的录音，学生听录音，后跟读模仿。（5）分小组做对话练习。
3、Consolidation
1、完成 Let' s play 部分，操练句型： What are these？ Are these…?
六、Homework
1、听读第P38的A Let’ s talk 部分的录音，读给同伴、朋友或家长听。
七、板书设计
八、教学反思
第二课时
一、教学目标：
1、能听、说、认读单词： tomato、green beans、potato、carrot 以及它们的复数形式。
2、通过说唱 B Let’s chant的歌谣巩固所学单词的复数形式。
二、教学重点： 单词： tomato、cucumber、potato、onion、carrot
三、教学难点： potato 和 tomato 的复数形式。
四、教具准备：
1、Let’ s learn B 部分的课件和录音。
2、相关的单词卡片。
3、所学蔬菜的实物。
4、Let’ s chant 的录音。
五、教学过程：
1、Warming up and reviewing（1）回顾上节课所交句型
（2）请学生欣赏 Let’ s chant 部分歌谣，教师要根据歌词适时举起相应的图片。
2、New step（1）教师手举一个西红柿，说：I like tomatoes.Do you like tomatoes?引导学生用 I like …或 I don’ t like…根据自己的实际情况表达。（2）教师再拿起一夹青豆，边说边完全呈现： Oh，it’s long and green.They are green beans.Do you like green beans? 让学生在回答中学习单词。
（3）出示土豆：Do you know it？ French fries are made of it.It’s a potato.Do you like potatoes? 学生根据用 I like …或 I don’ t like…根据自己的实际进行情况表达。
（4）请学生猜谜语：They are long and orange.Rabbits like eating them? What are they? 学习单词 carrot。
（5）教师将四种蔬菜分别放在教室的不同位置，然后说单词，请学生指出相应的实物。
3、Consolidation（1）教师请学生看着书听歌谣。
（2）让学生观察歌谣中 like 后的蔬菜单词和 Let’ s learn 中的单词有什么不同。启发学生说出 like 后的名词是以复数形式出现的。教师适当强调 tomato和 potato 的复数形式拼写的变化，carrot 的复数形式读音的变化。
六、Homework（1）读课文第 39 页并背诵 Let' s chant。（2）抄写新单词
七、板书设计
八、教学反思
第三课时
一、教学目标：
（1）让学生掌握含有字母组合 or 的单词发音和认读书写。（2）能听、说、读、写 horse, fork, homework, world map 四个词语。
二、教学重点： 能听、说、读、写 horse, fork, homework, world map 四个词语。
三、教学难点： 正确书写 horse, fork, homework, world map 四个词语。
四、教具准备： 教学光盘、单词卡片。
五、教学过程：
1、Warming up and reviewing（1）师生做日常口语练习: T: What are these? Ss :They are„T: Are these„? Ss: Yes, they are./No, they aren' t.（2）请学生表演 A 部分 Let’ s talk 的对话。
2、New step（1）播放 Read, listen and chant 的录音，让学生听歌谣。
（2）让学生跟着动画学说歌谣，同时可用手打节奏。
（3）播放 Read, listen and number 的录音, 让学生给单词排序。
（4）听音后反复读四个单词，在此基础上进行描红，达到书写格式正确的目的。
3、Consolidation 完成 Look, listen and write 部分的练习。
六、布置作业 ：听A Let’s spell 录音。
七、板书设计
八、教学反思
第四课时
一、教学目标：
（1）能听懂“What are those? Are they...? How many...?”，并能在情景运用。
（2）进一步巩固名词复数及读音规则。
（3）通过小组活动的形式培养学生的合作意识。
二、教学重点： 句型 What are those? Are they…？ How many…do you have？ 的理解与应用。
三、教学难点： 名词复数及其读音规则。
四、教具准备： 教学光盘、单词卡片。
五、教学过程：
1、Warming up and reviewing（1）欣赏本单元歌曲。
（2）提问： What can you hear in this song ？ 学生说出在歌中听到的动物的单词。
2、New step（1）教师拿起几支笔握在手中，不要露出笔尖。引导学生用 Are they 来猜猜是什么笔, 教师根据实际回答：Yes, they are./No, they aren’ t.（2）教师随手拿起几个笔袋： Are they pencil-boxes？学生回答： Yes, they are.或 No, they aren’ t.然后教师说： They are not pencil-boxes.They are pencil-cases.（3）组织学生分组利用自己的学习用品问答 A： Are they …? B： Yes, they are./No, they aren' t.（4）学生汇报练习情况，当学生对话后，教师要接着问： How many…do you have？ 引导学生答出相应的数量。
（5）打开 Let’ s talk 部分课件，学生观看1-2遍，在情景中理解对话的语句。
（6）教师就对话内容提问，检查学生的理解情况。（显示课件的插图）Are they sheep？ / goats？ / horses？ / donkeys？ /hens？ / cows？ How many …?
（7）跟录音朗读对话，注意模仿语音语调。
（8）小组分角色表演对话，教师巡视指导。
3、Consolidation 启发学生替换有关动物单词，创新对话。A： Are they …? B： Yes，they are./ No, they aren’ t.(They are …)A： How many … do you have? B： I have „
六、布置作业：向同伴、朋友或家长了解更多的关于农场上的动物的知识。
七、板书设计
八、教学反思
第五课时
一、教学目标：
（1）能够听、说、认读单词： sheep，hen，cow，horse。
（2）了解单词 sheep，hen，cow，horse 的复数形式。
二、教学重点：
（1）单词： sheep，hen，cow，horse 及其复数形式的表达。
（2）句型： What are they？ 和 Are they…?的问答。
三、教学难点： horse，sheep，goat 的复数形式表达。
四、教具准备： 教学光盘、单词卡片。
五、教学过程：
1、Warming up and reviewing（1）教师提问： I love animals very much.Do you love animals？ What animals do you know?
（2）学生说说自己知道的动物单词，一旦学生说出本课涉及到的单词，教师要及时拿出卡片，请这位同学来教大家读。
2、New step（1）教师说： Do you know a farm？ There are many animals at a farm.Let’ s go and have a look 教师出示 Let’ s learn（A）部分挂图，说： Look，it is a farm.So many animals.What can you see?（2）学生听懂后，教师可先试着让学生指图回答，能说出英文的学生给与表扬，也可让学生用中文回答。
（3）告诉学生我们要学习有关 farm 的内容，教读 farm。
（4）让学生观看课件 2 遍，教师只点击有关单词部分，学生跟读。（5）教师出示单词卡： sheep，hen，cow，horse，goat，lamb，让学生进行认读，教师可以将一些发音规律，帮助学生记忆单词。如： ee 在 sheep 中发[i： ]ow在 cow 中发[aU]，oa 在 goat 中发音等等，也可以启发学生说说怎样记住每个单词。（将卡片贴到黑板上）
（6）巩固单词：a、教师说单词，学生指图。b、教师指图，学生说单词。c、一个学生说任意一个单词，其他学生举起相应的图片。
3、Consolidation（1）请一位同学拿一张卡片（复数形式的图片）站在前面，不让全班看到正面是什么，其他人用 Are they…?来猜图片内容。猜错了，该同学要说：No，they aren’ t.猜对了，说：Yes, they are.2、学生两人一组做猜卡片的游戏。
六、布置作业 ：将 Let’ s learn 部分的图讲给家长听。
七、板书设计
八、教学反思
第六课时
一、教学目标：
（1）能让学生运用These/Those are...写句子。
（2）能听懂录音。
（3）会唱 Let’ s sing 的歌曲。
（4）能听懂 Story time 的内容。
二、教学重点： 掌握两个重点句子： “These/Those are...” 的正确书写。
三、教学难点： 在四线格中的正确书写 These/Those are...四、教具准备： 教学光盘、单词卡片。
五、教学过程：
1、Warming up and reviewing（1）日常口语交流。A: What are these/those? B: They are...A: Are these/those...? B: Yes, they are./No, they aren' t.（2）复习A、B 两部分的词语及对话。
2、New step（1）让学生练习运用 These/Those are...练习说句子。（2）在学生能说的基础上在让学生书写这样的句子。
3、Consolidation（1）读短文并打勾。
（2）听录音并打勾。（3）看一看并连线。
（4）唱 Let’ s sing 的歌曲。
（5）听录音看动画理解 Story time 的内容。
六、布置作业
（1）唱第 40 页的歌曲给家长听；（2）听录音并跟读 Story time。
七、板书设计
八、教学反思
四年级英语上册课件【篇7】
教学目标：1. 能在情景中运用Where is…? It’s in/on/under/near…询问和回答物品的位置。
2. 听懂、会说表建议的句子"Let's go and have a look."
3. 能听懂、会说并能恰当使用表示方位的词near。
教学分析：
重点：学习句子What’s in the classroom? Let’s go andsee!以及Where is it? 学习用near表示方位。
难点：What 和where 学生比较容易混淆。
教具：1.学生自带一件物品，最好是有关已学过的英文单词。
2. Amy, Mike 和Zhang Peng的面具。
3.一张画有教室的大幅图片。
4.教材相配套的教学课件。[Unit 1 A Let’s talk]
5.教材相配套的教学录音带。
教学过程：
(一)热身、复习(Warm-up/Revision)
1.复习已学句型：This is… I have… 教师手拿一个毛绒玩具，说：I have a dog , this is mynew dog.
2.让学生用事先准备好的实物模仿句子
3.当学生能够说出句子时，教师可提问：Where is it? 启发学生用学过的知识回答：It’s on/in/under/the …
4.在学生回答Where is it?时，教师可以适当的加入near 一词，It’s near the… 让学生在实际的情景中理解near 的含义并运用。
(二)呈现新课(Presentation)
1.教师介绍新人物并展示情景对话：出示面具This is Zhang Peng.She isSarah.They have a new classroom. Do you want to have a look? Ok, Let’s go andhave a look.(间接引出新句子) 教师出示一张教室图并把它贴到黑板上：This is a new classroom.提问：What’s in the classroom? (让学生先熟悉一下对话情景。)
2.让学生带着问题观看本部分的教学课件。[Unit 1 Let’s talk/A]
What’s in the classroom?
Where is Sarah’s picture?
3.让学生通过视听来回答教师所提出的问题，有困难的地方教师要做必要的帮助。
4.学生跟读并模仿Let’s talk部分的内容。(使用教材相配套的教学录音带)
5.师生利用教室中的文具物品进行问答。
教师出示一本新书，提问：What’s this?并将该物品放在课桌或椅子的不同位置，再提问：Where is it?学生根据实际所见逐一回答。
(三)Let’s paly
本活动可穿插在Let’s talk的教学过程中，如教学话轮Where is …? It’s…之后，教师利用挂图或课件出示本部分图片，说：I see something in thepicture. It’s begins with “c”。 What is it ?再引导学生提问：Where is it?找出正确答案。
然后，教师用简单指令语说：Now I see a “p”。再示范一次。教师也可将指令说成有节奏的句子，如：I spy.I spy. I see aletter “p”。请个别学生发指令，也可请学生两两组合进行练习。
(五)布置作业(Homework)
1. Listen tothe tape after class and try to imitate the accent.
2.Read the text smoothly.
四年级英语上册课件【篇8】
一、教材分析
前两课我们学习了my family. 学会了 my dad， my mum，my uncle， my aunt， my cousin，以及他们的names。这一课我们来了解一下我们家还有什么人。当然还有我的爷爷grandpa和奶奶grandma。现在我们有a big family,一大家子人了。
二、教学目的`及重难点分析：
1.会说会用这些句子：
Who are they?
They are kind.
I love them.
2.会说会用会写这些单词grandpa grandma love kind 。
3. 学会用 lovely kind friendly来描述某人怎么样。
4．了解they和them的用法区别，还可拓展到he-him, she-her,I-me的用法。
三、课前准备：
1．教师准备第18页挂图。
2．教师准备自家的全家福照片。
3．学生准备自家的全家福照片 。
4．教师准备grandpa grandma love kind lovely friendly 单词卡片。
四、教学过程
1.Warming up
展示第10页挂图 ，让学生看图，教师同学生进行对话复习上节课知识 ：
T: Look at this picture again. The girl is lovely. Who is the girl?
Ss:She is Linda Smith.
T:Who is the man?
Ss:He is Linda’s dad.
T:What’s his name?
Ss:His name is Bob Smith.
T:The lady is friendly.Who is she?
Ss:She is Linda’s mum. Her name is Ann Smith.
T:Is this lady Linda’s aunt?
Ss:Yes, she is.Her name is Nancy Smith.
T:This is her uncle,am I right?
Ss:Yes. His name is Sam Smith.
T:The boy is lovely.Who is he?
Ss:His name is Billy Smith.He is Linda’s cousin.
2. New Presentation
学习句型和词汇：
1）老师指着自己全家福上的家人，同学生采取谈话的方式介绍生词
Who is he ? Who are they?
He is my dad .
Who is she?
She is my mum.
Who are they?
They are my mum and dad. They are my parents. I love them.
四年级英语上册课件【篇9】
Unit Two My schoolbag
第三课时教学设计
教学重点
1 学习在四线三格中正确书写英文字母Jj, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn的大小写。
2 学习单词jigsaw puzzle, jacket, nurse, noodles。
3 学习拼写单词bag, pencil, pen。
教学难点
1 大写J, K, M, N的笔顺和小写j, k的书写格式。
2 单词jigsaw puzzle, kangaroo, lion的发音。
教具准备
1 图片jigsaw puzzle, jacket, key, kangaroo, lion, lock, nurse, noodles 2 写有大小写Jj, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn的字母卡
3 单词卡jeep, kite, lamp, monkey, man, mouse , nose
4 教材相配套的教学录音带
教学过程
一热身、复习Warm-up/Revision
1 听写。教师发给学生每人一张四线三格纸，教师随意读出字母Aa-Ii，学生要在纸上书写所听到的字母。听写完毕后学生要把写好字母的纸交给教师。
2教师出示字母卡让学生认读字母。
3复习单词。要求听说的单词让学生看图说单词。要求听、说、认读的单词让学生看单词卡读单词并说出中文含义。
二呈现新课Presentation
1 教学字母Jj和教学单词jigsaw puzzle, jacket。
教师出示单词卡jeep，让学生读出来并说出中文。教师问学生jeep的第一个字母是什么What letter is this? 学生回答：j。教师出示字母卡，让学生辨别字母Jj的大小写。教师出示图片，教读jigsaw puzzle和jacket。这两个单词的发音有些难度，对发音不准的学生教师要及时给与帮助。
教师：这三个词都是以字母j打头的单词。谁还记得怎样写大小写Jj？可让学生书空或在黑板上书写。对书写笔顺正确的学生给与表扬。教师在四线三格中教学字母大小写Jj。注意让学生区分大写J的手写体和书写体。可同时出示手写体和印刷体的单词卡让学生观察，让学生记住手写体的大写J没有横。要让学生仔细观察小写j 占了几个格几条线，提醒学生在书写这个字母时注意占格位置。
2 教学字母Kk。
教师出示图片袋鼠让学生说出单词kangaroo。教师从兜里拿出一把钥匙，问学生What’s this? 让学生说出单词key。教师出示单词卡kite, 让学生读出来并说出中文。教师问：谁知道这三个单词的第一个字母是什么？学生回答：k。教师出示字母卡，让学生辨别字母Kk的大小写。让学生说出大小写字母Kk的笔顺并书空。教师在四线三格中教学字母大小写Kk。教学中告诉学生大写K的右边是一笔写出的，上下两部分的交点在第二线。小写k的手写体与印刷体不同，让学生看着字母卡指出哪个是手写体，哪个是印刷体。让学生看着教师在黑板上写的小写k，告诉他们小写k的第二笔的起笔是从第二条线下边开始的。3 教学字母Ll。
教师出示图片狮子和锁，让学生说出单词lion和lock。教师出示单词卡lamp, 让学生读出来并说出中文。教师让学生说出这三个单词的第一个字母是Ll。教师出示字母卡，让学生辨别字母Ll的大小写。让学生说出大小写字母Ll的笔顺并书空。教师在四线三格中教学字母大小写Ll。教师出示写有手写体和印刷体的单词卡让学生辨认。告诉学生我们要学写手写体。4 教学字母Mm。
教师出示单词卡monkey, man, mouse,让学生读出来并说出中文。教师让学生看着单词说出它们的第一个字母是什么。学生回答m。教师出示字母卡,让学生辨认字母Mm的大小写。让学生说出大小写字母Mm的笔顺并书空。教师在四线三格中教学字母大小写Mm。教师要让学生观察出大写M下面都要到达第三线上。5 教学字母Nn和教学单词noodles, nurse。
教师出示单词卡nose,让学生读出来并说出中文。教师问学生nose的第一个字母是什么What letter is this? 学生回答:n。教师出示字母卡,让学生辨别字母Nn的大小写。教师出示图片,教读nurse, noodles。教师:这三个词都是以字母n打头的单词。谁还记得怎样写大小写Nn?让学生书空或在黑板上书写。对书写笔顺正确的学生给与表扬。教师在四线三格中教学字母大小写Nn。教师要提醒学生在书写时记住大写N的笔顺,第二笔不要写反。6 让学生在练习本上把所学字母Jj-Nn每个写一行。教师在教室中巡视,及时给学生进行辅导。
7 让学生听录音带跟读模仿。
8 学习拼写单词bag, pencil, pen。
教师分别拿实物书包、铅笔和钢笔问学生:What’s in English? 学生回答:bag, pencil, pen。教师问:Can you spell these words? 如有学生能够拼出单词,教师要给与表扬.然后出示单词卡。教师说:我们学习单词不仅要会说还要会写,今天我们就来学习几个单词的拼写看谁学得快。然后出示单词卡。让学生看单词卡拼读单词。教师让学生看单词回答:How many letters in this word? 学生回答后,让他们背着拼出单词。教师让学生在四线三格中默写字母b, a, g, p, e, n, c, i, l, 教师教学生在四线三格中书写单词。告诉学生首先要把每个字母书写正确.然后按照单词的拼写把字母写在一起,注意单词的每个字母间要有一点距离。让学生照板书抄字头,然后每个单词写一行。三趣味操练Practice
游戏1看谁拿得快
教师将字母Jj, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn的大小写字母打乱顺序分别贴在黑板上,然后请两组学生，每组5名出列。教师报一个字母,让每组的第一个学生快速地跑近黑板,将该字母的大写与小写分别取下。先拿到正确的大小写字母卡的小组为胜者,可获一分。计算最后结果,给与优胜小组奖励。
游戏2拼图说单词
教师把与本课单词有关的图片剪成几块,然后让学生分小组进行拼图比赛。拼出后让学生说出单词以及该单词的第一个字母。拼出图形加一分,说对单词加一分,说出字母加一分,最后看哪个小组得分最多,哪个小组就取得胜利。 四扩展性活动Add-activities 本项活动复本课时所学的单词及字母。
a.让学生两人一组分别选一张大写的J, K, L , M ,和N字母卡。b.将小写字母及本课时出现的词汇扣在桌面上。
c.每人一次翻开一张卡片,如果卡片上的单词第一个字母和手中的字母一致就赢得这张卡如果不一致放回原处。
d.继续翻卡片直到翻开所有的卡片。卡片多的学生获胜。e.让学生读出手中卡片的单词核对卡片。板书设计
Unit 1 My classroom
上课前打好的四线三格在课堂上随讲随写的字母Jj, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn
教学反思：
本课时重点教学字母Jj Kk Ll Mm Nn及相关的单词。其中有个别词较难。如：jigsaw puzzle kangaroo，只要求认读就好。还有一个重点，教学三个四会单词：bag pen pencil。本课让学生认读单词，找出单词中的相同字母，然后导入字母的教学。重点教学字母的笔顺及引导学生区分书写体和印刷体的不同。特别强调的是Gg和 Jj，Mm 和Nn 读音容易混淆，字母Ｋ，Ｍ，Ｎ的笔顺容易出错，在教学中应及时提醒学生。对于三个四会单词，本课时由于内容较简单，时间充裕，可以当场让学生记忆这三个单词，并进行抽查，了解学生的掌握情况。
人教版九年级英语课件12篇
本文主要是对“人教版九年级英语课件”进行了简要介绍，希望大家会喜欢。同时也希望这篇文章能够激发你学习和工作的热情。在开学前，老师们需要准备好教案和课件，每个人都要为自己的教案和课件做出计划。教案的质量高低是衡量教学水平的重要标志。
人教版九年级英语课件 篇1
教材分析：单元的教学内容都是围绕“家”这一学生喜闻乐见的主题展开的。本节课是第四单元的第一课时，教学内容是要学习有关房间的五个单词及进行简单的对家的介绍,本课时是本单元的重点，所以首先应让学生掌握各个房间的名称，再通过Let’s do等TPR活动进行巩固操练，本节课掌握的好坏程度，直接会影响到本单元后阶段有关“描述和询问东西在哪里”的对话和故事的掌握，因此在本单元教学中具有举足轻重的地位。
Theaching goal：
1.能够听、说、认读五个有关房间的单词 study, kitchen, bedroom, bathroom, living room。
2.能够用This is my home. You can see a living room…句型简单介绍房子。
3.能够听懂“Let’s do”的指令，并做出相应的动作。
4. 培养学生对家的热爱，提高学生的口语表达能力和交际能力。
Theaching key:
熟练认读有关房间的五个单词。
Theaching difficulty:单词bathroom, living room,的正确发音。
Theaching aid: Cards Tape recorder CAI
Theaching method: TPR Pairwork Groupwork
1. Good morning. Boys and girls. How are you? Nice to meet you.
2.Let’s sing《In the Classroom》,OK?
the CAI(door ,window) What’s this? This is my home, there are many room are there? Do you visit my home? Now, let’s study Unit4 《My Home》.
1.(Show the CAI). This is my home, you can see a bedroom, a living room, a study ,a kitchen and a bathroom.
2.Look ,what’s this?(客厅) There are five words on the blackboard, listen to me and guess, which word is “living room”?Teach“living room”. There is a TV in the living room. What can you do in the living room? Teach“watch TV”.Chant “living room,living room , watch TV.”
3.(Show the CAI). .Look ,what’s this?(书房) Listen to me and guess, which word is “study”?Teach“study”. There are many books in the study. What can you do in the study? Teach“read a book”.Chant “study,study, read a book”.
4.(Show the CAI). .Look ,what’s this?(厨房) Listen to me and guess, Which word is “kitchen”?Teach“kitchen”. What can you do in the study? Teach“have a snack”.Chant “kitchen ,kitchen,have a snack”.
5.(Show the CAI). .Look ,what’s this?(bathroom) Listen to me and guess, which word is “bathroom”?Teach“bathroom”. What can you do in the bathroom? Teach“take a shower”.Chant “bathroom ,bathroom ,take a shower”.
6.(Show the CAI). .Look ,what’s this?(bed ) What’s this? (room) What’s this? (bedroom)Teach“bedroom”. There is a bed in the bedroom. What can you do in the bedroom? Teach“have a sleep”.Chant “bedroom bedroom, have a sleep”.
7.Listen to the tape and read after the tape.
8.Let’s do.
Show the “Go to the ”, put the “living room, study , kitchen, bathroom, bedroom” on, then T act “Go to the living room, watch TV. Go to the study, read a book. Go to the kitchen,have a snack. Go to the bathroom ,take a shower. Go to the bedroom, have a sleep”.
Now let’s do, ok? Follow me.
Now, this group is team one, this group is team two. Let’s go,ok?
1.炸地雷: Let’s play a game, Ok? Who can read? Read together.
2.Close your eyes, what’s missing? Guess, then tell us.
3.Now,look at the screen, Guess, what’s this? (Show the CAI ) The student guess.
4.look, this is my home,you can see a bedroom, a living room, a study ,a kitchen and a bathroom.
Who can do like me ? Tell us what’s your room like?
The students look and say.
Homework:
1.Tell your home to your friend.2. Prepare the“Lets talk.”
五、Blackblard design:
① 能听、说、认读主要单词father(dad) mother(mom)man、woman .
② 能听懂、会说Who’s that woman/man? She/He’s my mother/father. 并能在情境中运用;能够介绍自己和询问他人的家庭成员。
② 教育学生热爱自己的家，热爱自己的家人。
教学重点：
能熟练使用句型Who’s that woman/man? She/He’s my mother/father. 教学生学会如何询问他人家庭成员。
教学难点：
如何正确使用人称代词he和she。
学生分析：
三年级学生才接触英语，对英语学习很感兴趣，充满好奇。他们活泼，喜欢开展英语活动，爱好游戏。
教学内容分析：
从学生的学习实践出发，注重学生的能力培养，让学生在具体的语言情境中学习Who’s that woman/man? She/He’s my mother/father.的句型，充分考虑到学生的年龄特征和认知规律。
教学媒体资源的选择与运用：
英语卡片，英语磁带和光盘，多媒体等。
课前准备：
1、教师准备主要人物的图片，教师、明星和家庭成员照片及教学课件。
2、学生准备家人和朋友的照片。
教学过程：
① Sing an English song : boys and girls .
A:Good morning . I’m… I’m from…
Where are you from ?
A:Nice to meet you . Hi ! This is…(名字). My new friend . ……
1、出示教师演示文稿，教师扮演这个新朋友，问一位学生：What’s your name ? 引导这个女生回答：My name’s Linda . 教师及时对其他学生说:She’s Linda . 并示意学生跟着重复这句话。
2、教师指着离自己稍远的女生问：“Who’s that girl ?”引导学生回答：She’s… 3、同样的方法，教师指着离自己稍远的男生问：Who’s that boy ?引导学生回答：He’s…
4、让学生指着班里的同学做回答：Who’s that girl ? She’s…Who’s that boy ? He’s…
5、教师拿出学生们所熟悉的教师的照片询问学生：Who’s that man ? Who’s that woman ?由此引出man和woman并引导学生回答：He’s Mr Black . She’s Miss White .
6、教师可向学生出示几张同学们喜欢的几张明星的图片，让学生做Who’s that man ? Who’s that woman ?的回答练习。
7、教师出示自己的家庭照片说：This is my family . Do you know who they are ?鼓励学生对照片中的人物提问，教师用She’s my mother . He’s my father .来回答，并重复单词mother , father。教师再次用mom、dad代替mother , father进行回答，然后带读它们。并向学生指出mom和dad更多地用于日常用语中。
8、让学生观看教学课件Let’s talk的内容。
9、跟读课文对话。
10、学生分角色进行表演。
请一名学生到讲台前，并蒙住他(她)的眼睛，再叫一名学生说几句英语，让全班学生问：Who’s that boy/girl?猜的人说：He’s…/She’s…猜对了，就蒙住说话学生的眼睛，继续游戏。
2、Who’s family is this ?
教师先收集几张学生的全家福，出示其中一张问：Who’s family is this ?引导该家庭的学生迅速作反应：This is my family .然后让其他的同学对照片中的人物发问，该生回答。
3、同桌两人一组，各自出示自己的家庭照片进行操练。
发给学生每人一张纸，让学生以最快的速度画出自己的父母或好朋友。以小组为单位，根据画的画进行句型练习：Who’s that boy/girl/woman/man ? He’s… She’s…
教师对学生的表现进行评价，看看哪个同学掌握得。
学生各自拿着全家福课后互问互答。
人教版九年级英语课件 篇2
1、导入：前一学期我们学习了选自《列子》的作品《两小儿辩日》，体悟了前人的智慧。这堂课，我们学习另一篇选自《列子》的作品--《愚公移山》，我们一起去感受一下一位“年且九十”的老者不惧困难、坚持不懈的精神。
高万仞（rèn） 出入之迂（yū）
亡（wú)以应 一厝(cuò)朔东
方七百里 汝心之固,固不可彻
年且九十 河曲智叟亡以应
其妻献疑；
遗男跳往助之；
①愚公的妻子与智叟面对愚公移山所说的话，情感上又什么不同？
妻子是关心，智叟则是嘲笑。
②遗男与智叟行为是一组鲜明的对比，这样写有什么好处？
①假设你是愚公，面对“惩山北之塞，出入之迂”的处境，你会怎么做？
②如果你是智叟，面对愚公移山，你会怎么做？
先鼓励愚公移山，等到他明白移山不具有可行性的时候，劝阻其搬家。因为：
一、尊重他的选择。
一个人，只要他愿意为他的选择承担责任，付出代价，无论这个选择怎么样，我们都没有任何理由不尊重这种选择。鼓励愚公移山，是尊重他的选择，尽管这种选择没有可行性。
二 、等待时机。
解决问题的时机不成熟。愚公当时坚信能够移走大山，并且兴致勃勃，去劝阻他的话，愚公很可能产生逆反心理，达不到劝阻的目的。鼓励他移山，可以用事实在无言中证明移山的不可行(人为地促进矛盾激化，推动事物发展、质变）。为劝阻其放弃移山作基础。这样做，既尊重了愚公的选择，又解决了具体问题，何乐而不为呢？
①我们应该学习愚公坚持不懈、不怕困难的精神，但不能学习愚公那样的行径。
②我们要学会尊重别人的选择。
人教版九年级英语课件 篇3
八年级英语教学设计
Unit2 I`ll help clean up the city parks
SectionA(3a-4)
一、教学目标
1、知识目标
（1）、掌握词汇及短语：spend…doing ,set up ,put…to good use ,not only…but also ,put off ,coach ,cheer up(2)、运用提供帮助的句型：You could help coach a football team
2、能力目标
（1）、运用目标语言，能比较流利地讲述自己能够做的事情。（2）、理解not only…but also 句型的用法。
3、情感目标
通过学习增强实际交际能力，培养学生为他人着想，热爱公益事业，乐于助人的优良品质。
二、教学重点
1、能够运用语言和语法知识进行阅读并理解文章意思。
2、学会如何提供帮助。
三、教学难点
理解句子Not only do I fell good about helping other people ,but I get to spend time doing what I love to do
四、教具：录音机
五、课堂教学设计
1、Duty report
2、Warm-up，学校打算开展志愿者活动，根据自己的兴趣爱好设计自己能够做的事情，激发学生的学习兴趣。
3、Lead-in,老师提问，T:There three special students in No.77 High School,do you want to know them?展示书上的图片，让学生提问，阅读理解短文，设法找出学生提出的问题的答案，当学生阅读时，教师列出重点词汇、句式，加深学生的印象，最后放录音，巩固课文内容。
4、教学操练3b、4 让学生小组讨论解决的方法，由两三组同学表演他们的对话，使他们能流利地用英语进行交流，引导学生关心和帮助他人。
5、Survey : 利用课文4的表格，询问同学的兴趣爱好以及根据自己的兴趣爱好可以做哪些帮助人们的事，培养学生在设计生活中运用本课所学内容，解决现实生活中问题的能力。
6、难点破解
（1）、not only…but also，用来连接两个并列的成分，also可以省略，连接并列主语时，谓语动词用就近原则，Not only the students but also the teacher is running.（2）、连接两个并列句，以not only开头的句子要倒装。（3）、否定式为neither …nor.7、小结
（1）、掌握本课生词及重点用法。（2）、能用所学内容给他人提供帮助。
8、布置作业
假设你们班打算去敬老院慰问，根据他们的爱好，为他们安排合适的事情。
教学反思
通过本节课的学习，学生能学习到一定的阅读策略，通过复述和写作环节学生的书面表达能力会有所提高。
人教版九年级英语课件 篇4
一、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 学习掌握下列词汇：France, no matter,local, brand, avoid, product,handbag,
mobile, everyday
2)阅读短文，能按要求找到相应的信息。
3)通过阅读提高学生们的阅读能力。
4) 了解“中国制造”已在世界各国广泛存在，并被世界人民所认可。
2. 情感态度价值观目标：
通过阅读短文，让学生们明白中国在近代的发展状况，认识到我们伟大的中国正在快速崛起，从以前依赖进口国外工业产品，到中国制造，中国已加入工业大国之列。
二、教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 掌握本部分出现的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。
2) 阅读短文，获得相关的信息。通过阅读练习，来提高阅读能力。
2. 教学难点：
1) 阅读短文，获得相关的信息的能力。
2) 理解并运用所学的词汇及表达方式。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Revision
1. Ask Sstorole-play the conversation in 2d.
2. Checkthehomework. Let some Ss tell read their sentences.
(1). This ringismade of silver.
(2). This kindofpaper is made from wood.
(3). What ispaintmade from?
(4). Hang Zhouisfamous for tea.
(5). As far asIknow, tea plants are grown on the sides of the mountains.
Ⅱ. Lead in
1. 展示一段伦敦奥运会礼品的视频，让学生了解中国制造已被世界人民所接受。
Then ask Sssomequestions:
T: As we know,thereare so many things made in China in England. What about in America andothercountries in the world? Now let’s read the passage of 3a.First, readquickly and find the answer to this question:
1) Where did KangJianvisit last year?
2) Were theremanythings made in China in the US?
3) What twothingsdid Kang Jian want to buy in the US?
4) Where weretheymade?
Ss read thearticlequickly and try to answer the questions:
2. 方法指导：带着问题，然后快速阅读短文，争取在较短的时间内，找到答案。
3. 学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，并快速回答这二个问题。
4. 最后，教师让部分学生回答答案，并校对答案。
III. Reading
Work on 3b:
1. 告诉学生们再次阅读短文内容，并完成3b中的问题。
2. 让学生们先读这五个问题，确信所有的学生都能理解这些问题的意思。
3. 然后仔细回读短文，在短文的相关信息处划线，并回答出问题。
3. 让学生们回答问题，校对答案。
Ⅳ. Careful Reading
Work on 3c
1. 告诉学生们本学习活动的要求：写出下列指示代词在短文所指代的事物。
2. 让学生们读3d中的内容，理解黑体指示代词所处的句子的意思，及其上下文的意思，开动自己大脑进行思维，确定它们所指的内容。
3. 如果不能确定，可以在小组内进行讨论。
4. Checktheanswers.
V. Post reading
Ask Ss to fillinthe blanks to complete the passage.
Kang Jian isa____________ student from Shanghai. Last year he went to visit his auntanduncle in San Francisco. He ______ it interesting that so many _________ inthelocal shops ______________ China. She wanted to buy a _________ for hiscousin,but even though most of the toys were _______ brands, they were madein________.
Read thesecondparagraph and fill in the blanks.
Toys are nottheonly things made in China. ______, there were many other things madeinChina--footballs, handbags, pet food, mobile phones. Even ______________aremade in China. He ________that Americans could_______ ______ ______productsmade in China.
He thinks it’sgreatthat China is so good at ________ these _________ _________. He wishesthatChina will also get better at making ________________ __________ in thefuture.And people can buy those products in ______ ______ of the world.
Ss try to fill intheblanks by themselves.
Check theanswerswith the Ss.
VI. Explanations
1. no matter 无论;不论
no matter意为“无论”与“what, who, which,where, how”等疑问词连用，引导让步状语从句。
e.g. No matterwhatyou say, I won’tbelieve you.
无论你说什么，我都不会相信你。
No matterwhen you are free, you can come herefor a cup of tea.
无论你什么时候有空，都可以来这里喝杯茶。
2.localadj. 当地的;本地的
e.g. Thelocalpeople are always friendly to tourists. 当地人对游客一向很热情。
3. avoidv. 避免;回避
avoid doing sth.避免做某事
avoid 后面常跟名词、代词或动名词作宾语，但不能跟不定式作宾语。
e.g. They triedtoavoid making Mrs. Li angry. 他们尽量避免让李老师生气。
Jack keptback his anger and avoided a fight.
杰克压住了怒火，避免了一场斗殴。
4. mobileadj. 可移动的;非固定的
mobile phone 手机
e.g. Wouldyouplease give us some details of your mobile phone?
你能给我们一些你的手机的细节吗?
5. everydayadj. 每天的;日常的
everyday是every和day构成的合成词。everyday是形容词, 仅用在名词前作定语，不能单独使用。
e.g. everyday life日常生活everydayactivities 日常活动
everyday与every day 辨析
every day是副词短语，意为“每天”，用作时间状语。
e.g. Theteacherasked us to read English books every day.
老师让我们每天都要读英语。
VII. Exercises
用括号中单词的适当形式填空
1. One who goesto______ (French) never fails to visit Paris.
2. How soonwouldyou like to have these ___________ (product) done?
3. In the crowd,Samlooked aside to avoid _________ (see) Jane and Mary.
4. Is this kindofbicycle______ (make) in Shanghai?
5. The______(locally) government listed him as an elderly person of no home.
Homework
1. Read thepassageseveral times after school.
2. Makesentenceswith these words:
no matter, bemade in, find it + adj. that…,even though, avoid doingsth., everyday things
人教版九年级英语课件 篇5
教学目标
1. 能力目标
能听、说、认读一些常见的动物单词cat，dog， monkey， duck， panda， rabbit， 并能用英语介绍这些小动物。
能听懂一些简单的指示语，并能按照指令模仿动物做出相应的动作。
2. 情感目标
培养学生爱护动物、保护动物的意识。
教学重难点
能听、说、认读一些常见的动物单词cat，dog， monkey， duck， panda， rabbit， 并能用英语介绍这些小动物。
能听懂一些简单的指示语，并能按照指令模仿动物做出相应的动作。
教学工具
ppt课件。
教学过程
1、Warm-up
（1）Free talk（1分钟）
a. ---- Good afternoon， Fangfang.
---- Good afternoon， Lanlan.
b. ---- Hello， Xiaoling. How are you？
---- Hi， I＇m fine， thank you. And you？
---- Very well， thank you.
（2）播放歌曲 Teddy Bear（要求学生边拍手边吟唱，营造一个欢乐活泼的英语气氛。）（1分钟）
（3）大小声游戏：rabbit， monkey， panda， zoo（1分钟）
教师轻声说一个单词，学生则需大声朗读。教师大声说，学生则轻声说。
（设计思路：活跃气氛，融洽师生情感，激发学生参与课堂活动的热情，使学生迅速进入英语学习的状态，并帮助学生巩固了上节课的单词。）
2.entation
教师课前在黑板上用彩色粉笔画一个动物园的图案。
（1）教学duck
a.教师画一个duck的简笔画，微笑着问学生：Hello， boys and girls. What＇s this？ Do you know？ 你们认识它吗？它的叫声是怎样的呢？
b.课件出现duck的画面及叫声
T： Look at my mouth. d-u-c-k， d-u-c-k （注意元音字母u的发音）然后把图片鸭子贴在黑板上。
（2）教学rabbit
T： Hello. I＇m an animal. I have two long ears， and I have a white body. And， I have two red eyes. Do you know？ What am I？ 从此谜语中引出单词 rabbit。
（设计思路：悬念式激情导入，激发学生的好奇心和兴趣，提高学生的听力水平。）
（3）教学panda
出示课件。
T： Look， it＇s a lovely animal. What＇s this？
引出熊猫单词panda，出示卡片，领读，进行音标渗透。然后说：Hello！ My name is Panda. Nice to meet you.（引导学生用所学问候语向熊猫打招呼。）
（设计思路：在熟知的语言中呈现单词，在真实的情境中交际，避免了枯燥无意义的机械重复，使课堂生动、鲜活、富有生活情趣。）
（4）老师模仿声音Woof！Woof！引出单词 dog. I＇m a dog. （做小狗的动作）Dog， dog， I＇m a dog， woof woof woof. 声音woof 引出单词dog。
接着出示cat的图片，引导学生说出Cat， cat， I＇m a cat， meow， meow， meow. 同法教学monkey.
（设计思路：在展示单词的同时，配上相应的动物动作。小学生的自控力不是很强，很难长时间保持注意力，所以动手，动脑，惟妙惟肖的滑稽动作，让学生体会到了英语学习的乐趣。）
（5）教师以故事形式出示课件，引导学生再次认读动物单词。
（设计意图：根据学生好表现的心理，一步一步循序渐进，层层深入，由易到难地从本课单词迁移到课外内容，既激发了学生的学习兴趣，又丰富了课堂内容。）
3.tice
（1）让学生拿出准备的玩具或头饰，扮演自己喜爱的动物。
（设计意图：小学生都非常喜爱小动物，每位学生最喜爱的动物也不同，针对这一生活实际，通过学生戴上自己最喜爱的头饰，介绍自己，提高了学单词的趣味性，使每位学生都跃跃欲“说”，即能寓教于乐。）
（2）教师播放Let＇s learn部分的课件，让学生跟着说，注意语音语调。
（3）教师示范表演，学生模仿。看谁表演得最逼真、最生动。
4. Consolidation
（1）教师让学生手拿自己的玩具，两至四人一组练习说 Look！I have a rabbit / dog ...其他同学说上节课学过的感叹词：Cool！ Super！ Great！ Wow！
（2）比一比，看谁模仿的动物叫声最逼真。
（3）赛一赛，看谁模仿的动物形体特征最生动。
5. Add-activities
（1）教师将一只大萝卜放在讲台台上，并戴上rabbit的头饰，并找若干名学生，师生同表演“拔萝卜”故事情节。
（2）Let＇sChant
Cat， cat， I＇m a cat， meow， meow， meow.
Dog， dog， I＇m a dog， woof， woof， woof.
Duck， duck， I＇m a duck， quack， quack， quack.
Monkey， monkey， I＇m a monkey， hei， hei， hei.
Rabbit， rabbit， I＇m a rabbit， jump， jump， jump.
Panda， panda， I＇m a panda， ha， ha， ha.
6. Homework
（1） 把你知道的动物单词说给家长听。
（2） 和同伴一起做模仿动物表演。
（3） 小组合作进行编对话或儿歌。
人教版九年级英语课件 篇6
新目标英语九年级第八单元短语动词小结
常见短语动词结构有下面几种：
1.动词+副词 如：give up 放弃 turn off 关掉 stay up 熬夜
这种结构有时相当于及物动词，如果其宾语是代词，就必须放在动词和副词之间，如果是名词，则既可插在动
词和副词之间，也可放在短语动词后。2.动词+介词 如：listen of 听 look at 看 belong to 属于这种结构相当于及物动词，后面跟宾语。
3.动词+副词+介词 如：come up with 提出，想出 run out of 用完，耗尽
4.动词+名词(介词)如：take part in参加 catch hold of 抓住 1.cheer(sb.)up使(某人)高兴、振作 如：cheer me up 使我高兴 clean up 打扫 clean-up n.打扫
2.homeless adj.无家可归的 a homeless boy 一个无家可归的男孩
home n.家
3.hand out 分发 hand out bananas give out 分发 give out sth to sb.分….给某人
give up doing 放弃… give up smoking 放弃吸烟
give away 赠送 捐赠 give away sth.to ….give away money to kids
give sb.sth.给某人某东西 give me money 给我钱
give sth.to sb.给某人某东西 give money to me 给我线 4.sick adj.生病的 作表语、定语 ill adj.生病的 作表语，不能作定语
5.volunteer to do v.志愿效劳、主动贡献 volunteer n.志愿者
e up with 提出 想出 === think up 想出
catch up with 赶上 追上
7.put off doing 推迟做某事
put on 穿上(指过程)put up 张贴
8.write down 写下 记下
9.call up 打电话
make a telephone call 打电话
10.set up 成立 建立
The new hospital was set up in 2000.这座医院是在2000年成立的。11.each 每个 各自的 强调第一个人或事物的个别情况 常与of 连用
every 每个 每一个的 一切的 则有“全体”的意思不能与of 连用
12.put …to use 把… 投入使用，利用
They put the new machine to use.他们把新机器投入使用
13.help sb.(to)do 帮助某人做某事 help him(to)study help sb.with sth.帮助某人做某事 help him with English help do 帮助做某事 help study 14.plan to do 计划做某事
plan + 从句
I plan to go to Beijing.=== I plan(that)I will go to Beijing.我计划去北京。15.spend … doing 花费…做… I spent a day visiting Beijing.我花了一天的时间去参观北京。
spend… on sth.花费…在… I spent 3 years on English.16.not only … but(also)… 不但… 而且… 用来连接两个并列的成分
(1)引导以 not only …but(also)… 开头的句子往往引起部分倒装。
因此 ⑴Not only do I feel good but(also)….是倒装句。
也是说得要把前面的句子中的助动词或者是情态动词放在主语的前面。如：
①Not only can I do it but(also)I can do best.我不仅能做到而且做得最好。
⑵Not only…but(also)… 接两主语时，谓语动词随后面的主语人称和
数的变化 也就是就近原则 如：
①Not only Lily but(also)you like cat.不仅莉莉而且你也喜欢猫。
②Not only you but(also)Lily likes cat.不仅你而且莉莉喜欢猫。常见的就近原则的结构有：
Neither… nor…即不…也不…(两者都不)Neither you nor I like him.我和你都不喜欢他。
Either… or… 不是…就是…(两者中的一个)Either Lily or you are a student.Not only …but(also)…
There be 17.join 参加(指参加团体、组织)如：join the Party 入党
take part in 参加(指参加活动)如： take part in sports meeting 参加运动会 18.①run out of == use up 用完 用尽
I have run out of money.== I have used up money.我已经用完了钱。
②run away 逃跑 The monkey has run away from the zoo.这只猴子已经从动物园里逃跑了。
③run to + 地方 跑到某地
19.take after(在外貌、性格等方面)与(父母等)相像
be similar to 与..相像
take after 相像
look after 照顾
take care of 照顾 out 算出 结局
The situation worked out quite well.情况的结局非常好 Have you worked out this math problem? 你已经算出这道数学问题了吗？ 21.hang out 闲荡 闲逛
I like to hang out at mall with my friends.我喜欢和我的朋友一起去购物中心闲荡。22.be able to do 能 会
be unable to do 不能 不会
23.thank you for doing 谢谢做某事 如： thank you for helping me 谢谢做帮助我
人教版九年级英语课件 篇7
1. mystery. 神秘的事；不可思议的事。
Her sudden disappearance was a complete mystery.他的突然失踪是一件不可思议的事。
It’s a mystery to me how she passed the exam.她是如何通过考试的对我来说是一个谜。
The mysterious disappearance of Jim upset everyone.吉姆的神秘失踪使大家心烦意乱。
2. sorry, I didn’t recognize you.对不起，我刚才没认出你来。
本句话中所用的时态是一般过去时。因为说话时让娜已经知道对方是谁，所以应该用与现在无关的时态，即过去时。
I never thought you were going to bring me a gift.我没想到你会给我带礼物。
The problem is so simple. I wonder why I didn’t think of that.我刚才怎么没想到呢。
Oh, it’s you, I’m sorry I didn’t know you were here.抱歉我不知道你在这。
*recognize (recognize): Vt. 没有进行式
Dogs recognize people by their smell.狗凭嗅觉认人
The town has changed so much you wouldn’t recognize it.这个城镇变化太大你会认不出它的
②承认recognise sb/sth (as sth) recognize sb/sth (to do)
Everyone recognize him to be a good man./as a good man.大家都承认他是个好人
He didn’t recognize that he was wrong.他不承认他错了
*recognise与know比较，前者指“认出，辨认”，为短暂性动词。而know指“知道，认识”， 为延续性动词。
I recognize my son’s voice on the phone. 从电话中我认出是我儿子的声音。
Tom pretended that he didn’t know the old man. 汤姆假装不认识那位老人。
3. “ Years of hard work, very little food ……a moment’s rest.”
多年的辛勤劳作，食不果腹，居住的房间很小，从来没有片刻的休息。
这段话由四个名词构成，表明了四个完整意思，这种结构叫单成分句。它本身就是一个相对完整的语言单位，无须补充其他句子成分。使用单成分句显得言简意赅，深刻感人。
“…only a small cold room to live in”是不定式作定语。不定式作定语通常放在它所修饰的名词后面，与该名词在逻辑上有动宾关系。
Could you find me a job to do?帮我找个工作做？
Do you have anything to say on this question?
如该动词是不及物动词，应该加上适当名词。
There is nothing to worry about.没什么好担心的。
Please give me a knife to cut with.
I need some paper to write on.我需要一些写字的纸。
4．surely. adv.
①surely作“无疑，当然”讲，表示说话人对句子主语将发生的事相当有把握。
He will surely succeed in passing the exam.他一定会成功通过考试的
Careless driving will surely cause accidents.粗心驾车一定会导致事故
②surely还可以用来表示“对所说的内容确信无疑，或者表示对某事的惊讶”
I surely met him somewhere in Beijing.我一定在北京的某个地方见过他
Surely you are not going to eat that! 你不至于吃那种东西吧？
③surely也可以作“当然，没问题”
-Can I use your car for a while?
-Surely.
explain sth (to sb). explain + (to sb) + that/wh-
The lawyer explained the new law (to us).
Can you explain what this word means? 你能解释一下这个词的意思吗？
He explained to the policeman that his driving licence was lost. 他向警察解释他的驾驶执照丢了。
6．jewelly. 珠宝，首饰 a jewelly box珠宝盒
This necklace is my most valuable piece of jewelly.这个项链是我最贵重的珠宝
She locked her jewels in the safe. 她把她的首饰锁在保险箱里了。
7. Can’t you just wear a flower instead? 你不能只戴朵花吗？
本句话是表示否定的疑问句。否定疑问句一般用在表示请求，发表个人看法或是表示惊讶的情况下。
Can’t you finish such an easy job in so long a time? （表示惊讶）
否定疑问句一般都是期待对方的肯定回答，或者不打算对方回答。回答的时候，肯定回答用yes，但要翻译成“不”，相反，则用no。
-Don’t you like your present?
-Yes, I do. 不，我喜欢。
-Isn’t he a writer?
-No, he isn’t. 对，他不是。
8. continue. vi(+with)& vt （使）继续；（使）延续
the fighting continued for a week.战斗持续了一个星期。
How long can they continue (with) this damaging strike?他们这种破坏性罢工能持续多久？
she continued to make progress in her lesson.她继续在学习中取得进步。
he continued writing his diaries until he died.他坚持写日记直到去世。
The brain needs a continuous supply of blood.大脑需要不断的供血
9. call on, call at, visit, drop in
call on sb 拜访某人 call at some place访问某地
I decide to call on mr smith and hope to ask him for some good advice.
I called at my friend’s office during my stay in shanghai.
visit既可做动词，宾语可以是人，又可以是物。也可做名词，和pay构成短语,
He was happy to have a chance to visit Canada.
He often pays a visit to the poor areas of his own country.
drop in “顺便拜访”，指未事先通知的非正式访问。是不及物动词短语，通常需要接介词on和at. drop in on sb drop in at some place
Please drop in when you’re free.
Tom often drops in on me.
On my way home, I dropped in at Li Hua’s house.
call forth 使产生…；唤起… call in请…；招请
call up打电话给…
10．Pierre and I did have a good time at the ball.……确实在舞会上玩的很开心。
在本句话中，did是助动词，用在肯定句中起强调作用。译为“确实。的确”。
I did see him on my way to school yesterday. 我在上学途中确实看到他了。
My father does enjoy traveling.我父亲的确喜欢旅游
They do come here every Saturday morning.他们确实每周六早晨来这里。
：由于助动词已经体现了句子中的时态和数，所以谓语动词应该用原形。
*have a good/pleasant/wonderful time (=enjoy onself) 过得愉快
*have a hard/bad time过得艰难；日子过得不好
人教版九年级英语课件 篇8
Teaching Important Points 【教学重点】
Key words & phrases：
international，find out，fly a kite
Key sentences：
1.The international kite festival is held in Weifang every year.
2.Some of the kites were made of silk or paper.
3.Some were painted with colorful drawings.
Key structure：
be+past participle verb+…
eg：What are kites made of?
Teaching Difficult Points 【教学难点】
★Talk about what kites are made of in the listening and speaking practice.
Teaching Aids 【教学工具】
A tape recorder，pictures of kites and used materials，CAI or multimedia courseware.
Teaching Steps 【教学过程】
★Step 1Leading in 【新课导入】
1.Greeting
2.Brainstorming
Show different things which kites can be made of/from.Help students to review and learn new words.
3.Ask students to think of anything a kite may look like.
★Step 2Cooperative inquiry 【合作探究】
1.Finish the task in 1a
①Think of different materials that can be used in making kites in English.
②Read aloud the words.
2.Finish the task in 1b
3.Finish the task in 1c
①Look at the five sentences with blanks in 1c.
②Play the recording for the second time.Students write L or Z in the blanks.
③Ask them to find the sentences having the same or similar meaning in the listening.
4.Finish the task in 1d
5.Finish the task in 1e
①Read the sample conversation in 1e.
②Write some key words on the board to help.Students work in pairs.Role-play.
③Act out their conversations to the class.
④For the poor students，the teacher can help them with the questions.And get them to answer.
★Step 3Homework
1.Role-play the conversation like that in 1e after class.
2.Write a short passage about Weifang kite festival.
3.Translate the following sentences into English.
(1)山东潍坊每年都举行国际风筝节。
________________________________________________________________________
(2)有些风筝是纸质的或丝绸的。
________________________________________________________________________
(3)他的脸被涂上一面小国旗。
________________________________________________________________________
Board Design板书设计
人教版九年级英语课件 篇9
一． 教学目的和要求（Teaching aims and demands）
1． 词汇 grateful tail lonely success make up one’s mind mostly pig education countryside treat before long regard regard…as… exactly keep experience painful rock as if at sea story two-story grab crash mobile phone at all least at least
rewarding wag vet heal injection earthquake
2． 日常交际用语 Do you like being a doctor for animals?
Vets helped heal horses,…
He started treating…
Is it easy to heal…?
It isn’t easy to give the baby an injection.
It is important to do what the doctor tells you .
It is a little painful to get an injection.
To help animals is helping people.
1． 检查家庭作业。
2． 复习可作为宠物的名字：dog, cat, snake, parrot, rabbit, fish. 问：Does anyone have a pet?让学生讨论他们拥有什么样的宠物动物。
教师问：Why do people have pets? What does the pet do for them? Where do people take their pets if they get sick?让学生两人一组套讨论这些问题。然后全班一起讨论这些问题。
学生用书第71页第1部分。口语录音带第57课，让学生合上书。问学生：What animal does the dad like best? 放录音，让学生寻找答案。全班核对答案：He doesn’t have a favourite animals.让学生打开书。再放一遍录音，让学生边听边重复。让学生通过上下文猜测生词：rewarding ,grateful, wag, tail, lonely等。如果学生猜不出来，可以允许他们查字典。
做练习册第57页练习1。全班核对答案。让学生两人一组练习朗读这个对话。让几组学生为全班表演这个对话。
练习册第57课练习2和练习3。两人一组做练习2。
完成联系册中的练习。
1． 检查家庭作业。
2． 让学生通过讨论宠物来复习词汇。
学生用书第72页第1部分。让学生分小组讨论这些读前的问题，然后全班一起讨论这两个问题。
学生用书第72页第2部分。口语录音带第58课。让学生看课文标题。问学生：What do you think this story is about ？学生两人一组讨论这个问题。然后叫几组学生说出他们的观点。然后再问：Who is the man who loved dogs?学生快速阅读课文寻找答案（James Herriot）。然后让学生再次快速阅读课文并划出不熟悉的词语。这些单词和短语应包括：Scotland, make up one’s mind, vet, mostly, heal, education, Yorkshire, countryside, treat, before long, regard, regard…as, exactly, keep, experience 等。你可以用简单的英语解释其中的一些词语，如：
make one’s mind = make a decision
vet = veterinarian which is a doctor for animals.
continue = to keep doing something and stopping.
做练习册第58课练习1。
再放一遍录音，让学生边听边重复。让学生注意语音语调。
练习册第58课练习2--4。独自做练习2。
两人一组做练习3造句子。
把练习册第58课练习3的句子写下来。
1． 检查家庭作业。
2． 复习第58课的故事，可用练习册第58课练习1中的问题作为指导。
教师说：I don’t like going to the doctor’s because I don’t like injections。出示一张打针的图片，说：When I have to get an injection, I make a face like this（痛苦的怪相）because it’s a little painful. However ,I let the doctor give me an injection because it’s necessary。当你说这些生词时把这些生词（injection, painful, necessary）写在黑板上。说：Now let’s interview each other to see how you feel about going to the doctor’s。问学生：What are some questions you can ask each other？帮助学生回答下列问题：Do you like going to the doctor’s? What do you have to get an injection? Would you like to be a doctor?等。让学生两人一组活动，相互采访。叫一组学生向全班汇报他们的采访结果。
学生用书第73页第2部分，和学生一起过一遍这些句子。保证他们知道做什么。让学生两人一组像本课第2步一样进行采访，在他们相互采访时完成这个对话。叫几组学生向全班汇报他们的采访结果。
参考答案：interesting, a good job, they are so pretty, it is very difficult
学生用书第73页第1部分。和学生一起过一遍这些句子。然后让学生两人一组看图并讨论。全班一起，让学生改变这些句子，并给出他们所想的更多的句子。答案如下：
1． It’s important to do what the doctor tells you.
2． It is a little painful to get an injection.
3． It is not easy to give the baby an injection.
4． It is necessary to take medicine on time.
5． It is not interesting to work in the hospital.
练习册第59课练习1--3。两人一组做练习1。课堂上口头做练习2。
做练习3时，先个人读一读，然后两人一组回答问题。
完成练习册中的练习。
1． 检查家庭作业。
2． 复习不定式，把下列句子写在黑板上：It is important to do what the doctor tells you. It’s a little painful to get an injection. It’s necessary to take medicine on time. It’s interesting to work in a hospital.让学生把不定式放在句首来改变这些句子。
学生用书第74页第1部分。听力训练录音带第60课。让学生合上书：告诉学生：There’s something wrong with Tom’s dog .The doctor gives him some pills.？（如有必要，解释pills的意思）.What colour are the pills?放录音，学生寻找答案（red, yellow和 white）。然后读练习册第60课练习1的表格。保证学生知道做什么。再放一、二遍录音，让学生寻找答案。学生两人一组讨论答案。最后全班一起核对答案。
听力原文：
Cody felt ill. His nose was warm and he just lay around. His owner, Joe, took him to the animal doctor.
The doctor said, “Listen carefully. I’m going to give you three different medicines. First, I’m going to give you these red pills. I want you to give one pill three times a day to Cody. Now , look at these yellow pills. I want you to give one to Cody every night before he goes to sleep. Now look at these white pills. Give him two every time his is warm, but NEVER give him more than four in a day. Do you understand?”
“ Yes, doctor.” Said Joe, “thank you very much.”
Joe took Cody home and did as the doctor told him. Soon Cody was running around as happily as ever before.
答案：
1. C 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. A 6 B.
学生用书第74页第2部分。口语录音机第60课。问学生：学生快速阅读课文并寻找答案：He grabbed the baby in his mouth. 然后让学生再认真地读一遍课文。让学生猜测下列词语：earthquake, rock, as if ,at sea, story（另一种拼写形式为storey）, two-story, grab, crash, mobile phone, least和 at least.
做练习册第60课练习2。让学生自己做这个练习，并与同伴检查答案，然后全班核对答案。
学生用书第75页第3部分。让学生两人一组自己编造谚语。让学生说明这些谚语在什么情景下使用。例如，有人犯了错误，他/她的朋友会告诉他/她：“To make a mistake is human.”建议性谚语如下：
To read every day is a door to knowledge.
To work hard is the key to happiness.
It is better to listen , than to speak and let everyone know you are a
fool.
To drive fast in the middle of town is to invite a policeman to your
car.
To help animals is the same as helping people.
学生用书第75页第4部分。首先让学生写一段关于他们父母的情况，在写作中至少要用上两处不定式。然后让他们向其同伴展示其作文。同伴为其改正错误。然后按同伴的修改意见修改作文。教师在教室内巡视，必要时提供帮助。作文样张如下：
My father is a teacher and my mother is a doctor. They both think that to work hard is the key to success. Since I was in primary school, they have always wanted me to do well in school. Even though they are both very busy, they always have time to help me with my homework. However, they also teach me to be resposible at home as well. Since I was 8 years old, I have always had jobs to do around the house. I have to keep my room clean and take out the rubbish every day. When the dog needs to go outside, it is my job to take her. I also have to walk her for at least 30 minutes a day. I’m glad my parents have taught me how to work hard. This will help me in the future.
过一遍本单元的复习要点15。必要时再给学生一些练习：可以复习前几课的对话。花点时间练习一下常用短语。复习本单元的词汇，处理学生提出的任何问题。
听写下列内容，按要求停顿。
Tom and his mother* are at the doctor ‘s.* Tom says * he has got a headache and a cough. He says * he feels very bad and tired .* But Tom has caught a bit of cold. * He thinks* that the boy will be fine* after the biggest football match of the year.
做练习册第60课练习3--6。练习3和练习5可以单独做。
练习4应首先全班一起做。然后让学生两人一组练习对话。如果时间允许，让几组学生为全班说一说他们的对话。
练习6可以两人一组做，也可以以小组的形式做。当他们完成写作之后，让他们读他们的故事。
复习本单元的内容。
把练习册的练习4的对话写在练习本里。
把练习本练习6里的故事写在练习本里。
人教版九年级英语课件 篇10
以《考试说明》为依据，以新课程标准为准绳，制订详细周密的复习计划，切实抓好初三英语复习工作。密切关注中考动态，联系学生实际，通过教材梳理，专项和综合训练，努力提高学生运用英语知识的能力和答题技巧，以适应新的中考形式和要求。
我校学生从初一入学时就能看出有很多学生都接处过英语，通过初中三年的学习有了一定的进步，也取得了一定的成绩，但是从试卷分析来看，我校九年级学生在阅读、写作和一些基础知识方面离中考和我们的要求还有一定的差距。
指导思想：通过不同题型的专项训练，熟悉各题型的命题特点，解题思路和方法夯实“常考点”，突破“失分点”，研讨“新考点”。
综合训练贯穿在初三英语教学的始终。该阶段重点培养学生应试能力，积累学生考试的经验。教师要细致分析各层次学生的知识和能力现状，对学生进行针对性的指导。教法上要帮助学生克服在解题中存在的主要问题，积累解题经验，以良好的心态确保该得到的分不丢失。要求教师根据各自班级常见的知识层面上的“失分点”，有针对性地制定 “个性化复习方案”，在梳理知识网络的过程中，突出易错、易混内容。薄弱环节，重点突破。教师分析近三年中考试卷，对中考趋势进行合理预测。
3 考前10天，再次细化复习迎考计划，精选精讲试题，帮助学生查漏补缺，指导学生复习迎考的方法，调整学生的生物钟，确保他们以最佳状态参加中考考试。
人教版九年级英语课件 篇11
二、教学目标：
1、掌握形容词以及比较级的使用。
2、能听得懂、会说、会读和会拼写tall ,light ,young ,old ,heavy。
3、掌握会话中出现的三会单词和词组twin ,minute ,centimeter, child ,cute, also, chat.
4、能听得懂、会说、会读和会写四会句型：Who taller than David?
Gao Shan is taller than David .
5、能听得懂、会说、会读日常交际用语. Whose bag is heavier ,yours or mine ? I'm as tall as you . SuYang is younger than Su Hai .
6、了解字母组合or在单词中的读音。
三、教学重、难点：
正确掌握B部分出现的四会单词light lighter , heavy heavier和句型Who is taller ,you and SuYang? Whose ruler is longer ,yours or mine?
2 、练习题的投影片。
3 、课前写好本课的课题。
2、让学生复述A部分第一段和会话。
3、学生小组内表演会话内容。
My pencil is longer than ___'s...
5、让学生看黑板，朗读、拼读刚才教师板书的四会单词。
6、学生拿出课前准备好听写本，听写本课四会单词。
D、学生一齐拍手唱歌谣两遍。
E、Practice and consolidation练习和巩固
六、布置作业：
1、朗读本课的会话，要求学生能够复述、背诵。
2 、学会唱歌曲。
人教版九年级英语课件 篇12
主题：我的假期计划
暑假即将来临，我的假期计划已经整整一个月被我规划着。在我看来，假期是一段宝贵的时间，也是让我充电一下的机会。因此，我的假期计划充实而有意义。
首先，我打算将大部分时间用于学习和阅读。这个假期，我要完成初中学习的基础知识，为高中的学习打下坚实的基础。此外，读书是我一直以来非常喜欢的活动，假期里我计划要看一些精选书籍，用阅读来丰富自己的知识储备和生活阅历。
其次，我也希望假期中放松一下身心，拓宽视野。我计划去旅游，给自己带来新的视觉和感受。旅游可以使我体验到不同地区的文化、历史和美食，也可以让我接触到不同的人和事，为我未来的学习和生活奠定更加丰富多彩的基础。
另外，我也希望能够积极参与一些志愿者活动。照顾老人和孩子，帮助清洁环境等，这些都是令人愉悦的事情。以我微薄之力去为社会贡献一点点力量，也是共建美好社会的一种方式。
最后，我希望在假期的时光里，能够也多和家人和好友相处，分享每一刻的快乐和收获，增进彼此之间的感情和了解。
这个假期，我有多项计划，似乎时间有些紧迫。但是我相信，只要按照计划前进，即使路途漫漫，最终一切都会被我充实而未来充满希望。
新目标九年级英语课件锦集
真的非常推荐这篇关于“新目标九年级英语课件”的高质量文章，绝对值得一读。每位老师在上课之前都会准备自己的教案和课件，因此他们会精心设计每份教案课件的重点和难点。制作科学规范的教案是促进学生学习的有效方法。希望您能够留意并认真阅读该文章！
新目标九年级英语课件【篇1】
新目标九年级英语教案示例第十四单元第三课时教学设计作者：思全英语辅导第三课时教学设计
1.能进一步地扩展所学的内容，能用目标语言谈论自己喜爱的朋友和乐队。
2.能听懂2a和2b的听力内容，并完成相应的练习。
复习旧课(Revision)：
老师一个一个地问学生这一个星期来，已经做了哪些事，还有哪些事没做，以后应该怎样做。T：What have you done?Have you made astudy plan yet?What are you going to do?.学生运用目表语言来回答老师的问题。然后，学生可以反过来问老师这一个星期里已经做了和还没做的事情。
(通过学生和老师相互提问，不仅复习了上节课所学的知识，而且，拉近了师生间的距离，融洽了师生间的关系，激发了学生学习的积极性。)
引出新课(Presentation)：
接着上个环节，老师可以这样回答学生提出的问题，T：I have already cleaned up my room.I have already taken my daughter to the park.I have already bought some books.I have already bought my favorite band'CD.Do you want to know what is my favorite band?通过最后一句话来引出本课的话题--band。
然后，老师用英语介绍自己最喜欢的乐队，引出听力内容中的难的单词和句子，为听懂听力内容做好准备。My favorite band is YuQuan.There are two members in this band.They have been together for about three years.They used to play stuff by other bands,but now they only play their own songs.They have written many original songs.Some of their songs are very popular.They have been on TV for many times.Of course,they have won some awards.But they haven't made amusic video yet.I like them very much.
然后，问学生，How about your favorite band?要求学生按照Section B的第一部分的要求，两人一组，回答方框里的四个问题，并把答案填在横线上。最后，老师抽查几位学生的答案。
操练(Practice)：
2a.(1)老师读并讲解指示语，确信学生明白它的意思。然后告诉学生，You are going to hear awoman interviewing amember of aband.(2)要求学生谈论图画中的内容。(3)学生读左边的问题，确信学生明白每个问题的意思。强调过去分词done和been的原形。(4)放录音，要求学生根据录音内容回答左边的问题，并把答案写在横线上。5)核对答案。必要时进行解释。
2b.(1)学生读方框中的词组，确信学生明白每个词组的意思。强调这些过去分词的原形。(2)放录音，要求学生根据录音内容，听出乐队已经做过的事情。(3)核对答案。必要时进行解释。(4)要求学生跟着录音，重复录音内容，明白每句话的意思。
2c.要求学生根据2b中提供的词组，以及听力里的内容，模仿右边的.对话，围绕着你最喜欢的乐队，两人一组进行操练。在学生进行操练的同时，老师巡视课室，检查学生的进展，必要时提供帮助。最后，抽查几组学生的对话，必要时及时给予适当的鼓励。
3a.阅读训练。
(1)引入：老师说，Just now,you talked about your favorite band.Now we are going to talk another band whose name is New Ocean Waves.Look at the picture and talk about the band.What kind music do they play?Is their music very popular?
(2)快速阅读课文，找出一个问题的答案。Are they kind people?Why?
(3)精读课文，按照指示语的要求，圈出乐队已经做过的事情，用横线划出他们还没有做的事情。
(4)老师讲解课文中的难点，并划出文中的重要词组和句子。
全班齐读课文。
巩固和拓展(Consolidation and Extension)：
设计一个任务。要求学生运用本单元的目标语言，来谈论自己的偶像，近段时间来，已经做了和还没做的事情，并做简要的评论。
作业布置(homework)：
1.完成练习册中的相应练习。
2.熟读课文。
3.仿照P113 2c，根据实际情况，运用本单元的目标语言，写一段有关自己最喜欢的偶像的对话。
新目标九年级英语课件【篇2】
本学期我任教九年级（2）班的英语课。经过以往几年的学习，大部分学生都能端正学习态度，主动参与学习活动。不少学生都打下了良好的英语基础，积累了一定的学习经验，掌握了行之有效的学习方法，形成了自己学习英语的学科理念，具备了较高的英语素质。但也有部分学生有求知欲，没自信心；有学习的潜力，却没良好的学习习惯，自控力极差。这诸多原因造成他们学习困难，衍生出厌学情绪。期末测试题目偏难，所以上学期的学科检测情况总体不好 ，两个班的合格率都有所下滑，优等生的人数更少 。总之，这批学生的优势和不足并存，希望与困难相伴，我们要发挥学生们的优势，弥补他们的不足，一方面集中力量培养一批优等生，另一方面又要帮助带动每一位学习困难的同学都能学好英语课，达到共同提高的总体目标。
本学期的中心任务是：疏导心理，激发兴趣，指导学法，夯实基础，培养能力。
在今后的教学活动中，教师需注意以下几点：
1、结合社会大环境，引导学生信仰学习，崇尚知识。
2、帮助学生树立起学习英语的自信心。
3、帮助学生制定自己的学习小计划，找出适合自己的学习方法。
5、激励学生主动、持久、高效地学习。
6、学习过程中注意因材施教，爱心感染。
向青春期过度的孩子们情绪不稳，明辨是非的能力较差，叛逆心理严重，这就要求教师必须耐心细致，严以律己，言行一致，脚踏实地，持之以恒地去工作，督促指导学生努力地、科学地学习，成为造福社会的栋梁之材！
本学期的任务有两项：一是完成九年级英语第二学期的教学任务，二是系统复习七八九三个年级的所学全部内容，为最后的学业水平测试做准备。九年级英语第二学期的教学任务是11---15共5个单元的新授及Units 11-15的一个复习单元。其主要内容涉及现在完成时，现在进行时，被动语态等。其特点是生词量大，知识点零碎。我们应重在练习，加强巩固。
七年级教材内容侧重基础，难度不是很大，在考试中所占比例也不大。复习时要以点带面，精讲多练，教师只起一个点拨的作用即可。八年级教材所涉及的词汇、短语、句型结构明显增多，难度加大，阅读量增加，是复习的重中之重。九年级教材所涉及的词汇、短语、句型结构、语法更多，内容贴近生活，词汇量大而且难记，在中考中所占比例最大，是复习时的重点更是难点。
在复习过程中，要夯实基础，注重知识间的联系与区别，并以中考题型为参照，加强题型和做题方法的探讨和研究，给予学生精要的指导和引导，是他们掌握知识的同时，更能学得做人做事的道理和方法。
三、本学期要达到的教学目标（包括知识与技能、过程与方法、情感态度三个方面的目标）
（一）知识与技能：
1、能够系统掌握七至九年级相关的教学内容，牢固掌握基础知识。
2、各知识间的区别于联系要明确，并在测试中做到不混淆。
3、由知识到能力的转化，技能明显提高，能够将知识和能力做到有机统一。
1、狠抓过程中基础知识的落实，以此促进能力的提高。
2、引导学生通过自主学习，进行知识的归纳、总结，使总结知识的过程成为掌握、提高、锤炼的过程。
3、抓好过程的调控，因材施教，并注重反馈和总结。
1、培养学生的积极性和良好的习惯。
2、促进学生间的合作，并体验创作的快乐。
3、对比中外文化的差异，开阔视野。
4、磨练意志，达到自我教育的目的。明辨是非，形成正确的人生观、世界观、价值观。
1、教材处理方面：深入学习新课标，领略其精髓所在。总览教材，把握重点，勾划难点。遵循由易到难，由点及面的教学规律，把它作为一种课内教育资源，进行创造性地使用。
2、教学研究方面：与时俱进，学习先进的教育理论，更新教育观念，把任务型教学的精神实质实践于英语课堂中。真正做到“以学生的发展为本”，把课堂还给学生，提高学生用英语交际的能力。加强集体备课的力度，学人之长，补己之短，团结合作，共同提高。
3、培优转差方面：学会赏识每一个学生，尤其关爱中下游学生。加大对优等生的培养力度，鼓励他们拔尖，发挥榜样带头作用，带动中下游学生，大面积提高学习质量。
4、思想教育渗透方面： 把爱国主义情感、集体主义道德、个人自立精神以及崇尚科学的精神融于日常教学之中。增强人口意识、环境意识，帮助学生形成正确的人生观、价值观。
尊重学生的个性差异，及时赏识学生。鼓励他们创新。利用学习互助小组，大力开展合作学习，在合作中培养责任感，并品尝成功的快乐，使其更爱学习。
利用计算机辅助教学，渗透信息技术教育，拓宽学生视野。
四、教学进度：
1 Unit 11 Unit 11 Section A-Section B(2C)
2 Units11-12 Unit 11 Section B(3a)- Reading -Unit 12Section A(2c)
3 Unit 12 Unit 12Section A(3a)-Reading
4 Units13 Unit 13Section A-- Section B(2C)
5 Units13--14 Unit 13 Section B(3a)-Reading -Unit 14 Section A(2c)
6 Unit14 Unit 14Section A(3a)-Reading
8/9 专项复习名词、冠词、数词、代词、介词、连词、形容词、副词
13 题型训练 阅读理解,完型填空,
新目标九年级英语课件【篇3】
一、单元教学目标：
1、了解一般写景散文的写作思路和构思方式，学习和运用从不同的角度描写景物的方法。
2、通过反复吟诵，能说出作品所写的自然风景的个性特点，及给予人们的种种启示。
3、掌握吟哦讽诵的要领，学会在朗读中加深对文章的理解，体会其深蕴的人文内涵。
4、学会合作探究和写作，能从各个渠道收集、筛选和组合材料，并运用到写作中去。
5、能用流畅的口语介绍本地的风景、特产、风俗和民情。
本单元的中心内容是自然山川，着重领略和要求掌握的学习方法是吟哦讽诵，就是要求学生能通过吟诵去体会和把握文章所表现出的作者的思想感情。因而要教会学生从反复吟诵中，了解作品所写的自然风景的个性特点及给予人们的种种启示，加深理解其中深蕴的人文内涵。并且能从吟诵中品味文章的神气、写作上的妙处，领会到写景散文的一般思路。进而参与综合学习与探究活动，在充分准备的基础上，进行合作探究和写作。
四篇课文的安排，应各有侧重点，《鼎湖山听泉》作为本单元的第一篇课文，可以作为示例，指导学生学习在吟哦讽诵中注意作者感情嬗变的历程及对人生和历史的感悟；《林中小溪》一文在运用所学的方法自主学习的同时，可向学生介绍一下这位被称赞为在整个世界文学中，未必能找到与他并驾齐驱的作家的前苏联作家的作品风格，并再选择一些他的作品来加深学生的感受。《飞红摘翠记黄山》《画山绣水》则重点学习写景角度的选择与转换及材料的整理和运用，为写作做好准备。
作为本单元重点学习的学习方法吟哦讽诵，一要创设好的情境，如为学生提供音乐、画面等激起学生朗读的兴趣和热情。二是要指导学生在读中思索、品味，以达到感悟的目的。
1导入，并明确任务：在初中两年的学习中，你有哪些好的语文学习的方法，供大家参考、学习。讨论
2出示、补充讨论的话题：
1指导学生浏览课文、目录。本学期的语文课本和过去有什么不同？你认为本学期我们的语文学习和过去会有什么不同？浏览课文、目录
2布置任务：制订本学期的读书计划（要求根据课文的相关内容，阅读同题材、体裁的作品，和文学名著）制订计划
1初步朗读课文，要求读准字音、读通句子。读后能简要概括每篇课文的主要内容（各自然风景的特点）朗读课文
3指导阅读《综合学习与探究》了解其中所提出的问题，并在以后的学习中带着这些问题学习，并能提出新的问题。阅读
4组成学习小组：1、分工收集资料。2、商定展示成果的形式。
学习目标：1、在诵读中理清作者的写作思路及感情发展的脉络。
2、能分析作者工于取材，扣住泉字，抓住听这个关键来组合材料。
3、能分析课文以泉为主，兼及其他的详略有致、明暗交错的组材方式。
4、在反复诵读中，体会本文的语言特点。
5、学习本文将深刻的哲理寄予在景物的状写中，并随景致的变化，
有层次地表达。
6、在吟哦讽诵的基础上，背诵优美语段。
重难点分析：1、吟哦讽诵而后得之是本单元要重点学习的学习方法。是重点，也是难点。要教会学生在吟诵中有所得、有所悟。首先就要让学生产生朗读的兴趣，乐于沉浸其中，思考、感悟。因而创设情境，激发学习热情，是很重要的环节。
化，有层次地表达。是本课的另一个重点。在学习中，把读写结合起来，让学生学会这种表达思想情感的方式。
教师补充。在优美的音配画中，学生介绍有关鼎湖山的相关资料。
2指导学生带着问题读课文。思考：勾画作者游山踪迹，寻找作者感情发展的脉络。学生自由朗读课文，并作圈点勾画和旁批。
1问题设计：鼎湖山可写之景很多，而作为游记，也应较全面地介绍。作者为什么要集中笔力写山泉？又是怎样做到以泉为主，兼及其他的？学生带着问题自由朗读课文，边读边思考
3指导学生重点朗读第二三段：1、体会比喻的妙处（两者之间有什么相似之处）2、找出下文中与此相呼应的比喻。3、引用楹联有何作用？4、应用怎样的语气语调来朗读？学生自由朗读、揣摩语气语调、思考、交流、个别朗读、其他学生评价
1播送音乐，指导学生用心聆听、感受。用一个比喻把自己所听所感写出来。听音乐，写片段
1由《小石潭记》的由景生情引入对本文主题的认识。学生背诵、复习有关知识
2指导重点朗读第八段。1、文章是从哪些角度设喻的？2、为什么先举乐音，再举本体？作者如何把泉景与人生感悟联系在一起的？朗读、思考、讨论、个别读、交流
1引导学生交流列代写自然美景的佳作，进一步体会这种由景生情，由情而悟的写法。交流古诗文、体会其表达的情感。
是拉动经济发展重要，还是自然环境、文物古迹的保护重要？学生按所持观点不同分组，合作辩论
课后学习：1、写一个议论片段，把自己的观点有理有据地表达出来。
2、预习《林中小溪》熟读课文，并收集有关作者资料。
学习目标：1、在诵读中，领略大自然的美和小溪所显示出的生命力量，把握作者的思想感情脉络，理解作者的人生信念。
2、能找出眼前景与人生感悟两者之间的对应关系。
3、了解普里什文作品的风格，体会作品诗的深警和反复回荡的旋律 之美。
4、收集对众多名家对普里什文的评价，通过对其他作品的阅读，进一步加深对理解，并能有自己独特的评价。
重难点分析：1、在诵读中体会作者蕴涵在写景状物中的丰富内涵和人生哲理同样是本课的教学重点。只是经过上一课的学习，学生对此种表现手法已有了一定的感性认识。本课以此为重点，是要在巩固的同时，学生能把他运用到自己的写作中去。
2、普里什文的散文被称为俄罗斯语言的百草。作品有其独特的风格，作为初三学生，应该尝试从一定的高度来评析课文，虽然很难，但可以从学习、借鉴名家的评论开始做起。
1由《鼎湖山听泉》导入：1、背诵第八段。2、复习由景生情、由情而悟的写法。背诵、复习提问。
2指导学生用刚学的方法朗读课文，理清文章层次、并用简洁的语言概括文章内容。朗读、勾画
1指导学生带着问题朗读文章主体部分，在学生自由朗读的基础上，请个别同学读，并对他们的朗读作出评价。
问题：作者从小溪在林中冲破重重障碍奋然前行中，感悟到人生哲理。请说出两者之间的相似之处。朗读、勾画、批注
悟？2、生活中还有哪些美景会给你联想？学生选择喜爱的段落反复诵读，感作者所感，生自己所悟。
课后学习：1、收集众多名家对普里什文的评价，并阅读《大地的眼睛》
2教师补充及归纳对作者有代表性的评价学生交流有关作者及评论家对他作品风格的评论。
3为学生评论提供范文学习、借鉴、模仿名家的评论，为课文中的某一部分写一段评论性的文字
1引导学生比较阅读阅读普里什文的另一部作品，比较、进一步体会其作品的风格
2、了解电视解说词的特点，能说清本文写作角度的转换。并能在自己的写作中运用这种变换角度多方面写景的.方法。
3、能用流畅的语言介绍一处自然景观。
重难点分析：黄山是一个大题材，它的特点是多方面的。作者用多幅画面组接连缀，从各个方面写出了黄山的特点。在写景是依据观察和表现的需要，自由地变换角度。这是本文的学习重点。
1情景导入：播放有关黄山的风光片激发学生的阅读热情。看影片，并交流手中资料
2朗读课文，1、课文介绍了黄山的哪些内容？找出课文在介绍自然景观时，选材组材上和前面两课最大的不同。朗读、思考
1由学生选择喜欢的内容反复诵读，准备做一次电视节目主持人朗读、为说话练习作准备。
3思考：1、作者是如何从不同的角度去表现景物的？用简洁的语言概括景物的特点。学生读读、思思，并做好批注。
1教师提供一个学生较为熟悉的自然景观，供学生参考。学生选择其中一点，学习用多角度写景的方法，写一段解说词。
课后学习：1、继续完成课堂小短文。 2、背诵精彩语段。
2、学习和尝试运用间接材料来丰富作品内容，表现事物的方法。
3、理解作品中所表达的主题，并能有自己合乎理性的评析。
重难点分析：1、学习和尝试运用间接材料来丰富作品内容，表现事物的方法。是学习本文的重点。
2、品味杨朔散文诗化的语言是难点，因而在教学安排上要注意：一是反复诵读，在诵读中提升语言的感悟能力，二是参考评论家的评论，三可以和《林中小溪》比较。
4问题探讨：本文用了不少间接材料来写景，作者是怎样运用的，你认为哪一段用的最好，好在哪里？学生选择自己认为写得最好的地方，反复朗读，思考、讨论、交流
1由课题画山绣水的内涵，引出对杨朔语言风格的评析。（教师可指导学生从虚实结合、动静结合、句式工整、笔墨凝练等方面探究）学生探究杨朔诗话的创作风格在文中的表现。并做好旁批
1问题设计：
1、有人认为把眼前的美景和凄惨的故事联系在一起，很不协调，在自然美景和阶级教育联系在一起就更是牵强附会了，你怎么看？
2、杨朔写散文是像写诗一样写的。普里什文称自己的散文为诗体随笔请比较一下两者的异同，你个人欣赏谁的作品。学生可任选其中一个问题，小组内合作探究
课后学习：把前面布置的对课文内容的质疑整理出来，选出有价值的问题，准备下节课探讨。
2把从学生中收集的问题返回到学生中去，选择有质量的，小组探讨。小组合作探讨交流
1巡视、指导各组的活动组内交流资料，补缺补漏，并确定展示形式，分工写作
（1）课堂发言的情况。
（2）完成作业的情况。
（3）参与活动的情况。
（4）学习兴趣的增强。
（5）学习能力的提高。
新目标九年级英语课件【篇4】
Where is it
教学目标(Teaching Aims)
通过本课教学，使学生初步学会说：什么东西或什么人在什么地方，即人或物所在的位置。并要求学生尽可能在交际场合使用。本课只教学生静态位置的表达。(动态位置以后再学)要学习be动词，介词in, on, near, behind, under以及定冠词the和不定冠词a/an的用法。
词汇学习： 掌握： of, classroom, answer, blackboard, some, schoolbag, flower, find, window
理解： broom, raincoat, cap, Hong Kong, Macao, SAR
语音： /i:/ e /e/ e /k/ k /^ / g /s/ s /z/ s
教学建议
本课主要学会表达大范围 (Where is Beijing?) 和小范围 (Where is my desk?) 的空间关系。小范围的空间关系，可利用教室里的物品练习句型。老师可不断的变换物品的位置让学生熟悉前面提到的几个介词。
大范围的空间关系，老师可利用地图让学生确认我国主要城市的位置。老师同时要以特殊的表达导入介词“特指the”与“泛指a/an”用法。
以上表达应会听、说、(包括会问回答)读，语调语、音基本正确。
辅音音标的发音不必一步到位。如; /s/, /z/
教学重难点分析
1.句型
a.主谓一致，即be动词的单复数。
Where is/ Where’s …?
It is/ It’s on/ in/behind/near/under the…
Where are/ Where’re …?
They are/ They’re on/ in/behind/near/under the…
注意语序：
特殊疑问句： 疑问词 + 是动词 + 主语 + 问号
b. 介词in, on, near, behind, under的用法; 可组成介词短语。
介词 + 定冠词 + 名词
如：in the morning, at night, in the desk, on the table, near the door等。
2. 日常交际用语
Look at the picture. What can you see …? I can / can’t see… Can you see …?
Where is /Where’s…? It is / It’s in, behind, near, under the…
Where are /Where’re …? They are / They’re in, behind, near, under the…
单词训练建议
classroom, blackboard, schoolbag, raincoat，football 均为合成词。可让学生利用所学过的单词知识，自学这些单词。
学生能自学的词尽量让学生自学，老师可稍加引导，以下单词可迁移，让学生自己读 behind → find room →broom
口语训练建议
本课的口语训练应放在空间关系上。并应当贯穿始终。口语训练重要的一环就是正确引入“位置”所谓概念。这与中文有较大的差异。中文说：在… 里，(上，后面，附近)的结构，英文只用一个介词，不同的介词比表达了不同的位置，而且一般要与定冠词the连用。向学生们介绍介词时，多用直观展示，适当用中文。
为了使学生能够确切把握介词的特点，我们在训练的最初阶段应当集中展示两个物体之间的变化，不要过早的变换物体，这样学生就能聚精会神的体会位置表达的基本方法。注意以下几点：
1.创设一个合乎生活逻辑的语境。
2.寻找一个非设计空间表达不可的动机。如：寻找一个提问者看不见的东西。 老师上课找不见黑板擦，问一个学生。---- Where’s the brush? ---- It’s under the teacher’s table.老师也可自问自答。尽量从交际出发，减少纯句型练习。
3.确定对话参与者之间的特定关系。
在物体选择上，一大一小，构成一主一从的格局。建议教师使用一个色彩鲜明的大纸盒和一个具有对比色度的小球，然后再换成玩具小动物，如小狗或小猫等，引起学生更大的兴趣。
画一只猫和一个盒子，这只猫分别在盒子的四个位置，即在上、在下、在里、在后。
运用型训练建议
老师可设计一个让学生去办公室去拿东西的情景，告诉学生东西的位置。这个练习事先和课代表准备好。课上给全班同学演示。其目的是告诉学生们介词在生活中的运用。
Eg.
Teacher: Could you help me?
Student: Sure.
T: Go to my office and fetch your notebooks.
S: Where are our notebooks?
T: They are on my table.
S: Where is your table?
T: It’s near the second window.
S: OK.
笔头训练建议
老师可设计一些基本的测试性的笔头练习，但一定是课堂上反复练习过的。多用直观的方式提供物体的位置，适量中文。注意以下几点：
1.清楚的展示物体的位置。
2.严格限定表示条件。
3.迅速反馈改正信息。
语法训练建议
冠词训练
a. 第一次提到用a/an。
b. 定冠词特指后接单述或复数名词。
可指教室里存在的东西，如：地面、时钟、桌椅等， 大家都知道的物品。
c. 位置介词的用法。
in the bag, under the table, on the desk , on the table等。
情感教育建议
通过本课的确定位置，以及寻找物品，告诉学生应养成放好自己的物品，不乱扔乱放东西的习惯，培养学生乐于助人，帮助别人寻找东西，以及拾到东西应交公或交还失主的良好品德。
可利用本课所提供的内容，Taiwan, Hong Kong, Macao, SAR, 进行爱国主义教育。
情景教学
学习方位表达在日常生活中很有用。我们身边有很多可就地取材的东西，建议老师在教、学生在学的时候，都不要忽略了身边的实物。如：书包在哪里，书在哪里，桌椅在哪里等。同学们要尽可能练到脱口而出，这样在交际时才能做到熟练自然，学以致用。看地图讲地名，要求学生有地理知识。老师不妨在课前让学生熟悉一下地图，知道三亚在海南，西安在陕西。此后再学用英语表达难度会小些。如有可能，再让学生看看美国地图、英国地图，谈谈伦敦在哪儿，华盛顿、纽约在哪儿，巩固所学知识，提高学习兴趣。
冠词a/an, the的用法
冠词是用在名词前帮助说明所指的人或事物。其分为不定冠词(a, an)和定冠词(the)。
不定冠词a和an的功能
1、 指人或事物的某一种类。例如：He is a student..他是学生。
2、 指人或某事物，但不具体说明何人或何物。例如;A boy is over there.
3、 表示数量“一”的概念。例如：I have a bike, a computer and a small room. 我有一辆自行车、一台电脑和一个小房间。
4、 用于某些固定词组中。例如：have a look, have a seat等。
定冠词the的用法描述
1. 用来特指某些人或某些事物。例如：The books on the desk are our teachers(books被on the desk所限定).桌上的书是我们老师的。
2. 常用在上文提到过的人或事物的名词前。例如：There is a chair in the room. A woman is on the chair. The woman in lilys mother.房间里有一把椅子，一位妇女坐在椅子上，那位妇女是莉莉的妈妈。
3. 用来指说话人双方都知道的人或事物。例如：Where is the teacher?老师在哪儿(双方都知道指的是哪个老师)?
4.在世界上独一无二的事物前。如：the moon
5. 在序数词和形容词级前。如：the youngest boy(最年轻的男孩) the first lesson(第一课)
6. 用在乐器类前。如：play the violin(拉小提琴)
7. 用在“姓”前，且“姓”后面加-s，表示“一家人” 如：The Greens are not here
8. 用在一些习惯用语中。例如：in the morning, in the same class等。
何时不用冠词?
1. 在专用名词前。例如： in China; in Grade One等。
2. 名词前已有了做定语用的形容词、某些代词、名词所有格等修饰词语时。例如：this pencil; his knife等。
3. 表示一类人和事物的复数名词前。例如：These are oranges.
4. 在称呼语或头衔的名词前。例如：This is Miss Gao/ Mr. Wang/ Mrs. Liu.
5. 在某些习惯用语中。例如：go home; go to school等。
新目标九年级英语课件【篇5】
`九年级英语新目标第一单元教案
备课人白灵
第一单元 Section A（第一课时）
How can we become good learners? 教案设计
一、Teaching aims:(教学目标)Talk about how to study English 二Language goal（知识目标）：
学习使用“How do you study …? ”及其答语“I study by …” 句型
三Emotion goal（情感目标）：(1)Talk about the ways for studying English;(谈论学好英语的方法)（2）Give them the confidence to learn and enjoy English.（帮他们树立学好英语的信心）
四．Teaching importance and difficulties（教学重难点）
How do you study for a test /learn English? I study/learn by listening to tapes/ by working with friends…/by studying with a group..五 Teaching steps（教学步骤）
Step 1 Lead-in with a free talk(自由对话导入新课)Greeting with the students;instruction myself，I want to ask you some questions :(1.)Do you like English lessons?(2.)In the past exam, Are you satisfied with yourself?(3.)Do you learn English by studying with friends?
OK , Today ,let‟s talk about how to study for a test and how to learn English well.（展示课题）
Step 2 Activity 1----which is the most popular ways of studying（活动一：最流行的学习方式是什么）Ask the students how they usually study for a test.Use the Power-point to learn the different ways, make a simple count.Learn the new words.Flashcard（抽认卡）: It‟s a kind of card with a word or a picture on it ,and it‟s usually be used for teaching Vocabulary（词汇）:It means that all the words someone knows.Step 3 Listen to the tape carefully
Now, we divided into two teams, the girls‟ team and the boys‟ team, which team listens carefully and answers my questions quickly, I‟ll give them a star.Well, Our race is started.Listen to the tape and find how each of them is studying for a test(1)Mei studies by making flashcards, so the answer is „„a”.(2)Pierre（皮埃尔）studies by asking the teacher for help, so the answer is „„c”
(3)Antonio（安东尼奥）studies by listening to the tape, so the answer is „„b”.Step4 Activity 2-----The best ways to learn English.（活动二：最有效的学习英语的方式是什么）Listen to the tape, check the questions you hear Ask the students how they learn unt the numbers in different ways.Choose the best ways.Listen again and match the answers.Use the power-point to help the ways.Step5 Write the new words free.（自由识记新词）
Several minutes with yourself and remember the new words in this text.Step6 Read aloud with your desk-mates together(同桌小组阅读练习)练习句型：
(1)How do you study for a test?
I study by listening to tapes/working with friends/making flashcards /asking the teacher for help/by making vocabulary lists/by reading the textbook…(2)How do you learn English ?
I learn by studying with a group /by watching English-language videos/by reading aloud to practice pronunciation
(3)Do you learn English by reading aloud?
Yes ,I do /No ,I don‟t
(4)Have you ever studied with a group?
Yes ,I have.I‟ve learned a lot that way./ No ,I haven‟t.Step 7Self-check（自我检测）
Prepare a paper note with task 1.英汉短语互译
（1）用制做抽认卡的方式（2）speaking skills
（3）by making vocabulary lists（4）通过向老师求教（5）通过听录音带
（6）study with a group
2．根课文内容以及句子的意思完成单词（1）I often p conversations with my friends.(2)We study for English tests by making word card.(3)We must read aloud to practice reading.(4)I‟ve learned a lot that way.(5)Reading aloud is improves my speaking skills.3．句型转换
(1)Have you ever studied with a group?（做否定回答）
(2)I study English by asking our teacher for help.（就划线部分提问）
(3)It‟s too hard to understand the voices.(用so…that变为同义句)Step8Just for fun（轻松一刻）
Show it with the Power-point.Two mice Once two mice met in a library.One was chomping away(大口咀嚼）on an English dictionary.“What do you think you were doing ?”the other asked with a puzzled expression（表情)on her face.The first mouse let out a long sigh（长嘘一口气）and said to the other one： “ Be quiet!I am learning English!” 六．Ending words.（总结下课）
Well ,that‟s all our today‟s lesson.I had a great time with you and the winner is our …team ,let‟s congratulations to them 七Homework（作业布置）
make a conversation according to the conversation of 2d 八板书设计
unit1 How can we becomegood learners the ways to study English:
b y
asking the teacher for help
working with friends
making words card reading the textbook listening to tapes
1.知识技能： a.Master the key words and sentences.b.Learn to talk about the different festivals.c.Improve the students ’
listening and speaking skills.2.过程方法：
a.Learn the new words through word cards and conversations.b.Lead in the target language through listening and speaking practice.3.情感目标： Lead the students to learn history and cultural meanings about different festivals
九年级英语人教版课件热门
“九年级英语人教版课件”之需求我们已经为您准备妥当。上课前准备好课堂用到教案课件很重要，撰写教案课件是每位老师都要做的事。教案是构建课程体系和课程结构的重要要素。以下数据仅供参考请酌情使用！
九年级英语人教版课件【篇1】
以《考试说明》为依据，以新课程标准为准绳，制订详细周密的复习计划，切实抓好初三英语复习工作。密切关注中考动态，联系学生实际，通过教材梳理，专项和综合训练，努力提高学生运用英语知识的能力和答题技巧，以适应新的中考形式和要求。
我校学生从初一入学时就能看出有很多学生都接处过英语，通过初中三年的学习有了一定的进步，也取得了一定的成绩，但是从试卷分析来看，我校九年级学生在阅读、写作和一些基础知识方面离中考和我们的要求还有一定的差距。
指导思想：通过不同题型的专项训练，熟悉各题型的命题特点，解题思路和方法夯实“常考点”，突破“失分点”，研讨“新考点”。
综合训练贯穿在初三英语教学的始终。该阶段重点培养学生应试能力，积累学生考试的经验。教师要细致分析各层次学生的知识和能力现状，对学生进行针对性的指导。教法上要帮助学生克服在解题中存在的主要问题，积累解题经验，以良好的心态确保该得到的分不丢失。要求教师根据各自班级常见的知识层面上的“失分点”，有针对性地制定 “个性化复习方案”，在梳理知识网络的过程中，突出易错、易混内容。薄弱环节，重点突破。教师分析近三年中考试卷，对中考趋势进行合理预测。
3 考前10天，再次细化复习迎考计划，精选精讲试题，帮助学生查漏补缺，指导学生复习迎考的方法，调整学生的生物钟，确保他们以最佳状态参加中考考试。
九年级英语人教版课件【篇2】
主题：我的假期计划
暑假即将来临，我的假期计划已经整整一个月被我规划着。在我看来，假期是一段宝贵的时间，也是让我充电一下的机会。因此，我的假期计划充实而有意义。
首先，我打算将大部分时间用于学习和阅读。这个假期，我要完成初中学习的基础知识，为高中的学习打下坚实的基础。此外，读书是我一直以来非常喜欢的活动，假期里我计划要看一些精选书籍，用阅读来丰富自己的知识储备和生活阅历。
其次，我也希望假期中放松一下身心，拓宽视野。我计划去旅游，给自己带来新的视觉和感受。旅游可以使我体验到不同地区的文化、历史和美食，也可以让我接触到不同的人和事，为我未来的学习和生活奠定更加丰富多彩的基础。
另外，我也希望能够积极参与一些志愿者活动。照顾老人和孩子，帮助清洁环境等，这些都是令人愉悦的事情。以我微薄之力去为社会贡献一点点力量，也是共建美好社会的一种方式。
最后，我希望在假期的时光里，能够也多和家人和好友相处，分享每一刻的快乐和收获，增进彼此之间的感情和了解。
这个假期，我有多项计划，似乎时间有些紧迫。但是我相信，只要按照计划前进，即使路途漫漫，最终一切都会被我充实而未来充满希望。
九年级英语人教版课件【篇3】
教学目标
1. 能力目标
能听、说、认读一些常见的动物单词cat，dog， monkey， duck， panda， rabbit， 并能用英语介绍这些小动物。
能听懂一些简单的指示语，并能按照指令模仿动物做出相应的动作。
2. 情感目标
培养学生爱护动物、保护动物的意识。
教学重难点
能听、说、认读一些常见的动物单词cat，dog， monkey， duck， panda， rabbit， 并能用英语介绍这些小动物。
能听懂一些简单的指示语，并能按照指令模仿动物做出相应的动作。
教学工具
ppt课件。
教学过程
1、Warm-up
（1）Free talk（1分钟）
a. ---- Good afternoon， Fangfang.
---- Good afternoon， Lanlan.
b. ---- Hello， Xiaoling. How are you？
---- Hi， I＇m fine， thank you. And you？
---- Very well， thank you.
（2）播放歌曲 Teddy Bear（要求学生边拍手边吟唱，营造一个欢乐活泼的英语气氛。）（1分钟）
（3）大小声游戏：rabbit， monkey， panda， zoo（1分钟）
教师轻声说一个单词，学生则需大声朗读。教师大声说，学生则轻声说。
（设计思路：活跃气氛，融洽师生情感，激发学生参与课堂活动的热情，使学生迅速进入英语学习的状态，并帮助学生巩固了上节课的单词。）
2.entation
教师课前在黑板上用彩色粉笔画一个动物园的图案。
（1）教学duck
a.教师画一个duck的简笔画，微笑着问学生：Hello， boys and girls. What＇s this？ Do you know？ 你们认识它吗？它的叫声是怎样的呢？
b.课件出现duck的画面及叫声
T： Look at my mouth. d-u-c-k， d-u-c-k （注意元音字母u的发音）然后把图片鸭子贴在黑板上。
（2）教学rabbit
T： Hello. I＇m an animal. I have two long ears， and I have a white body. And， I have two red eyes. Do you know？ What am I？ 从此谜语中引出单词 rabbit。
（设计思路：悬念式激情导入，激发学生的好奇心和兴趣，提高学生的听力水平。）
（3）教学panda
出示课件。
T： Look， it＇s a lovely animal. What＇s this？
引出熊猫单词panda，出示卡片，领读，进行音标渗透。然后说：Hello！ My name is Panda. Nice to meet you.（引导学生用所学问候语向熊猫打招呼。）
（设计思路：在熟知的语言中呈现单词，在真实的情境中交际，避免了枯燥无意义的机械重复，使课堂生动、鲜活、富有生活情趣。）
（4）老师模仿声音Woof！Woof！引出单词 dog. I＇m a dog. （做小狗的动作）Dog， dog， I＇m a dog， woof woof woof. 声音woof 引出单词dog。
接着出示cat的图片，引导学生说出Cat， cat， I＇m a cat， meow， meow， meow. 同法教学monkey.
（设计思路：在展示单词的同时，配上相应的动物动作。小学生的自控力不是很强，很难长时间保持注意力，所以动手，动脑，惟妙惟肖的滑稽动作，让学生体会到了英语学习的乐趣。）
（5）教师以故事形式出示课件，引导学生再次认读动物单词。
（设计意图：根据学生好表现的心理，一步一步循序渐进，层层深入，由易到难地从本课单词迁移到课外内容，既激发了学生的学习兴趣，又丰富了课堂内容。）
3.tice
（1）让学生拿出准备的玩具或头饰，扮演自己喜爱的动物。
（设计意图：小学生都非常喜爱小动物，每位学生最喜爱的动物也不同，针对这一生活实际，通过学生戴上自己最喜爱的头饰，介绍自己，提高了学单词的趣味性，使每位学生都跃跃欲“说”，即能寓教于乐。）
（2）教师播放Let＇s learn部分的课件，让学生跟着说，注意语音语调。
（3）教师示范表演，学生模仿。看谁表演得最逼真、最生动。
4. Consolidation
（1）教师让学生手拿自己的玩具，两至四人一组练习说 Look！I have a rabbit / dog ...其他同学说上节课学过的感叹词：Cool！ Super！ Great！ Wow！
（2）比一比，看谁模仿的动物叫声最逼真。
（3）赛一赛，看谁模仿的动物形体特征最生动。
5. Add-activities
（1）教师将一只大萝卜放在讲台台上，并戴上rabbit的头饰，并找若干名学生，师生同表演“拔萝卜”故事情节。
（2）Let＇sChant
Cat， cat， I＇m a cat， meow， meow， meow.
Dog， dog， I＇m a dog， woof， woof， woof.
Duck， duck， I＇m a duck， quack， quack， quack.
Monkey， monkey， I＇m a monkey， hei， hei， hei.
Rabbit， rabbit， I＇m a rabbit， jump， jump， jump.
Panda， panda， I＇m a panda， ha， ha， ha.
6. Homework
（1） 把你知道的动物单词说给家长听。
（2） 和同伴一起做模仿动物表演。
（3） 小组合作进行编对话或儿歌。
九年级英语人教版课件【篇4】
新目标英语九年级第八单元短语动词小结
常见短语动词结构有下面几种：
1.动词+副词 如：give up 放弃 turn off 关掉 stay up 熬夜
这种结构有时相当于及物动词，如果其宾语是代词，就必须放在动词和副词之间，如果是名词，则既可插在动
词和副词之间，也可放在短语动词后。2.动词+介词 如：listen of 听 look at 看 belong to 属于这种结构相当于及物动词，后面跟宾语。
3.动词+副词+介词 如：come up with 提出，想出 run out of 用完，耗尽
4.动词+名词(介词)如：take part in参加 catch hold of 抓住 1.cheer(sb.)up使(某人)高兴、振作 如：cheer me up 使我高兴 clean up 打扫 clean-up n.打扫
2.homeless adj.无家可归的 a homeless boy 一个无家可归的男孩
home n.家
3.hand out 分发 hand out bananas give out 分发 give out sth to sb.分….给某人
give up doing 放弃… give up smoking 放弃吸烟
give away 赠送 捐赠 give away sth.to ….give away money to kids
give sb.sth.给某人某东西 give me money 给我钱
give sth.to sb.给某人某东西 give money to me 给我线 4.sick adj.生病的 作表语、定语 ill adj.生病的 作表语，不能作定语
5.volunteer to do v.志愿效劳、主动贡献 volunteer n.志愿者
e up with 提出 想出 === think up 想出
catch up with 赶上 追上
7.put off doing 推迟做某事
put on 穿上(指过程)put up 张贴
8.write down 写下 记下
9.call up 打电话
make a telephone call 打电话
10.set up 成立 建立
The new hospital was set up in 2000.这座医院是在2000年成立的。11.each 每个 各自的 强调第一个人或事物的个别情况 常与of 连用
every 每个 每一个的 一切的 则有“全体”的意思不能与of 连用
12.put …to use 把… 投入使用，利用
They put the new machine to use.他们把新机器投入使用
13.help sb.(to)do 帮助某人做某事 help him(to)study help sb.with sth.帮助某人做某事 help him with English help do 帮助做某事 help study 14.plan to do 计划做某事
plan + 从句
I plan to go to Beijing.=== I plan(that)I will go to Beijing.我计划去北京。15.spend … doing 花费…做… I spent a day visiting Beijing.我花了一天的时间去参观北京。
spend… on sth.花费…在… I spent 3 years on English.16.not only … but(also)… 不但… 而且… 用来连接两个并列的成分
(1)引导以 not only …but(also)… 开头的句子往往引起部分倒装。
因此 ⑴Not only do I feel good but(also)….是倒装句。
也是说得要把前面的句子中的助动词或者是情态动词放在主语的前面。如：
①Not only can I do it but(also)I can do best.我不仅能做到而且做得最好。
⑵Not only…but(also)… 接两主语时，谓语动词随后面的主语人称和
数的变化 也就是就近原则 如：
①Not only Lily but(also)you like cat.不仅莉莉而且你也喜欢猫。
②Not only you but(also)Lily likes cat.不仅你而且莉莉喜欢猫。常见的就近原则的结构有：
Neither… nor…即不…也不…(两者都不)Neither you nor I like him.我和你都不喜欢他。
Either… or… 不是…就是…(两者中的一个)Either Lily or you are a student.Not only …but(also)…
There be 17.join 参加(指参加团体、组织)如：join the Party 入党
take part in 参加(指参加活动)如： take part in sports meeting 参加运动会 18.①run out of == use up 用完 用尽
I have run out of money.== I have used up money.我已经用完了钱。
②run away 逃跑 The monkey has run away from the zoo.这只猴子已经从动物园里逃跑了。
③run to + 地方 跑到某地
19.take after(在外貌、性格等方面)与(父母等)相像
be similar to 与..相像
take after 相像
look after 照顾
take care of 照顾 out 算出 结局
The situation worked out quite well.情况的结局非常好 Have you worked out this math problem? 你已经算出这道数学问题了吗？ 21.hang out 闲荡 闲逛
I like to hang out at mall with my friends.我喜欢和我的朋友一起去购物中心闲荡。22.be able to do 能 会
be unable to do 不能 不会
23.thank you for doing 谢谢做某事 如： thank you for helping me 谢谢做帮助我
九年级英语人教版课件【篇5】
(Period1)教学设计
一、教学目标
（一）知识与能力
了解一般过去时的被动语态用法，通过听力，了解一些发明的相关历史知识，如发明人，发明时间及发明物的用途等。
（二）过程与方法
采用pair work和 Role-playing的学习策略，利用图片、听力材料等开展课堂教学。
（三）情感态度与价值观
了解一些近现代发明的时间、发明者及用途，激发学生热爱发明情感，培养想象力，观察力和善于思考的能力，鼓励发挥想象力去认识世界，改造世界。
二、教学重难点
（一）教学重点
1．询问发明物的发明时间、发明者、发明用途。
2．理解含有一般过去时的被动语态的表达方式。
3．就发明这一话题进行两两对话练习。
（二）教学难点
1．用被动语态询问发明物的时间、发明者和发明用途。
2．理解含有一般过去时的被动语态的表达方式。
三、教学策略
语音教学──让学生进行跟读模仿操练；词汇教学──图文对照给学生释义点拨，让学生在具体的语境中体会、理解其含义，并学会运用；口语教学──主要采取诸多的 pair work 问答式的口语交际活动反复进行操练；听力教学──采取图文配对、排序和填空的方式。语法教学──语言输入、抓住特征、模仿操练。
四、教具准备
1. A blackboard
2. A computer with PowerPoint
五、教学过程
Step 1：Lead-in
利用多媒体先展示出中国古代的四大发明，回顾久远的历史发明，再呈现出几张近现代的发明物图片，如mobile phone, car, , alarm clock, fridge, computer, light bulb, telephone , TV, robot, , camera等。让学生说出图中物品名称，感受到层出不穷的新发明，初步感知发明带给我们生活的巨大改变。
【设计意图】
通过图片对比引入新课，刺激学生感官，把他们的注意力迅速调动到发明物上来，并由此带领学生一起复习有关发明物的词汇，既唤起学生对话题词汇的记忆，又能开阔学生思维，为后面的听力做铺垫。
Step 2：Think and say(1a)
利用多媒体逐步呈现听力中要听到的4个发明物的图片，让学生先讨论预测它们被发明的先后顺序。
Step 3：Listening (1b)
先帮助学生复习有关年代的表达，培养学生听关键词来获取信息的听力技巧。然后再播放听力材料，让学生根据听的内容，确定各个发明物的年份。
【设计意图】
进行目标语言的输入。
Step 4：Memory game(1c)
Activity1:让学生回顾刚才的听力材料，利用多媒体逐步呈现刚才听力材料中出现的四项发明物，运用目标语言When was it invented ? It was invented in…进行本节课的第一次pair work
【设计意图】
熟悉目标语言的表达。
Step 5：Pair work
Activity2:再补充一些发明物，让学生根据提示内容进行对话练习。
【设计意图】
强化目标语言的运用。
Step 7：Think and say
利用多媒体逐步呈现几位发明家和他们的发明物图片，让学生把发明物与相对应的发明家连线匹配。
【设计意图】
引出句型Who was… invented by? It was invented by….的学习。
Step 8：Listening（2a）
Activity1 让学生先听对话，然后根据听到的顺序排出所提供的三项发明物。（在听对话之前，先引导学生学习理解三个新词：heel, scoop, electricity，扫清生词障碍。）
【设计意图】
帮助学生了解对话中谈到的发明物，为进一步的听做铺垫。
Activity2(2b)让学生再听一遍对话，根据听到的内容，完成表格内强调发明物用途的关键词的填空。
【设计意图】
进行句型What is it/are they used for? It is/They are used for….的输入训练。
Step 9：Pair work
Activity1 让学生根据刚才表格填写的内容进行对话练习。熟练使用What is it/are they used for? It is/They are used for…等句型。
【设计意图】
帮助学生熟悉目标语言，并模仿对话内容表达出来。
Activity2让学生根据刚老师提供的信息，用目标语言When was it invented ? It was invented in… Who was… invented by? It was invented by… What is it/are they used for? It is/They are used for… 来谈论 fridge, light bulb, car这三项发明的时间、发明者和用途。
【设计意图】
帮助学生掌握目标语言，并流利表达。
Step10:当堂检测（Test in class）
按要求完成下列各题。
（1）Cars were invented in l885.(对画线部分提问）
When were cars invented?
（2）Julie Thompson invented electric slippers.(改为被动语态)
Electric slippers were invented by Julie Thompson.
（3） The shoes with lights are used for seeing in the dark.(对画线部分提问）
What are the shoes with lights used for ?
（4)The light bulb was invented by Thomas Edison. (对画线部分提问）
Who was the light bulb invented by?
（5)The refrigerator is used to keep food fresh (改为
同义句)
The refrigerator is used for keeping food fresh.
Step11: Summary
本节课我们紧承第五单元进一步学习理解了The passive voice in the simple past tense,并学会了用以下目标语言
When was it invented? It was invented in…
Who was… invented by? It was invented by…
What is it/are they used for? It is/ They are used for…来谈论发明的历史.
Step12：教师寄语
There are many kinds of inventions in the world. They make our life better and better, easier and easier, more and more convenient.
We should study hard to create more useful things with our wise brains. Believe in the world will be more and more beautiful, our life will be more and more wonderful because of us.
【设计意图】
进行本节课学生思想情感态度与价值观的渗透与教育。
Step13：Homework
Think of three inventions to make conversations using the target languages.
Step14：Blackboard design
Unit6 When was it invented?
Section A (1a-2c)
When was it invented? It was invented in…
Who was… invented by? It was invented by…
What is it/are they used for? It is/They are used for…
Step15：教学反思
本单元的教学是对上一单元知识的拓展和延续，因此应注重两个单元的联系教学，让学生循序渐进地学习新知识，同时巩固学过的知识。在本单元，教师还应培养学生的观察能力，让学生留意生活中各种与人们日常生活息息相关的发明，让学生就这些发明进行讨论，从而巩固本单元的教学话题。
九年级英语人教版课件【篇6】
【本课学习目标】：
阅读课文“A short story of western painting”，帮助学生认识国画和西洋画的不同特征、代表性作品及画家。
一、词汇扩充：
1realistic(adj)现实主义的;现实的---reality(n)现实---realize(v)---实现
2belief(n)信仰;信任---believe(v)相信---believein相信
3consequent(adj)作为结果的;随之发生的---consequently(adv)所以;因而
4value(n)价值(pl)价值观;社会准则---valuable(adj)有价值的---beofgreatvalue
5religion(n)宗教;宗教信仰---religious(adj)宗教的
6possession(n)所有;财产---possess(v)持有;拥有
7convince(v)使确信;使信服---convincesbofsth使某人相信某事
8impress(v)给…留下印象---impression(n)印象---makeastrongimpressiononsb
给某人留下深刻印象---impressive(adj)---impressionism(n)印象主义;印象派
---impressionist(adj)印象派的(n)印象派艺术家
9agreatdeal(adv)大量---agreatdealof(adj)大量的….
10predict(v)预言;预告;预测---prediction(n)
11scholar(n)学者---scholarship(n)奖学金
12flesh(n)肉;肌肉;_---fresh(adj)新鲜的---flash(v)闪现
13exhibition(n)展览;陈列;展览会---exhibit(n)展览品;陈列品(v)展出
1Artisinfluencedbythewayoflifeandbeliefsofthepeople,andChina,unlikeEurope,hasfollowedasimilarwayoflifeforaverylongtime.
艺术受到人民生活方式和信仰的影响，而中国和欧洲不同，他的生活方式在很长时期里都是相近的。
2Whenpeoplefirstsawhispaintingtheywereconvincedtheywerelookingthroughaholeinthewallatarealscene.
当人们第一次看到他的画时，还以为是透过墙上的小洞来观看真实的场景。
3AmongthepainterswhobrokeawayfromthetraditionalstyleofpaintingweretheimpressionistswholivedandworkedinParis.
在那些突破传统画法的画家中有生活和工作在法国巴黎的印象派画家。
Matchthewordsandmeanings.Thesewordsmighthelpyouinyourreading.
③detailed③beinginthoughtbuthavingaphysicalorpracticalexistence
④traditional④lifelike,truetolife
⑤religious⑤classical,ofoldbeliefs
⑥existence⑥Sinceretobelieveinagodorgods
1Whatweretheartistsinterestedinfrom5thto15thcenturyAD?
Theywereinterestedincreating_______and____forGod.
2HowdidMasacciopainthispaintings?
Hedrewthingsin__________,whichmakespicturesvery_______.
3.Whydidtheimpressionistshavetopaintquickly?
Becausethenaturallight_______quickly,theyhadto_____quickly.
1.Whichofthefollowingstatementsistrue?
A.PaintingsinMiddleAgeswereveryrealistic.
B.Westernarthaschangedalotsincethe5thcentury.
C.Impressionistpaintingswerepaintedmainlyindoors.
D.ModernartbeganintheRenaissance.
2.Atfirstmostpeoplehatedtheimpressionists’styleofpainting,because_____.
A.theirpaintingswereveryabstract.
B.theirpaintingswereveryrealistic.
C.Theybrokeawayfromthetraditionalstyleofpainting.
D.theirpaintingswereveryridiculous.
3.IntheRenaissance,painters___.
APaintedreligiousscenesinamorerealisticstyle.
B.focusedmoreonreligionthanonhumans.
C.begantopaintoutdoors.
D.returnedtoclassicalRomanandGreekideasaboutart.
4.____discoveredhowtomakepaintingslookmorerealbyusingperspective.
A.GiottodiBondone.
B.Masaccio.
C.ClaudeMonet.
5.Whatdoesthetextmainlytellus?
A.Howreligiouspaintingdeveloped.
B.Howoilpaintingdeveloped.
C.Howimpressionistpaintingdeveloped.
1.Westernarthaschangedverylittleoverthelastseventeencenturies.
()2.PaintersintheMiddleAgespaintedmainlyreligioussubjects.
()3.PaintingsintheMiddleAgeswereveryrealistic.
()aissancepainterstriedtopaintthingsinarealisticway.
()5.TwoimportantdiscoveriesintheRenaissanceperiodwereoilpaintsanddrawinginperspective.
()6.Impressionistspaintedtheirpicturesmainlyindoors.
()7.Atfirstpeopledidnotliketheimpressionists’paintings.
()8.Modernartbeganwiththeimpressionists
fillinthechartaccordingtothetext
ThecharacteristicsofChinesepaintingsandWesternpaintings:
Chinesepaintingisoftenaboutnature,suchasmountain,water,bird-and-flower,etc.
Ithasanairoflivinginnature,harmony(和谐)andpeace.
Westernpaintingisaboutreligion,human.
Itisabstract,richincolor,oil,lineandshape
kindsofpainting(matchtheEnglishwordsandChinesemeaning)
九年级英语人教版课件【篇7】
1.教学挂图。
2.教学投影片。
3.教学录音磁带。
4.单词卡片。
5.主线人物Bill，Joy，Lily，Angel的人物形象图片。
A Let's talk.
1.本部分是几个主线人物到小动物家做客，小动物向客人们介绍自己的家庭成员的情景图。所涉及到的内容分别为：(1)Bill到小熊家做客;(2)Lily和Joy到小猴家做客;(3)Angel拜访小兔一家。
2.设计的意图是为教师和学生提供一个复习操练前两课单词和介绍家庭成员的句型，以及操练询问某人是谁的问句及相应答句的真实情景，从而为学生练习、运用本单元单词和句型进行交流、沟通提供必要的语言参照。
3.教学的重点是学习运用三组交际用语：Who is he? Who is she? He / She is.... This is my dad \ grandma \ sister \ .... Where is... ? She is at home.Nice to meet you.对于学生而言，这三组交际用语都不是新句型。
4.左图提供的是主线人物Bill到小熊家做客，他想知道照片上是谁，于是，他问小熊：Who is he? 小熊介绍说：He is my dad.
5.右侧上图Lily和同伴到小猴家找小猴的妹妹玩。在大门口，她们遇到了小猴，Lily问到：Where is your sister? 小猴说：She is at home.
6.右侧下图是Angel来拜访小兔子一家，小兔子向Angel介绍：Angel, this is my grandpa and grandma.Angel非常礼貌地向爷爷奶奶问好：Nice to meet you!
B Let's act.
1.本部分的主要活动是让学生感知语言在生活中使用的情境。
2.学生应在教师的带领下，复习前两课所学的句子和单词，并在此基础上进行角色表演活动。
3.教师在带领学生做表演活动时，应尽量创设与本课一致或其他一些真实的生活情境，使学生自然地习得语言。
1.建议教师可以根据学生的不同情况，采取不同的方法进行本课时的教学。
2.学生可先观看教学挂图，复习家庭、家庭成员、服装、房间物品等词汇和画面中的人物，分别说出他们的姓名、所在位置，并描述他们的外貌长相。
3.在复习的基础上，教师播放录音，请学生仔细听录音，然后请学生说一说听到了什么(学生可以直接把听到的英语句子讲出来，重复全句有困难的话，也可以只说出其中的短语或单词)。
4.教师引导学生根据录音中声音的不同，猜测、判断对话人物是谁。学生再听录音，模仿录音中的声音、语调和速度进行说话练习。
5.为使学生更熟练地掌握对话，表达更自如，教师可多次重复播放每组对话，让学生跟读、模仿，直到将3组对话分别都练熟了。教师要努力创设情境，让学生多听几遍，再尝试着请能力强一些的同学重复，万不可只听一遍就急于让学生输出。因为这样一来，学生一旦出现错误，学习积极性难免会受到挫伤，这对于培养良好的语音语调也不利。
6.在练习的基础上，教师再组织学生开展group work和pair work活动，让学生进行两两对话。同座位的同学可分别练习1.2.3组对话;每个小组可分别安排或自愿读某一组对话，然后小组内部相互轮换，以充分练习对话。
7.在练习的基础上，小组同学可做角色表演。(全组同学分3小组站在不同的位置，然后按录音中的对话顺序进行。之后可交换角色再练习。)
8.学生在分组活动以后可进行全班的汇报表演。教师从1.2.3组或4.5.6组分别抽出表演一组对话的学生，按顺序完整地表演3段对话，然后请全班学生给予评价。此活动可进行多次。也可由一组学生表演完整的3段对话，其他组依次上台表演，最后进行评比。
9.教师应鼓励学生自己发挥想象，创造新的情景及内容进行对话和表演。如：在适当的情境下，添加些有关问候、物品的位置、外貌特征等内容。
10.教师在可能的条件下，要积极鼓励学生进行故事改编。例如：变更介绍人物的场所，变更人物等。有的学生可能会从家庭成员间的介绍扩展到老师、同学或朋友间的介绍，教师应充分给予肯定。这样，教师一方面可以逐步培养学生综合运用语言的实践能力，另一方面可以为学生今后的学习奠定良好的基础。
Lily: Where is your sister?
Rabbit: Angel, this is my grandma.
1.教师指导学生把掌握有关家庭成员的单词和介绍家庭成员的句子的情况及其运用所学句子进行问答的情况用 和符号记入学习档案。学习档案的记录内容可以选择以下项目：
—教师将学生为同桌记录听录音、并跟录音模仿说对话情况的评价放入学习档案。
—教师将小组活动中能开展问答对话学生的姓名及表现的评价放入学习档案。
—教师对学生跟录音唱歌和参与课堂活动的态度进行评价，将评价放入学习档案。
—教师对有创造性思维和有创造性语言表达的学生情况进行记录并放入学习档案。
2.教师具体而简要地记录学生当堂表现：
—能够认真听录音并跟录音大声模仿说对话的学生有多少人?
—能够在小组活动中对别人提问的学生有多少人?
—能回答别人问题的学生有多少人?
—能够真实介绍自己的家庭成员的学生有多少人?
3.本课对学生掌握学习内容情况的评定方法：
—教师播放录音让学生听，并要求学生响亮地重复录音中的对话。教师进行现场记录。
—教师教学生学唱歌曲，并跟随录音音乐边唱边表演。教师进行现场记录。
—教师出示家庭场景与人物图片，要求学生看图说出句子。教师进行现场记录。
—要求学生就所学内容对同学提问，并回答他人的问题。对于不能提问的学生，教师应启发他们努力去听别人的问题，争取听懂并做出正确的回答。教师记录此类学生的回答情况。
九年级英语人教版课件【篇8】
I'm sorry, as an AI language model, I cannot generate pre-written text. However, I can provide you with some tips to write a theme essay in English.
Tips to Write a Theme Essay in English:
1. Choose an interesting topic: Before writing an essay, choose a topic that interests you. This will enable you to write passionately and maintain your focus. For instance, you can choose topics on personal experiences, social issues, or historical events.
2. Create an outline: A good essay should have an introduction, body paragraphs, and a conclusion. Create an outline that highlights how you plan to cover these sections of the essay.
3. Use appropriate vocabulary: Appropriate vocabulary is important in enhancing the clarity and coherence of your essay. Using synonyms can also improve the readability of your writing.
4. Use transitional phrases: Transitional phrases link paragraphs and help maintain the flow of your essay. This helps the reader to easily follow your train of thought.
5. Proofread and edit: After writing your essay, proofread it for typos, grammatical errors, and spelling mistakes. Also, ask another person to read your essay and provide feedback.
With these tips in mind, you can proceed to write your 1000-word theme essay on any topic of your choice.
九年级英语人教版课件【篇9】
新目标九年级英语Unit8 It must belong to Carla教学设计
（SectionA1a----2c）
科目： 英语
设计者：
郑富平学校： 新郑市龙湖镇第二初级中学 授课班级： 九三
学生人数：
课题：
It must belong to Carla.课型：
听说课
授课日期：2015.11.24
一、教材分析
本单元中心话题是“神秘事件”，能根据相关信息对事物做推断，主要语法是情态动词might could must can’t表示推测的用法。情态动词是一种重要的词法，只有掌握好它，才能更好地进行交际和阅读。本节是本单元的第一节，本节的重点是使学生能运用情态动词might could must can’t对物品所属进行推测，通过学习用相关信息对物主的推测来提高学生的逻辑思维能力和推断能力。难点是区分belong to 和名词所有格表所属关系的运用。利用反复操练的形式来突难教学难点。
二、单元目标
1.能正确使用本单元的词汇和常用表达：truck, picnic, rabbit, noise, policeman, wolf …
run after, at the same time, belong to, thousands of 2.能正确运用must, might/could, can’t 进行推断 3.能根据相关信息预测，推断或续写故事 4.能有效获取阅读信息，归纳主题
5.能通过相关的连接词理解句子间的逻辑关系
三、学情分析
本班学生总体英语基础水平薄弱，学习方法欠佳，学困生较多，中等生为少数。学习兴趣的激发和树立学习信心是很重要的。因此，教师要创造有趣的教学情景和设计难易适宜的任务，让全班学生都能参与到活动中来，创造更多的机会让他们说英语，通过小组合作学习降低学习难度，使他们体验成功的喜悦。我主要采用任务型教学法结合情景教学、交际教学、视听说的教学法。
四、学习目标
1、知识目标 a.识记词汇
truck picnic rabbit whose belong to hair band b.掌握目标语言
Whose volleyball is this? It must be Carla’s.She loves volleyball.Whose hair band is this?
It could be Mei’s hair band.Or it might belong to Linda.They both have long hair.2、能力目标
a.学生能用情态动词并根据相关信息对物品所属进行推测。
b.学生能听懂录音并做简单的记录。
3、德育目标
通过开展对物品的推论，培养学生的逻辑思维能力和推断能力。
五、评价方案
提问；小组评比；巩固检测
六、教学重难点
重点：学生能用情态动词并根据相关信息对物品所属进行推测。
能听懂录音并做简单的记录。
难点：正确区别运用belong to 和名词所有格表示所属关系。
七、教学过程设计
Step 1 revision--------检测与铺垫
1、复习名词性物主代词（mine ,yours ,his ,hers），教师举起自己的书说：This is my book.It’s mine.It isn’t yours.接着教师走到前几位同学面前，拿起桌上的物品问其本人，然后再问其他人。
教师问： Is this your notebook? 学生答： Yes.It’s my notebook.Oh!Yes.It’s mine.教师问： Is this his/her eraser?.其他学生答： Yes.It’s his/hers.2、复习名词所有格，教师到学生当中，拿起不同学生桌上的物品问其他的学生。
教师问：whose book /ruler / backpack /… is this ? 或whose is this book/ruler/… ?
学生答：It’ s Si Huishang’s / Li Long ’s/ Gao Shang’s/… Step2 Leading in ―――自然过渡，介绍新知
1、Teach belong to 教师走到一个学生身边,然后举起他的一支笔说:The pen is He Dong’s.We can also say The pen belongs to He Dong./It belongs to him.教师再指着更多的物品让学生说 belong to 的句子。
2、Using could/might /must/can’t to guess sth.Say: Close your eyes.Then go to students and get some their school things.After a while, ask them to open their eyes and guess.T: Whose ruler is this? S: It might/could be ____________’s.被猜到的人站起来说True（表示猜对）/False（表示猜错）。其他学生就补充说：It must be ______’s./It can’t be _________’s.Note: must(100%)might, could(20-80%)can’t(0%)It must/could /might be Han Lei’s = It must/could/might belong to Han Lei.Step 3 Game “Who is it?”―――创设语言环境，激发学生兴趣
让一个学生背向着全班站在讲台上，在座的任何一位学生都可以向他/她挑战用各种声音向其说一句英语，黑板上的学生必须听声音猜人，而且每人只有三次猜的机会，猜对的被评为“火眼真金”奖励一支笔。Ｓ：It might /could be ______.Ss: True.It must be ___ 或 False.It can’t be ______.Step4 Practice-------体验实践，使用语言
1.Look at the picture and fill in the chart.(1a)2.Listening(1b)Listen and match persons with things.Read the dialogue and ask students to do pair work.3.Listening(2a&2b)Say: We’ll listen to a conversation between Bob and Anna.They found a backpack in front of school gate, whose is it? Listen carefully and find out whose it is.And make notes as you listen.While listening, ask student to repeat some sentences.Check the answers and read the conversation with you.Step5 Group work――――――布置任务，语言交际
“Find the owner”
全班分为15组，让学生4人一组来寻找其他组的物主，每组每人准备两样物品，物品放入一个袋子内，两个小组交换袋子一起来做推测。并把物品和人记录好，最后选代表做报告。
Step 6 Exercises―――――巩固知识
Fill in the blanks with “ must , might , could., can’t ”
（１）The notebook ________ be Ming’s.It was on her desk.（２）The homework ________be Carol’s.She wasn’t at school today.（３）The soccer ball _________be Jhon’s or Tony’s.They both play soccer, don’t they?（４）The French book ________be Li Ying’s.She’s the only one who’s studying French.（５）I can’t find my backpack.It ________be still at school.（６）The photo _________be Lu’s.Those are his parents.（７）The red bicycle ________be Hu’s.She has a blue bicycle.（８）This ticket _______be my aunt’s or uncle’s.They’re both going to the concert.Step 7 Summary―――强调重点
通过询问的方式来指出本节的重点。用名词所有格和 belong to表示物品的所属，根据相关信息用情态动词对物品进行推测。
八、作业设计―――拓展运用
猜猜你的朋友和家人晚上在家可能做什么，运用表推测的情态动词写一篇短文。
九、板书设计
Unit 8 It must belong to Carla.Section A(1a---2c)听说课
truck
picnic rabbit hair band whose Whose volleyball is this? It must be Carla’s.She loves volleyball.Whose hair band is this? It could be Mei’s hair band.Or it might belong to
Linda.They both have long hair.Note: be + sb.’s;
belong to sb.must(100%)might, could(20-80%)can’t(0%)It must/could /might be Han Lei’s = It must/could/might belong to Han Lei.十、教学反思
本节课教学过程自然、紧凑，学生学习氛围活跃，成功之处在于巧妙运用游戏激起学习兴趣，充分发挥了主体作用，教学重难点也在教师的引导和实践中被攻破，使学生在轻松愉快的环境中学到知识和初步运用语言。
在进行听说读写综合技能课之前，一定要做到老师和学生的课前准备，即要未雨绸缪；再有就是要根据知识目标和学生需要，适当拓展教学内容，进行有主有次、有轻有重的设计。英语学习有时真的像语文学习，需要大量的阅读与积累。看到学生兴趣盎然地讨论，交流，我真的觉得自己平时做的太少了，公开课的精心准备让我发掘出了许多除了考试之外的东西。作为一名英语教师，学生的客观情况和教学内容的特点让我们不能就教材而教教材，而是要拓展教材，适当的整合教材。这就要求我们的教师不断学习，注意时时提高自己，广泛涉猎，不断创新。
让我们每节课不妨都写好“剧本”，做好“编导”，把英语课的听、说、读、写上得生动、活泼、有内容且贴近学生的实际！
九年级英语人教版课件【篇10】
教材分析：单元的教学内容都是围绕“家”这一学生喜闻乐见的主题展开的。本节课是第四单元的第一课时，教学内容是要学习有关房间的五个单词及进行简单的对家的介绍,本课时是本单元的重点，所以首先应让学生掌握各个房间的名称，再通过Let’s do等TPR活动进行巩固操练，本节课掌握的好坏程度，直接会影响到本单元后阶段有关“描述和询问东西在哪里”的对话和故事的掌握，因此在本单元教学中具有举足轻重的地位。
Theaching goal：
1.能够听、说、认读五个有关房间的单词 study, kitchen, bedroom, bathroom, living room。
2.能够用This is my home. You can see a living room…句型简单介绍房子。
3.能够听懂“Let’s do”的指令，并做出相应的动作。
4. 培养学生对家的热爱，提高学生的口语表达能力和交际能力。
Theaching key:
熟练认读有关房间的五个单词。
Theaching difficulty:单词bathroom, living room,的正确发音。
Theaching aid: Cards Tape recorder CAI
Theaching method: TPR Pairwork Groupwork
1. Good morning. Boys and girls. How are you? Nice to meet you.
2.Let’s sing《In the Classroom》,OK?
the CAI(door ,window) What’s this? This is my home, there are many room are there? Do you visit my home? Now, let’s study Unit4 《My Home》.
1.(Show the CAI). This is my home, you can see a bedroom, a living room, a study ,a kitchen and a bathroom.
2.Look ,what’s this?(客厅) There are five words on the blackboard, listen to me and guess, which word is “living room”?Teach“living room”. There is a TV in the living room. What can you do in the living room? Teach“watch TV”.Chant “living room,living room , watch TV.”
3.(Show the CAI). .Look ,what’s this?(书房) Listen to me and guess, which word is “study”?Teach“study”. There are many books in the study. What can you do in the study? Teach“read a book”.Chant “study,study, read a book”.
4.(Show the CAI). .Look ,what’s this?(厨房) Listen to me and guess, Which word is “kitchen”?Teach“kitchen”. What can you do in the study? Teach“have a snack”.Chant “kitchen ,kitchen,have a snack”.
5.(Show the CAI). .Look ,what’s this?(bathroom) Listen to me and guess, which word is “bathroom”?Teach“bathroom”. What can you do in the bathroom? Teach“take a shower”.Chant “bathroom ,bathroom ,take a shower”.
6.(Show the CAI). .Look ,what’s this?(bed ) What’s this? (room) What’s this? (bedroom)Teach“bedroom”. There is a bed in the bedroom. What can you do in the bedroom? Teach“have a sleep”.Chant “bedroom bedroom, have a sleep”.
7.Listen to the tape and read after the tape.
8.Let’s do.
Show the “Go to the ”, put the “living room, study , kitchen, bathroom, bedroom” on, then T act “Go to the living room, watch TV. Go to the study, read a book. Go to the kitchen,have a snack. Go to the bathroom ,take a shower. Go to the bedroom, have a sleep”.
Now let’s do, ok? Follow me.
Now, this group is team one, this group is team two. Let’s go,ok?
1.炸地雷: Let’s play a game, Ok? Who can read? Read together.
2.Close your eyes, what’s missing? Guess, then tell us.
3.Now,look at the screen, Guess, what’s this? (Show the CAI ) The student guess.
4.look, this is my home,you can see a bedroom, a living room, a study ,a kitchen and a bathroom.
Who can do like me ? Tell us what’s your room like?
The students look and say.
Homework:
1.Tell your home to your friend.2. Prepare the“Lets talk.”
五、Blackblard design:
① 能听、说、认读主要单词father(dad) mother(mom)man、woman .
② 能听懂、会说Who’s that woman/man? She/He’s my mother/father. 并能在情境中运用;能够介绍自己和询问他人的家庭成员。
② 教育学生热爱自己的家，热爱自己的家人。
教学重点：
能熟练使用句型Who’s that woman/man? She/He’s my mother/father. 教学生学会如何询问他人家庭成员。
教学难点：
如何正确使用人称代词he和she。
学生分析：
三年级学生才接触英语，对英语学习很感兴趣，充满好奇。他们活泼，喜欢开展英语活动，爱好游戏。
教学内容分析：
从学生的学习实践出发，注重学生的能力培养，让学生在具体的语言情境中学习Who’s that woman/man? She/He’s my mother/father.的句型，充分考虑到学生的年龄特征和认知规律。
教学媒体资源的选择与运用：
英语卡片，英语磁带和光盘，多媒体等。
课前准备：
1、教师准备主要人物的图片，教师、明星和家庭成员照片及教学课件。
2、学生准备家人和朋友的照片。
教学过程：
① Sing an English song : boys and girls .
A:Good morning . I’m… I’m from…
Where are you from ?
A:Nice to meet you . Hi ! This is…(名字). My new friend . ……
1、出示教师演示文稿，教师扮演这个新朋友，问一位学生：What’s your name ? 引导这个女生回答：My name’s Linda . 教师及时对其他学生说:She’s Linda . 并示意学生跟着重复这句话。
2、教师指着离自己稍远的女生问：“Who’s that girl ?”引导学生回答：She’s… 3、同样的方法，教师指着离自己稍远的男生问：Who’s that boy ?引导学生回答：He’s…
4、让学生指着班里的同学做回答：Who’s that girl ? She’s…Who’s that boy ? He’s…
5、教师拿出学生们所熟悉的教师的照片询问学生：Who’s that man ? Who’s that woman ?由此引出man和woman并引导学生回答：He’s Mr Black . She’s Miss White .
6、教师可向学生出示几张同学们喜欢的几张明星的图片，让学生做Who’s that man ? Who’s that woman ?的回答练习。
7、教师出示自己的家庭照片说：This is my family . Do you know who they are ?鼓励学生对照片中的人物提问，教师用She’s my mother . He’s my father .来回答，并重复单词mother , father。教师再次用mom、dad代替mother , father进行回答，然后带读它们。并向学生指出mom和dad更多地用于日常用语中。
8、让学生观看教学课件Let’s talk的内容。
9、跟读课文对话。
10、学生分角色进行表演。
请一名学生到讲台前，并蒙住他(她)的眼睛，再叫一名学生说几句英语，让全班学生问：Who’s that boy/girl?猜的人说：He’s…/She’s…猜对了，就蒙住说话学生的眼睛，继续游戏。
2、Who’s family is this ?
教师先收集几张学生的全家福，出示其中一张问：Who’s family is this ?引导该家庭的学生迅速作反应：This is my family .然后让其他的同学对照片中的人物发问，该生回答。
3、同桌两人一组，各自出示自己的家庭照片进行操练。
发给学生每人一张纸，让学生以最快的速度画出自己的父母或好朋友。以小组为单位，根据画的画进行句型练习：Who’s that boy/girl/woman/man ? He’s… She’s…
教师对学生的表现进行评价，看看哪个同学掌握得。
学生各自拿着全家福课后互问互答。
九年级英语人教版课件【篇11】
一． 教学目的和要求（Teaching aims and demands）
1． 词汇 grateful tail lonely success make up one’s mind mostly pig education countryside treat before long regard regard…as… exactly keep experience painful rock as if at sea story two-story grab crash mobile phone at all least at least
rewarding wag vet heal injection earthquake
2． 日常交际用语 Do you like being a doctor for animals?
Vets helped heal horses,…
He started treating…
Is it easy to heal…?
It isn’t easy to give the baby an injection.
It is important to do what the doctor tells you .
It is a little painful to get an injection.
To help animals is helping people.
1． 检查家庭作业。
2． 复习可作为宠物的名字：dog, cat, snake, parrot, rabbit, fish. 问：Does anyone have a pet?让学生讨论他们拥有什么样的宠物动物。
教师问：Why do people have pets? What does the pet do for them? Where do people take their pets if they get sick?让学生两人一组套讨论这些问题。然后全班一起讨论这些问题。
学生用书第71页第1部分。口语录音带第57课，让学生合上书。问学生：What animal does the dad like best? 放录音，让学生寻找答案。全班核对答案：He doesn’t have a favourite animals.让学生打开书。再放一遍录音，让学生边听边重复。让学生通过上下文猜测生词：rewarding ,grateful, wag, tail, lonely等。如果学生猜不出来，可以允许他们查字典。
做练习册第57页练习1。全班核对答案。让学生两人一组练习朗读这个对话。让几组学生为全班表演这个对话。
练习册第57课练习2和练习3。两人一组做练习2。
完成联系册中的练习。
1． 检查家庭作业。
2． 让学生通过讨论宠物来复习词汇。
学生用书第72页第1部分。让学生分小组讨论这些读前的问题，然后全班一起讨论这两个问题。
学生用书第72页第2部分。口语录音带第58课。让学生看课文标题。问学生：What do you think this story is about ？学生两人一组讨论这个问题。然后叫几组学生说出他们的观点。然后再问：Who is the man who loved dogs?学生快速阅读课文寻找答案（James Herriot）。然后让学生再次快速阅读课文并划出不熟悉的词语。这些单词和短语应包括：Scotland, make up one’s mind, vet, mostly, heal, education, Yorkshire, countryside, treat, before long, regard, regard…as, exactly, keep, experience 等。你可以用简单的英语解释其中的一些词语，如：
make one’s mind = make a decision
vet = veterinarian which is a doctor for animals.
continue = to keep doing something and stopping.
做练习册第58课练习1。
再放一遍录音，让学生边听边重复。让学生注意语音语调。
练习册第58课练习2--4。独自做练习2。
两人一组做练习3造句子。
把练习册第58课练习3的句子写下来。
1． 检查家庭作业。
2． 复习第58课的故事，可用练习册第58课练习1中的问题作为指导。
教师说：I don’t like going to the doctor’s because I don’t like injections。出示一张打针的图片，说：When I have to get an injection, I make a face like this（痛苦的怪相）because it’s a little painful. However ,I let the doctor give me an injection because it’s necessary。当你说这些生词时把这些生词（injection, painful, necessary）写在黑板上。说：Now let’s interview each other to see how you feel about going to the doctor’s。问学生：What are some questions you can ask each other？帮助学生回答下列问题：Do you like going to the doctor’s? What do you have to get an injection? Would you like to be a doctor?等。让学生两人一组活动，相互采访。叫一组学生向全班汇报他们的采访结果。
学生用书第73页第2部分，和学生一起过一遍这些句子。保证他们知道做什么。让学生两人一组像本课第2步一样进行采访，在他们相互采访时完成这个对话。叫几组学生向全班汇报他们的采访结果。
参考答案：interesting, a good job, they are so pretty, it is very difficult
学生用书第73页第1部分。和学生一起过一遍这些句子。然后让学生两人一组看图并讨论。全班一起，让学生改变这些句子，并给出他们所想的更多的句子。答案如下：
1． It’s important to do what the doctor tells you.
2． It is a little painful to get an injection.
3． It is not easy to give the baby an injection.
4． It is necessary to take medicine on time.
5． It is not interesting to work in the hospital.
练习册第59课练习1--3。两人一组做练习1。课堂上口头做练习2。
做练习3时，先个人读一读，然后两人一组回答问题。
完成练习册中的练习。
1． 检查家庭作业。
2． 复习不定式，把下列句子写在黑板上：It is important to do what the doctor tells you. It’s a little painful to get an injection. It’s necessary to take medicine on time. It’s interesting to work in a hospital.让学生把不定式放在句首来改变这些句子。
学生用书第74页第1部分。听力训练录音带第60课。让学生合上书：告诉学生：There’s something wrong with Tom’s dog .The doctor gives him some pills.？（如有必要，解释pills的意思）.What colour are the pills?放录音，学生寻找答案（red, yellow和 white）。然后读练习册第60课练习1的表格。保证学生知道做什么。再放一、二遍录音，让学生寻找答案。学生两人一组讨论答案。最后全班一起核对答案。
听力原文：
Cody felt ill. His nose was warm and he just lay around. His owner, Joe, took him to the animal doctor.
The doctor said, “Listen carefully. I’m going to give you three different medicines. First, I’m going to give you these red pills. I want you to give one pill three times a day to Cody. Now , look at these yellow pills. I want you to give one to Cody every night before he goes to sleep. Now look at these white pills. Give him two every time his is warm, but NEVER give him more than four in a day. Do you understand?”
“ Yes, doctor.” Said Joe, “thank you very much.”
Joe took Cody home and did as the doctor told him. Soon Cody was running around as happily as ever before.
答案：
1. C 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. A 6 B.
学生用书第74页第2部分。口语录音机第60课。问学生：学生快速阅读课文并寻找答案：He grabbed the baby in his mouth. 然后让学生再认真地读一遍课文。让学生猜测下列词语：earthquake, rock, as if ,at sea, story（另一种拼写形式为storey）, two-story, grab, crash, mobile phone, least和 at least.
做练习册第60课练习2。让学生自己做这个练习，并与同伴检查答案，然后全班核对答案。
学生用书第75页第3部分。让学生两人一组自己编造谚语。让学生说明这些谚语在什么情景下使用。例如，有人犯了错误，他/她的朋友会告诉他/她：“To make a mistake is human.”建议性谚语如下：
To read every day is a door to knowledge.
To work hard is the key to happiness.
It is better to listen , than to speak and let everyone know you are a
fool.
To drive fast in the middle of town is to invite a policeman to your
car.
To help animals is the same as helping people.
学生用书第75页第4部分。首先让学生写一段关于他们父母的情况，在写作中至少要用上两处不定式。然后让他们向其同伴展示其作文。同伴为其改正错误。然后按同伴的修改意见修改作文。教师在教室内巡视，必要时提供帮助。作文样张如下：
My father is a teacher and my mother is a doctor. They both think that to work hard is the key to success. Since I was in primary school, they have always wanted me to do well in school. Even though they are both very busy, they always have time to help me with my homework. However, they also teach me to be resposible at home as well. Since I was 8 years old, I have always had jobs to do around the house. I have to keep my room clean and take out the rubbish every day. When the dog needs to go outside, it is my job to take her. I also have to walk her for at least 30 minutes a day. I’m glad my parents have taught me how to work hard. This will help me in the future.
过一遍本单元的复习要点15。必要时再给学生一些练习：可以复习前几课的对话。花点时间练习一下常用短语。复习本单元的词汇，处理学生提出的任何问题。
听写下列内容，按要求停顿。
Tom and his mother* are at the doctor ‘s.* Tom says * he has got a headache and a cough. He says * he feels very bad and tired .* But Tom has caught a bit of cold. * He thinks* that the boy will be fine* after the biggest football match of the year.
做练习册第60课练习3--6。练习3和练习5可以单独做。
练习4应首先全班一起做。然后让学生两人一组练习对话。如果时间允许，让几组学生为全班说一说他们的对话。
练习6可以两人一组做，也可以以小组的形式做。当他们完成写作之后，让他们读他们的故事。
复习本单元的内容。
把练习册的练习4的对话写在练习本里。
把练习本练习6里的故事写在练习本里。
九年级英语人教版课件【篇12】
八年级英语教学设计
Unit2 I`ll help clean up the city parks
SectionA(3a-4)
一、教学目标
1、知识目标
（1）、掌握词汇及短语：spend…doing ,set up ,put…to good use ,not only…but also ,put off ,coach ,cheer up(2)、运用提供帮助的句型：You could help coach a football team
2、能力目标
（1）、运用目标语言，能比较流利地讲述自己能够做的事情。（2）、理解not only…but also 句型的用法。
3、情感目标
通过学习增强实际交际能力，培养学生为他人着想，热爱公益事业，乐于助人的优良品质。
二、教学重点
1、能够运用语言和语法知识进行阅读并理解文章意思。
2、学会如何提供帮助。
三、教学难点
理解句子Not only do I fell good about helping other people ,but I get to spend time doing what I love to do
四、教具：录音机
五、课堂教学设计
1、Duty report
2、Warm-up，学校打算开展志愿者活动，根据自己的兴趣爱好设计自己能够做的事情，激发学生的学习兴趣。
3、Lead-in,老师提问，T:There three special students in No.77 High School,do you want to know them?展示书上的图片，让学生提问，阅读理解短文，设法找出学生提出的问题的答案，当学生阅读时，教师列出重点词汇、句式，加深学生的印象，最后放录音，巩固课文内容。
4、教学操练3b、4 让学生小组讨论解决的方法，由两三组同学表演他们的对话，使他们能流利地用英语进行交流，引导学生关心和帮助他人。
5、Survey : 利用课文4的表格，询问同学的兴趣爱好以及根据自己的兴趣爱好可以做哪些帮助人们的事，培养学生在设计生活中运用本课所学内容，解决现实生活中问题的能力。
6、难点破解
（1）、not only…but also，用来连接两个并列的成分，also可以省略，连接并列主语时，谓语动词用就近原则，Not only the students but also the teacher is running.（2）、连接两个并列句，以not only开头的句子要倒装。（3）、否定式为neither …nor.7、小结
（1）、掌握本课生词及重点用法。（2）、能用所学内容给他人提供帮助。
8、布置作业
假设你们班打算去敬老院慰问，根据他们的爱好，为他们安排合适的事情。
教学反思
通过本节课的学习，学生能学习到一定的阅读策略，通过复述和写作环节学生的书面表达能力会有所提高。